OpenCores
URL https://opencores.org/ocsvn/openrisc/openrisc/trunk

Subversion Repositories openrisc

[/] [openrisc/] [trunk/] [gnu-dev/] [or1k-gcc/] [gcc/] [doc/] [tm.texi] - Blame information for rev 711

Details | Compare with Previous | View Log

Line No. Rev Author Line
1 711 jeremybenn
@c Copyright (C) 1988,1989,1992,1993,1994,1995,1996,1997,1998,1999,2000,2001,
2
@c 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012
3
@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4
@c This is part of the GCC manual.
5
@c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
6
 
7
@node Target Macros
8
@chapter Target Description Macros and Functions
9
@cindex machine description macros
10
@cindex target description macros
11
@cindex macros, target description
12
@cindex @file{tm.h} macros
13
 
14
In addition to the file @file{@var{machine}.md}, a machine description
15
includes a C header file conventionally given the name
16
@file{@var{machine}.h} and a C source file named @file{@var{machine}.c}.
17
The header file defines numerous macros that convey the information
18
about the target machine that does not fit into the scheme of the
19
@file{.md} file.  The file @file{tm.h} should be a link to
20
@file{@var{machine}.h}.  The header file @file{config.h} includes
21
@file{tm.h} and most compiler source files include @file{config.h}.  The
22
source file defines a variable @code{targetm}, which is a structure
23
containing pointers to functions and data relating to the target
24
machine.  @file{@var{machine}.c} should also contain their definitions,
25
if they are not defined elsewhere in GCC, and other functions called
26
through the macros defined in the @file{.h} file.
27
 
28
@menu
29
* Target Structure::    The @code{targetm} variable.
30
* Driver::              Controlling how the driver runs the compilation passes.
31
* Run-time Target::     Defining @samp{-m} options like @option{-m68000} and @option{-m68020}.
32
* Per-Function Data::   Defining data structures for per-function information.
33
* Storage Layout::      Defining sizes and alignments of data.
34
* Type Layout::         Defining sizes and properties of basic user data types.
35
* Registers::           Naming and describing the hardware registers.
36
* Register Classes::    Defining the classes of hardware registers.
37
* Old Constraints::     The old way to define machine-specific constraints.
38
* Stack and Calling::   Defining which way the stack grows and by how much.
39
* Varargs::             Defining the varargs macros.
40
* Trampolines::         Code set up at run time to enter a nested function.
41
* Library Calls::       Controlling how library routines are implicitly called.
42
* Addressing Modes::    Defining addressing modes valid for memory operands.
43
* Anchored Addresses::  Defining how @option{-fsection-anchors} should work.
44
* Condition Code::      Defining how insns update the condition code.
45
* Costs::               Defining relative costs of different operations.
46
* Scheduling::          Adjusting the behavior of the instruction scheduler.
47
* Sections::            Dividing storage into text, data, and other sections.
48
* PIC::                 Macros for position independent code.
49
* Assembler Format::    Defining how to write insns and pseudo-ops to output.
50
* Debugging Info::      Defining the format of debugging output.
51
* Floating Point::      Handling floating point for cross-compilers.
52
* Mode Switching::      Insertion of mode-switching instructions.
53
* Target Attributes::   Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}.
54
* Emulated TLS::        Emulated TLS support.
55
* MIPS Coprocessors::   MIPS coprocessor support and how to customize it.
56
* PCH Target::          Validity checking for precompiled headers.
57
* C++ ABI::             Controlling C++ ABI changes.
58
* Named Address Spaces:: Adding support for named address spaces
59
* Misc::                Everything else.
60
@end menu
61
 
62
@node Target Structure
63
@section The Global @code{targetm} Variable
64
@cindex target hooks
65
@cindex target functions
66
 
67
@deftypevar {struct gcc_target} targetm
68
The target @file{.c} file must define the global @code{targetm} variable
69
which contains pointers to functions and data relating to the target
70
machine.  The variable is declared in @file{target.h};
71
@file{target-def.h} defines the macro @code{TARGET_INITIALIZER} which is
72
used to initialize the variable, and macros for the default initializers
73
for elements of the structure.  The @file{.c} file should override those
74
macros for which the default definition is inappropriate.  For example:
75
@smallexample
76
#include "target.h"
77
#include "target-def.h"
78
 
79
/* @r{Initialize the GCC target structure.}  */
80
 
81
#undef TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
82
#define TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES @var{machine}_comp_type_attributes
83
 
84
struct gcc_target targetm = TARGET_INITIALIZER;
85
@end smallexample
86
@end deftypevar
87
 
88
Where a macro should be defined in the @file{.c} file in this manner to
89
form part of the @code{targetm} structure, it is documented below as a
90
``Target Hook'' with a prototype.  Many macros will change in future
91
from being defined in the @file{.h} file to being part of the
92
@code{targetm} structure.
93
 
94
Similarly, there is a @code{targetcm} variable for hooks that are
95
specific to front ends for C-family languages, documented as ``C
96
Target Hook''.  This is declared in @file{c-family/c-target.h}, the
97
initializer @code{TARGETCM_INITIALIZER} in
98
@file{c-family/c-target-def.h}.  If targets initialize @code{targetcm}
99
themselves, they should set @code{target_has_targetcm=yes} in
100
@file{config.gcc}; otherwise a default definition is used.
101
 
102
Similarly, there is a @code{targetm_common} variable for hooks that
103
are shared between the compiler driver and the compilers proper,
104
documented as ``Common Target Hook''.  This is declared in
105
@file{common/common-target.h}, the initializer
106
@code{TARGETM_COMMON_INITIALIZER} in
107
@file{common/common-target-def.h}.  If targets initialize
108
@code{targetm_common} themselves, they should set
109
@code{target_has_targetm_common=yes} in @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a
110
default definition is used.
111
 
112
@node Driver
113
@section Controlling the Compilation Driver, @file{gcc}
114
@cindex driver
115
@cindex controlling the compilation driver
116
 
117
@c prevent bad page break with this line
118
You can control the compilation driver.
119
 
120
@defmac DRIVER_SELF_SPECS
121
A list of specs for the driver itself.  It should be a suitable
122
initializer for an array of strings, with no surrounding braces.
123
 
124
The driver applies these specs to its own command line between loading
125
default @file{specs} files (but not command-line specified ones) and
126
choosing the multilib directory or running any subcommands.  It
127
applies them in the order given, so each spec can depend on the
128
options added by earlier ones.  It is also possible to remove options
129
using @samp{%<@var{option}} in the usual way.
130
 
131
This macro can be useful when a port has several interdependent target
132
options.  It provides a way of standardizing the command line so
133
that the other specs are easier to write.
134
 
135
Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
136
@end defmac
137
 
138
@defmac OPTION_DEFAULT_SPECS
139
A list of specs used to support configure-time default options (i.e.@:
140
@option{--with} options) in the driver.  It should be a suitable initializer
141
for an array of structures, each containing two strings, without the
142
outermost pair of surrounding braces.
143
 
144
The first item in the pair is the name of the default.  This must match
145
the code in @file{config.gcc} for the target.  The second item is a spec
146
to apply if a default with this name was specified.  The string
147
@samp{%(VALUE)} in the spec will be replaced by the value of the default
148
everywhere it occurs.
149
 
150
The driver will apply these specs to its own command line between loading
151
default @file{specs} files and processing @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}, using
152
the same mechanism as @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}.
153
 
154
Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
155
@end defmac
156
 
157
@defmac CPP_SPEC
158
A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
159
pass to CPP@.  It can also specify how to translate options you
160
give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the CPP@.
161
 
162
Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
163
@end defmac
164
 
165
@defmac CPLUSPLUS_CPP_SPEC
166
This macro is just like @code{CPP_SPEC}, but is used for C++, rather
167
than C@.  If you do not define this macro, then the value of
168
@code{CPP_SPEC} (if any) will be used instead.
169
@end defmac
170
 
171
@defmac CC1_SPEC
172
A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
173
pass to @code{cc1}, @code{cc1plus}, @code{f771}, and the other language
174
front ends.
175
It can also specify how to translate options you give to GCC into options
176
for GCC to pass to front ends.
177
 
178
Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
179
@end defmac
180
 
181
@defmac CC1PLUS_SPEC
182
A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
183
pass to @code{cc1plus}.  It can also specify how to translate options you
184
give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the @code{cc1plus}.
185
 
186
Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
187
Note that everything defined in CC1_SPEC is already passed to
188
@code{cc1plus} so there is no need to duplicate the contents of
189
CC1_SPEC in CC1PLUS_SPEC@.
190
@end defmac
191
 
192
@defmac ASM_SPEC
193
A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
194
pass to the assembler.  It can also specify how to translate options
195
you give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the assembler.
196
See the file @file{sun3.h} for an example of this.
197
 
198
Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
199
@end defmac
200
 
201
@defmac ASM_FINAL_SPEC
202
A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program how to
203
run any programs which cleanup after the normal assembler.
204
Normally, this is not needed.  See the file @file{mips.h} for
205
an example of this.
206
 
207
Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
208
@end defmac
209
 
210
@defmac AS_NEEDS_DASH_FOR_PIPED_INPUT
211
Define this macro, with no value, if the driver should give the assembler
212
an argument consisting of a single dash, @option{-}, to instruct it to
213
read from its standard input (which will be a pipe connected to the
214
output of the compiler proper).  This argument is given after any
215
@option{-o} option specifying the name of the output file.
216
 
217
If you do not define this macro, the assembler is assumed to read its
218
standard input if given no non-option arguments.  If your assembler
219
cannot read standard input at all, use a @samp{%@{pipe:%e@}} construct;
220
see @file{mips.h} for instance.
221
@end defmac
222
 
223
@defmac LINK_SPEC
224
A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
225
pass to the linker.  It can also specify how to translate options you
226
give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the linker.
227
 
228
Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
229
@end defmac
230
 
231
@defmac LIB_SPEC
232
Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}.  The difference
233
between the two is that @code{LIB_SPEC} is used at the end of the
234
command given to the linker.
235
 
236
If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that
237
loads the standard C library from the usual place.  See @file{gcc.c}.
238
@end defmac
239
 
240
@defmac LIBGCC_SPEC
241
Another C string constant that tells the GCC driver program
242
how and when to place a reference to @file{libgcc.a} into the
243
linker command line.  This constant is placed both before and after
244
the value of @code{LIB_SPEC}.
245
 
246
If this macro is not defined, the GCC driver provides a default that
247
passes the string @option{-lgcc} to the linker.
248
@end defmac
249
 
250
@defmac REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC
251
By default, if @code{ENABLE_SHARED_LIBGCC} is defined, the
252
@code{LIBGCC_SPEC} is not directly used by the driver program but is
253
instead modified to refer to different versions of @file{libgcc.a}
254
depending on the values of the command line flags @option{-static},
255
@option{-shared}, @option{-static-libgcc}, and @option{-shared-libgcc}.  On
256
targets where these modifications are inappropriate, define
257
@code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} instead.  @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} tells the
258
driver how to place a reference to @file{libgcc} on the link command
259
line, but, unlike @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}, it is used unmodified.
260
@end defmac
261
 
262
@defmac USE_LD_AS_NEEDED
263
A macro that controls the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}
264
mentioned in @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}.  If nonzero, a spec will be
265
generated that uses --as-needed and the shared libgcc in place of the
266
static exception handler library, when linking without any of
267
@code{-static}, @code{-static-libgcc}, or @code{-shared-libgcc}.
268
@end defmac
269
 
270
@defmac LINK_EH_SPEC
271
If defined, this C string constant is added to @code{LINK_SPEC}.
272
When @code{USE_LD_AS_NEEDED} is zero or undefined, it also affects
273
the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} mentioned in
274
@code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}.
275
@end defmac
276
 
277
@defmac STARTFILE_SPEC
278
Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}.  The
279
difference between the two is that @code{STARTFILE_SPEC} is used at
280
the very beginning of the command given to the linker.
281
 
282
If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that loads the
283
standard C startup file from the usual place.  See @file{gcc.c}.
284
@end defmac
285
 
286
@defmac ENDFILE_SPEC
287
Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}.  The
288
difference between the two is that @code{ENDFILE_SPEC} is used at
289
the very end of the command given to the linker.
290
 
291
Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
292
@end defmac
293
 
294
@defmac THREAD_MODEL_SPEC
295
GCC @code{-v} will print the thread model GCC was configured to use.
296
However, this doesn't work on platforms that are multilibbed on thread
297
models, such as AIX 4.3.  On such platforms, define
298
@code{THREAD_MODEL_SPEC} such that it evaluates to a string without
299
blanks that names one of the recognized thread models.  @code{%*}, the
300
default value of this macro, will expand to the value of
301
@code{thread_file} set in @file{config.gcc}.
302
@end defmac
303
 
304
@defmac SYSROOT_SUFFIX_SPEC
305
Define this macro to add a suffix to the target sysroot when GCC is
306
configured with a sysroot.  This will cause GCC to search for usr/lib,
307
et al, within sysroot+suffix.
308
@end defmac
309
 
310
@defmac SYSROOT_HEADERS_SUFFIX_SPEC
311
Define this macro to add a headers_suffix to the target sysroot when
312
GCC is configured with a sysroot.  This will cause GCC to pass the
313
updated sysroot+headers_suffix to CPP, causing it to search for
314
usr/include, et al, within sysroot+headers_suffix.
315
@end defmac
316
 
317
@defmac EXTRA_SPECS
318
Define this macro to provide additional specifications to put in the
319
@file{specs} file that can be used in various specifications like
320
@code{CC1_SPEC}.
321
 
322
The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures,
323
containing a string constant, that defines the specification name, and a
324
string constant that provides the specification.
325
 
326
Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
327
 
328
@code{EXTRA_SPECS} is useful when an architecture contains several
329
related targets, which have various @code{@dots{}_SPECS} which are similar
330
to each other, and the maintainer would like one central place to keep
331
these definitions.
332
 
333
For example, the PowerPC System V.4 targets use @code{EXTRA_SPECS} to
334
define either @code{_CALL_SYSV} when the System V calling sequence is
335
used or @code{_CALL_AIX} when the older AIX-based calling sequence is
336
used.
337
 
338
The @file{config/rs6000/rs6000.h} target file defines:
339
 
340
@smallexample
341
#define EXTRA_SPECS \
342
  @{ "cpp_sysv_default", CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT @},
343
 
344
#define CPP_SYS_DEFAULT ""
345
@end smallexample
346
 
347
The @file{config/rs6000/sysv.h} target file defines:
348
@smallexample
349
#undef CPP_SPEC
350
#define CPP_SPEC \
351
"%@{posix: -D_POSIX_SOURCE @} \
352
%@{mcall-sysv: -D_CALL_SYSV @} \
353
%@{!mcall-sysv: %(cpp_sysv_default) @} \
354
%@{msoft-float: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@} %@{mcpu=403: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@}"
355
 
356
#undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
357
#define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_SYSV"
358
@end smallexample
359
 
360
while the @file{config/rs6000/eabiaix.h} target file defines
361
@code{CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT} as:
362
 
363
@smallexample
364
#undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
365
#define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_AIX"
366
@end smallexample
367
@end defmac
368
 
369
@defmac LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
370
Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
371
@file{libgcc.a}.  If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
372
the argument @option{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search.
373
@end defmac
374
 
375
@defmac LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC
376
The sequence in which libgcc and libc are specified to the linker.
377
By default this is @code{%G %L %G}.
378
@end defmac
379
 
380
@defmac LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
381
A C string constant giving the complete command line need to execute the
382
linker.  When you do this, you will need to update your port each time a
383
change is made to the link command line within @file{gcc.c}.  Therefore,
384
define this macro only if you need to completely redefine the command
385
line for invoking the linker and there is no other way to accomplish
386
the effect you need.  Overriding this macro may be avoidable by overriding
387
@code{LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC} instead.
388
@end defmac
389
 
390
@defmac LINK_ELIMINATE_DUPLICATE_LDIRECTORIES
391
A nonzero value causes @command{collect2} to remove duplicate @option{-L@var{directory}} search
392
directories from linking commands.  Do not give it a nonzero value if
393
removing duplicate search directories changes the linker's semantics.
394
@end defmac
395
 
396
@deftypevr {Common Target Hook} bool TARGET_ALWAYS_STRIP_DOTDOT
397
True if @file{..} components should always be removed from directory names computed relative to GCC's internal directories, false (default) if such components should be preserved and directory names containing them passed to other tools such as the linker.
398
@end deftypevr
399
 
400
@defmac MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
401
Define this macro as a C expression for the initializer of an array of
402
string to tell the driver program which options are defaults for this
403
target and thus do not need to be handled specially when using
404
@code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS}.
405
 
406
Do not define this macro if @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} is not defined in
407
the target makefile fragment or if none of the options listed in
408
@code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} are set by default.
409
@xref{Target Fragment}.
410
@end defmac
411
 
412
@defmac RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
413
Define this macro to tell @command{gcc} that it should only translate
414
a @option{-B} prefix into a @option{-L} linker option if the prefix
415
indicates an absolute file name.
416
@end defmac
417
 
418
@defmac MD_EXEC_PREFIX
419
If defined, this macro is an additional prefix to try after
420
@code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}.  @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched
421
when the compiler is built as a cross
422
compiler.  If you define @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, then be sure to add it
423
to the list of directories used to find the assembler in @file{configure.in}.
424
@end defmac
425
 
426
@defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
427
Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
428
standard choice of @code{libdir} as the default prefix to
429
try when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
430
@code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX} is not searched when the compiler
431
is built as a cross compiler.
432
@end defmac
433
 
434
@defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
435
Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
436
standard choice of @code{/lib} as a prefix to try after the default prefix
437
when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
438
@code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1} is not searched when the compiler
439
is built as a cross compiler.
440
@end defmac
441
 
442
@defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2
443
Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
444
standard choice of @code{/lib} as yet another prefix to try after the
445
default prefix when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
446
@code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2} is not searched when the compiler
447
is built as a cross compiler.
448
@end defmac
449
 
450
@defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
451
If defined, this macro supplies an additional prefix to try after the
452
standard prefixes.  @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched when the
453
compiler is built as a cross compiler.
454
@end defmac
455
 
456
@defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
457
If defined, this macro supplies yet another prefix to try after the
458
standard prefixes.  It is not searched when the compiler is built as a
459
cross compiler.
460
@end defmac
461
 
462
@defmac INIT_ENVIRONMENT
463
Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to set environment
464
variables for programs called by the driver, such as the assembler and
465
loader.  The driver passes the value of this macro to @code{putenv} to
466
initialize the necessary environment variables.
467
@end defmac
468
 
469
@defmac LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
470
Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
471
standard choice of @file{/usr/local/include} as the default prefix to
472
try when searching for local header files.  @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR}
473
comes before @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR} (set in
474
@file{config.gcc}, normally @file{/usr/include}) in the search order.
475
 
476
Cross compilers do not search either @file{/usr/local/include} or its
477
replacement.
478
@end defmac
479
 
480
@defmac NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_COMPONENT
481
The ``component'' corresponding to @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}.
482
See @code{INCLUDE_DEFAULTS}, below, for the description of components.
483
If you do not define this macro, no component is used.
484
@end defmac
485
 
486
@defmac INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
487
Define this macro if you wish to override the entire default search path
488
for include files.  For a native compiler, the default search path
489
usually consists of @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR},
490
@code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}, and
491
@code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}.  In addition, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}
492
and @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR} are defined automatically by @file{Makefile},
493
and specify private search areas for GCC@.  The directory
494
@code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR} is used only for C++ programs.
495
 
496
The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures.
497
Each array element should have four elements: the directory name (a
498
string constant), the component name (also a string constant), a flag
499
for C++-only directories,
500
and a flag showing that the includes in the directory don't need to be
501
wrapped in @code{extern @samp{C}} when compiling C++.  Mark the end of
502
the array with a null element.
503
 
504
The component name denotes what GNU package the include file is part of,
505
if any, in all uppercase letters.  For example, it might be @samp{GCC}
506
or @samp{BINUTILS}.  If the package is part of a vendor-supplied
507
operating system, code the component name as @samp{0}.
508
 
509
For example, here is the definition used for VAX/VMS:
510
 
511
@smallexample
512
#define INCLUDE_DEFAULTS \
513
@{                                       \
514
  @{ "GNU_GXX_INCLUDE:", "G++", 1, 1@},   \
515
  @{ "GNU_CC_INCLUDE:", "GCC", 0, 0@},    \
516
  @{ "SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSLIB.]", 0, 0, 0@},  \
517
  @{ ".", 0, 0, 0@},                      \
518
  @{ 0, 0, 0, 0@}                         \
519
@}
520
@end smallexample
521
@end defmac
522
 
523
Here is the order of prefixes tried for exec files:
524
 
525
@enumerate
526
@item
527
Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
528
 
529
@item
530
The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or, if @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}
531
is not set and the compiler has not been installed in the configure-time
532
@var{prefix}, the location in which the compiler has actually been installed.
533
 
534
@item
535
The directories specified by the environment variable @code{COMPILER_PATH}.
536
 
537
@item
538
The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if the compiler has been installed
539
in the configured-time @var{prefix}.
540
 
541
@item
542
The location @file{/usr/libexec/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
543
 
544
@item
545
The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
546
 
547
@item
548
The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
549
compiler.
550
@end enumerate
551
 
552
Here is the order of prefixes tried for startfiles:
553
 
554
@enumerate
555
@item
556
Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
557
 
558
@item
559
The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or its automatically determined
560
value based on the installed toolchain location.
561
 
562
@item
563
The directories specified by the environment variable @code{LIBRARY_PATH}
564
(or port-specific name; native only, cross compilers do not use this).
565
 
566
@item
567
The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, but only if the toolchain is installed
568
in the configured @var{prefix} or this is a native compiler.
569
 
570
@item
571
The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
572
 
573
@item
574
The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
575
compiler.
576
 
577
@item
578
The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a
579
native compiler, or we have a target system root.
580
 
581
@item
582
The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, if defined, but only if this is a
583
native compiler, or we have a target system root.
584
 
585
@item
586
The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, with any sysroot modifications.
587
If this path is relative it will be prefixed by @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} and
588
the machine suffix or @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX} and the machine suffix.
589
 
590
@item
591
The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, but only if this is a native
592
compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
593
@file{/lib/}.
594
 
595
@item
596
The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2}, but only if this is a native
597
compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
598
@file{/usr/lib/}.
599
@end enumerate
600
 
601
@node Run-time Target
602
@section Run-time Target Specification
603
@cindex run-time target specification
604
@cindex predefined macros
605
@cindex target specifications
606
 
607
@c prevent bad page break with this line
608
Here are run-time target specifications.
609
 
610
@defmac TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS ()
611
This function-like macro expands to a block of code that defines
612
built-in preprocessor macros and assertions for the target CPU, using
613
the functions @code{builtin_define}, @code{builtin_define_std} and
614
@code{builtin_assert}.  When the front end
615
calls this macro it provides a trailing semicolon, and since it has
616
finished command line option processing your code can use those
617
results freely.
618
 
619
@code{builtin_assert} takes a string in the form you pass to the
620
command-line option @option{-A}, such as @code{cpu=mips}, and creates
621
the assertion.  @code{builtin_define} takes a string in the form
622
accepted by option @option{-D} and unconditionally defines the macro.
623
 
624
@code{builtin_define_std} takes a string representing the name of an
625
object-like macro.  If it doesn't lie in the user's namespace,
626
@code{builtin_define_std} defines it unconditionally.  Otherwise, it
627
defines a version with two leading underscores, and another version
628
with two leading and trailing underscores, and defines the original
629
only if an ISO standard was not requested on the command line.  For
630
example, passing @code{unix} defines @code{__unix}, @code{__unix__}
631
and possibly @code{unix}; passing @code{_mips} defines @code{__mips},
632
@code{__mips__} and possibly @code{_mips}, and passing @code{_ABI64}
633
defines only @code{_ABI64}.
634
 
635
You can also test for the C dialect being compiled.  The variable
636
@code{c_language} is set to one of @code{clk_c}, @code{clk_cplusplus}
637
or @code{clk_objective_c}.  Note that if we are preprocessing
638
assembler, this variable will be @code{clk_c} but the function-like
639
macro @code{preprocessing_asm_p()} will return true, so you might want
640
to check for that first.  If you need to check for strict ANSI, the
641
variable @code{flag_iso} can be used.  The function-like macro
642
@code{preprocessing_trad_p()} can be used to check for traditional
643
preprocessing.
644
@end defmac
645
 
646
@defmac TARGET_OS_CPP_BUILTINS ()
647
Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
648
and is used for the target operating system instead.
649
@end defmac
650
 
651
@defmac TARGET_OBJFMT_CPP_BUILTINS ()
652
Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
653
and is used for the target object format.  @file{elfos.h} uses this
654
macro to define @code{__ELF__}, so you probably do not need to define
655
it yourself.
656
@end defmac
657
 
658
@deftypevar {extern int} target_flags
659
This variable is declared in @file{options.h}, which is included before
660
any target-specific headers.
661
@end deftypevar
662
 
663
@deftypevr {Common Target Hook} int TARGET_DEFAULT_TARGET_FLAGS
664
This variable specifies the initial value of @code{target_flags}.
665
Its default setting is 0.
666
@end deftypevr
667
 
668
@cindex optional hardware or system features
669
@cindex features, optional, in system conventions
670
 
671
@deftypefn {Common Target Hook} bool TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION (struct gcc_options *@var{opts}, struct gcc_options *@var{opts_set}, const struct cl_decoded_option *@var{decoded}, location_t @var{loc})
672
This hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
673
target-specific options described by the @file{.opt} definition files
674
(@pxref{Options}).  It has the opportunity to do some option-specific
675
processing and should return true if the option is valid.  The default
676
definition does nothing but return true.
677
 
678
@var{decoded} specifies the option and its arguments.  @var{opts} and
679
@var{opts_set} are the @code{gcc_options} structures to be used for
680
storing option state, and @var{loc} is the location at which the
681
option was passed (@code{UNKNOWN_LOCATION} except for options passed
682
via attributes).
683
@end deftypefn
684
 
685
@deftypefn {C Target Hook} bool TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION (size_t @var{code}, const char *@var{arg}, int @var{value})
686
This target hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
687
target-specific C language family options described by the @file{.opt}
688
definition files(@pxref{Options}).  It has the opportunity to do some
689
option-specific processing and should return true if the option is
690
valid.  The arguments are like for @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION}.  The
691
default definition does nothing but return false.
692
 
693
In general, you should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION} to handle
694
options.  However, if processing an option requires routines that are
695
only available in the C (and related language) front ends, then you
696
should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION} instead.
697
@end deftypefn
698
 
699
@deftypefn {C Target Hook} tree TARGET_OBJC_CONSTRUCT_STRING_OBJECT (tree @var{string})
700
Targets may provide a string object type that can be used within and between C, C++ and their respective Objective-C dialects. A string object might, for example, embed encoding and length information. These objects are considered opaque to the compiler and handled as references. An ideal implementation makes the composition of the string object match that of the Objective-C @code{NSString} (@code{NXString} for GNUStep), allowing efficient interworking between C-only and Objective-C code. If a target implements string objects then this hook should return a reference to such an object constructed from the normal `C' string representation provided in @var{string}. At present, the hook is used by Objective-C only, to obtain a common-format string object when the target provides one.
701
@end deftypefn
702
 
703
@deftypefn {C Target Hook} bool TARGET_STRING_OBJECT_REF_TYPE_P (const_tree @var{stringref})
704
If a target implements string objects then this hook should return @code{true} if @var{stringref} is a valid reference to such an object.
705
@end deftypefn
706
 
707
@deftypefn {C Target Hook} void TARGET_CHECK_STRING_OBJECT_FORMAT_ARG (tree @var{format_arg}, tree @var{args_list})
708
If a target implements string objects then this hook should should  provide a facility to check the function arguments in @var{args_list}  against the format specifiers in @var{format_arg} where the type of  @var{format_arg} is one recognized as a valid string reference type.
709
@end deftypefn
710
 
711
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS_AFTER_CHANGE (void)
712
This target function is similar to the hook @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}
713
but is called when the optimize level is changed via an attribute or
714
pragma or when it is reset at the end of the code affected by the
715
attribute or pragma.  It is not called at the beginning of compilation
716
when @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE} is called so if you want to perform these
717
actions then, you should have @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE} call
718
@code{TARGET_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS_AFTER_CHANGE}.
719
@end deftypefn
720
 
721
@defmac C_COMMON_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
722
This is similar to the @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE} hook
723
but is only used in the C
724
language frontends (C, Objective-C, C++, Objective-C++) and so can be
725
used to alter option flag variables which only exist in those
726
frontends.
727
@end defmac
728
 
729
@deftypevr {Common Target Hook} {const struct default_options *} TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION_TABLE
730
Some machines may desire to change what optimizations are performed for
731
various optimization levels.   This variable, if defined, describes
732
options to enable at particular sets of optimization levels.  These
733
options are processed once
734
just after the optimization level is determined and before the remainder
735
of the command options have been parsed, so may be overridden by other
736
options passed explicitly.
737
 
738
This processing is run once at program startup and when the optimization
739
options are changed via @code{#pragma GCC optimize} or by using the
740
@code{optimize} attribute.
741
@end deftypevr
742
 
743
@deftypefn {Common Target Hook} void TARGET_OPTION_INIT_STRUCT (struct gcc_options *@var{opts})
744
Set target-dependent initial values of fields in @var{opts}.
745
@end deftypefn
746
 
747
@deftypefn {Common Target Hook} void TARGET_OPTION_DEFAULT_PARAMS (void)
748
Set target-dependent default values for @option{--param} settings, using calls to @code{set_default_param_value}.
749
@end deftypefn
750
 
751
@defmac SWITCHABLE_TARGET
752
Some targets need to switch between substantially different subtargets
753
during compilation.  For example, the MIPS target has one subtarget for
754
the traditional MIPS architecture and another for MIPS16.  Source code
755
can switch between these two subarchitectures using the @code{mips16}
756
and @code{nomips16} attributes.
757
 
758
Such subtargets can differ in things like the set of available
759
registers, the set of available instructions, the costs of various
760
operations, and so on.  GCC caches a lot of this type of information
761
in global variables, and recomputing them for each subtarget takes a
762
significant amount of time.  The compiler therefore provides a facility
763
for maintaining several versions of the global variables and quickly
764
switching between them; see @file{target-globals.h} for details.
765
 
766
Define this macro to 1 if your target needs this facility.  The default
767
is 0.
768
@end defmac
769
 
770
@node Per-Function Data
771
@section Defining data structures for per-function information.
772
@cindex per-function data
773
@cindex data structures
774
 
775
If the target needs to store information on a per-function basis, GCC
776
provides a macro and a couple of variables to allow this.  Note, just
777
using statics to store the information is a bad idea, since GCC supports
778
nested functions, so you can be halfway through encoding one function
779
when another one comes along.
780
 
781
GCC defines a data structure called @code{struct function} which
782
contains all of the data specific to an individual function.  This
783
structure contains a field called @code{machine} whose type is
784
@code{struct machine_function *}, which can be used by targets to point
785
to their own specific data.
786
 
787
If a target needs per-function specific data it should define the type
788
@code{struct machine_function} and also the macro @code{INIT_EXPANDERS}.
789
This macro should be used to initialize the function pointer
790
@code{init_machine_status}.  This pointer is explained below.
791
 
792
One typical use of per-function, target specific data is to create an
793
RTX to hold the register containing the function's return address.  This
794
RTX can then be used to implement the @code{__builtin_return_address}
795
function, for level 0.
796
 
797
Note---earlier implementations of GCC used a single data area to hold
798
all of the per-function information.  Thus when processing of a nested
799
function began the old per-function data had to be pushed onto a
800
stack, and when the processing was finished, it had to be popped off the
801
stack.  GCC used to provide function pointers called
802
@code{save_machine_status} and @code{restore_machine_status} to handle
803
the saving and restoring of the target specific information.  Since the
804
single data area approach is no longer used, these pointers are no
805
longer supported.
806
 
807
@defmac INIT_EXPANDERS
808
Macro called to initialize any target specific information.  This macro
809
is called once per function, before generation of any RTL has begun.
810
The intention of this macro is to allow the initialization of the
811
function pointer @code{init_machine_status}.
812
@end defmac
813
 
814
@deftypevar {void (*)(struct function *)} init_machine_status
815
If this function pointer is non-@code{NULL} it will be called once per
816
function, before function compilation starts, in order to allow the
817
target to perform any target specific initialization of the
818
@code{struct function} structure.  It is intended that this would be
819
used to initialize the @code{machine} of that structure.
820
 
821
@code{struct machine_function} structures are expected to be freed by GC@.
822
Generally, any memory that they reference must be allocated by using
823
GC allocation, including the structure itself.
824
@end deftypevar
825
 
826
@node Storage Layout
827
@section Storage Layout
828
@cindex storage layout
829
 
830
Note that the definitions of the macros in this table which are sizes or
831
alignments measured in bits do not need to be constant.  They can be C
832
expressions that refer to static variables, such as the @code{target_flags}.
833
@xref{Run-time Target}.
834
 
835
@defmac BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
836
Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant bit in a
837
byte has the lowest number; otherwise define it to have the value zero.
838
This means that bit-field instructions count from the most significant
839
bit.  If the machine has no bit-field instructions, then this must still
840
be defined, but it doesn't matter which value it is defined to.  This
841
macro need not be a constant.
842
 
843
This macro does not affect the way structure fields are packed into
844
bytes or words; that is controlled by @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN}.
845
@end defmac
846
 
847
@defmac BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
848
Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant byte in a
849
word has the lowest number.  This macro need not be a constant.
850
@end defmac
851
 
852
@defmac WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
853
Define this macro to have the value 1 if, in a multiword object, the
854
most significant word has the lowest number.  This applies to both
855
memory locations and registers; see @code{REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} if the
856
order of words in memory is not the same as the order in registers.  This
857
macro need not be a constant.
858
@end defmac
859
 
860
@defmac REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
861
On some machines, the order of words in a multiword object differs between
862
registers in memory.  In such a situation, define this macro to describe
863
the order of words in a register.  The macro @code{WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} controls
864
the order of words in memory.
865
@end defmac
866
 
867
@defmac FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
868
Define this macro to have the value 1 if @code{DFmode}, @code{XFmode} or
869
@code{TFmode} floating point numbers are stored in memory with the word
870
containing the sign bit at the lowest address; otherwise define it to
871
have the value 0.  This macro need not be a constant.
872
 
873
You need not define this macro if the ordering is the same as for
874
multi-word integers.
875
@end defmac
876
 
877
@defmac BITS_PER_UNIT
878
Define this macro to be the number of bits in an addressable storage
879
unit (byte).  If you do not define this macro the default is 8.
880
@end defmac
881
 
882
@defmac BITS_PER_WORD
883
Number of bits in a word.  If you do not define this macro, the default
884
is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * UNITS_PER_WORD}.
885
@end defmac
886
 
887
@defmac MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
888
Maximum number of bits in a word.  If this is undefined, the default is
889
@code{BITS_PER_WORD}.  Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
890
largest value that @code{BITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
891
@end defmac
892
 
893
@defmac UNITS_PER_WORD
894
Number of storage units in a word; normally the size of a general-purpose
895
register, a power of two from 1 or 8.
896
@end defmac
897
 
898
@defmac MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
899
Minimum number of units in a word.  If this is undefined, the default is
900
@code{UNITS_PER_WORD}.  Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
901
smallest value that @code{UNITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
902
@end defmac
903
 
904
@defmac POINTER_SIZE
905
Width of a pointer, in bits.  You must specify a value no wider than the
906
width of @code{Pmode}.  If it is not equal to the width of @code{Pmode},
907
you must define @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED}.  If you do not specify
908
a value the default is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
909
@end defmac
910
 
911
@defmac POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
912
A C expression that determines how pointers should be extended from
913
@code{ptr_mode} to either @code{Pmode} or @code{word_mode}.  It is
914
greater than zero if pointers should be zero-extended, zero if they
915
should be sign-extended, and negative if some other sort of conversion
916
is needed.  In the last case, the extension is done by the target's
917
@code{ptr_extend} instruction.
918
 
919
You need not define this macro if the @code{ptr_mode}, @code{Pmode}
920
and @code{word_mode} are all the same width.
921
@end defmac
922
 
923
@defmac PROMOTE_MODE (@var{m}, @var{unsignedp}, @var{type})
924
A macro to update @var{m} and @var{unsignedp} when an object whose type
925
is @var{type} and which has the specified mode and signedness is to be
926
stored in a register.  This macro is only called when @var{type} is a
927
scalar type.
928
 
929
On most RISC machines, which only have operations that operate on a full
930
register, define this macro to set @var{m} to @code{word_mode} if
931
@var{m} is an integer mode narrower than @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.  In most
932
cases, only integer modes should be widened because wider-precision
933
floating-point operations are usually more expensive than their narrower
934
counterparts.
935
 
936
For most machines, the macro definition does not change @var{unsignedp}.
937
However, some machines, have instructions that preferentially handle
938
either signed or unsigned quantities of certain modes.  For example, on
939
the DEC Alpha, 32-bit loads from memory and 32-bit add instructions
940
sign-extend the result to 64 bits.  On such machines, set
941
@var{unsignedp} according to which kind of extension is more efficient.
942
 
943
Do not define this macro if it would never modify @var{m}.
944
@end defmac
945
 
946
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {enum machine_mode} TARGET_PROMOTE_FUNCTION_MODE (const_tree @var{type}, enum machine_mode @var{mode}, int *@var{punsignedp}, const_tree @var{funtype}, int @var{for_return})
947
Like @code{PROMOTE_MODE}, but it is applied to outgoing function arguments or
948
function return values.  The target hook should return the new mode
949
and possibly change @code{*@var{punsignedp}} if the promotion should
950
change signedness.  This function is called only for scalar @emph{or
951
pointer} types.
952
 
953
@var{for_return} allows to distinguish the promotion of arguments and
954
return values.  If it is @code{1}, a return value is being promoted and
955
@code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} must perform the same promotions done here.
956
If it is @code{2}, the returned mode should be that of the register in
957
which an incoming parameter is copied, or the outgoing result is computed;
958
then the hook should return the same mode as @code{promote_mode}, though
959
the signedness may be different.
960
 
961
@var{type} can be NULL when promoting function arguments of libcalls.
962
 
963
The default is to not promote arguments and return values.  You can
964
also define the hook to @code{default_promote_function_mode_always_promote}
965
if you would like to apply the same rules given by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}.
966
@end deftypefn
967
 
968
@defmac PARM_BOUNDARY
969
Normal alignment required for function parameters on the stack, in
970
bits.  All stack parameters receive at least this much alignment
971
regardless of data type.  On most machines, this is the same as the
972
size of an integer.
973
@end defmac
974
 
975
@defmac STACK_BOUNDARY
976
Define this macro to the minimum alignment enforced by hardware for the
977
stack pointer on this machine.  The definition is a C expression for the
978
desired alignment (measured in bits).  This value is used as a default
979
if @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY} is not defined.  On most machines,
980
this should be the same as @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}.
981
@end defmac
982
 
983
@defmac PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY
984
Define this macro if you wish to preserve a certain alignment for the
985
stack pointer, greater than what the hardware enforces.  The definition
986
is a C expression for the desired alignment (measured in bits).  This
987
macro must evaluate to a value equal to or larger than
988
@code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
989
@end defmac
990
 
991
@defmac INCOMING_STACK_BOUNDARY
992
Define this macro if the incoming stack boundary may be different
993
from @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}.  This macro must evaluate
994
to a value equal to or larger than @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
995
@end defmac
996
 
997
@defmac FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
998
Alignment required for a function entry point, in bits.
999
@end defmac
1000
 
1001
@defmac BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
1002
Biggest alignment that any data type can require on this machine, in
1003
bits.  Note that this is not the biggest alignment that is supported,
1004
just the biggest alignment that, when violated, may cause a fault.
1005
@end defmac
1006
 
1007
@defmac MALLOC_ABI_ALIGNMENT
1008
Alignment, in bits, a C conformant malloc implementation has to
1009
provide.  If not defined, the default value is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
1010
@end defmac
1011
 
1012
@defmac ATTRIBUTE_ALIGNED_VALUE
1013
Alignment used by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned))} construct.  If
1014
not defined, the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1015
@end defmac
1016
 
1017
@defmac MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
1018
If defined, the smallest alignment, in bits, that can be given to an
1019
object that can be referenced in one operation, without disturbing any
1020
nearby object.  Normally, this is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}, but may be larger
1021
on machines that don't have byte or half-word store operations.
1022
@end defmac
1023
 
1024
@defmac BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
1025
Biggest alignment that any structure or union field can require on this
1026
machine, in bits.  If defined, this overrides @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} for
1027
structure and union fields only, unless the field alignment has been set
1028
by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct.
1029
@end defmac
1030
 
1031
@defmac ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN (@var{field}, @var{computed})
1032
An expression for the alignment of a structure field @var{field} if the
1033
alignment computed in the usual way (including applying of
1034
@code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} and @code{BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT} to the
1035
alignment) is @var{computed}.  It overrides alignment only if the
1036
field alignment has not been set by the
1037
@code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct.
1038
@end defmac
1039
 
1040
@defmac MAX_STACK_ALIGNMENT
1041
Biggest stack alignment guaranteed by the backend.  Use this macro
1042
to specify the maximum alignment of a variable on stack.
1043
 
1044
If not defined, the default value is @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
1045
 
1046
@c FIXME: The default should be @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}.
1047
@c But the fix for PR 32893 indicates that we can only guarantee
1048
@c maximum stack alignment on stack up to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, not
1049
@c @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}, if stack alignment isn't supported.
1050
@end defmac
1051
 
1052
@defmac MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
1053
Biggest alignment supported by the object file format of this machine.
1054
Use this macro to limit the alignment which can be specified using the
1055
@code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct.  If not defined,
1056
the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1057
 
1058
On systems that use ELF, the default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is
1059
the largest supported 32-bit ELF section alignment representable on
1060
a 32-bit host e.g. @samp{(((unsigned HOST_WIDEST_INT) 1 << 28) * 8)}.
1061
On 32-bit ELF the largest supported section alignment in bits is
1062
@samp{(0x80000000 * 8)}, but this is not representable on 32-bit hosts.
1063
@end defmac
1064
 
1065
@defmac DATA_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1066
If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1067
the static store.  @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1068
the alignment that the object would ordinarily have.  The value of this
1069
macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1070
 
1071
If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1072
 
1073
@findex strcpy
1074
One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1075
make it all fit in fewer cache lines.  Another is to cause character
1076
arrays to be word-aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
1077
constants to character arrays can be done inline.
1078
@end defmac
1079
 
1080
@defmac CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT (@var{constant}, @var{basic-align})
1081
If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment given to a constant
1082
that is being placed in memory.  @var{constant} is the constant and
1083
@var{basic-align} is the alignment that the object would ordinarily
1084
have.  The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
1085
align the object.
1086
 
1087
If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1088
 
1089
The typical use of this macro is to increase alignment for string
1090
constants to be word aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
1091
constants can be done inline.
1092
@end defmac
1093
 
1094
@defmac LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1095
If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1096
the local store.  @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1097
the alignment that the object would ordinarily have.  The value of this
1098
macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1099
 
1100
If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1101
 
1102
One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1103
make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1104
 
1105
If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1106
@end defmac
1107
 
1108
@defmac STACK_SLOT_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{mode}, @var{basic-align})
1109
If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for stack slot.
1110
@var{type} is the data type, @var{mode} is the widest mode available,
1111
and @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the slot would ordinarily
1112
have.  The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
1113
align the slot.
1114
 
1115
If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used when
1116
@var{type} is @code{NULL}.  Otherwise, @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT} will
1117
be used.
1118
 
1119
This macro is to set alignment of stack slot to the maximum alignment
1120
of all possible modes which the slot may have.
1121
 
1122
If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1123
@end defmac
1124
 
1125
@defmac LOCAL_DECL_ALIGNMENT (@var{decl})
1126
If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a local
1127
variable @var{decl}.
1128
 
1129
If this macro is not defined, then
1130
@code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (TREE_TYPE (@var{decl}), DECL_ALIGN (@var{decl}))}
1131
is used.
1132
 
1133
One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1134
make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1135
 
1136
If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1137
@end defmac
1138
 
1139
@defmac MINIMUM_ALIGNMENT (@var{exp}, @var{mode}, @var{align})
1140
If defined, a C expression to compute the minimum required alignment
1141
for dynamic stack realignment purposes for @var{exp} (a type or decl),
1142
@var{mode}, assuming normal alignment @var{align}.
1143
 
1144
If this macro is not defined, then @var{align} will be used.
1145
@end defmac
1146
 
1147
@defmac EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
1148
Alignment in bits to be given to a structure bit-field that follows an
1149
empty field such as @code{int : 0;}.
1150
 
1151
If @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} is true, it overrides this macro.
1152
@end defmac
1153
 
1154
@defmac STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
1155
Number of bits which any structure or union's size must be a multiple of.
1156
Each structure or union's size is rounded up to a multiple of this.
1157
 
1158
If you do not define this macro, the default is the same as
1159
@code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1160
@end defmac
1161
 
1162
@defmac STRICT_ALIGNMENT
1163
Define this macro to be the value 1 if instructions will fail to work
1164
if given data not on the nominal alignment.  If instructions will merely
1165
go slower in that case, define this macro as 0.
1166
@end defmac
1167
 
1168
@defmac PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
1169
Define this if you wish to imitate the way many other C compilers handle
1170
alignment of bit-fields and the structures that contain them.
1171
 
1172
The behavior is that the type written for a named bit-field (@code{int},
1173
@code{short}, or other integer type) imposes an alignment for the entire
1174
structure, as if the structure really did contain an ordinary field of
1175
that type.  In addition, the bit-field is placed within the structure so
1176
that it would fit within such a field, not crossing a boundary for it.
1177
 
1178
Thus, on most machines, a named bit-field whose type is written as
1179
@code{int} would not cross a four-byte boundary, and would force
1180
four-byte alignment for the whole structure.  (The alignment used may
1181
not be four bytes; it is controlled by the other alignment parameters.)
1182
 
1183
An unnamed bit-field will not affect the alignment of the containing
1184
structure.
1185
 
1186
If the macro is defined, its definition should be a C expression;
1187
a nonzero value for the expression enables this behavior.
1188
 
1189
Note that if this macro is not defined, or its value is zero, some
1190
bit-fields may cross more than one alignment boundary.  The compiler can
1191
support such references if there are @samp{insv}, @samp{extv}, and
1192
@samp{extzv} insns that can directly reference memory.
1193
 
1194
The other known way of making bit-fields work is to define
1195
@code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} as large as @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1196
Then every structure can be accessed with fullwords.
1197
 
1198
Unless the machine has bit-field instructions or you define
1199
@code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} that way, you must define
1200
@code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} to have a nonzero value.
1201
 
1202
If your aim is to make GCC use the same conventions for laying out
1203
bit-fields as are used by another compiler, here is how to investigate
1204
what the other compiler does.  Compile and run this program:
1205
 
1206
@smallexample
1207
struct foo1
1208
@{
1209
  char x;
1210
  char :0;
1211
  char y;
1212
@};
1213
 
1214
struct foo2
1215
@{
1216
  char x;
1217
  int :0;
1218
  char y;
1219
@};
1220
 
1221
main ()
1222
@{
1223
  printf ("Size of foo1 is %d\n",
1224
          sizeof (struct foo1));
1225
  printf ("Size of foo2 is %d\n",
1226
          sizeof (struct foo2));
1227
  exit (0);
1228
@}
1229
@end smallexample
1230
 
1231
If this prints 2 and 5, then the compiler's behavior is what you would
1232
get from @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS}.
1233
@end defmac
1234
 
1235
@defmac BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
1236
Like @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} except that its effect is limited
1237
to aligning a bit-field within the structure.
1238
@end defmac
1239
 
1240
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_ALIGN_ANON_BITFIELD (void)
1241
When @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} is true this hook will determine
1242
whether unnamed bitfields affect the alignment of the containing
1243
structure.  The hook should return true if the structure should inherit
1244
the alignment requirements of an unnamed bitfield's type.
1245
@end deftypefn
1246
 
1247
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_NARROW_VOLATILE_BITFIELD (void)
1248
This target hook should return @code{true} if accesses to volatile bitfields
1249
should use the narrowest mode possible.  It should return @code{false} if
1250
these accesses should use the bitfield container type.
1251
 
1252
The default is @code{!TARGET_STRICT_ALIGN}.
1253
@end deftypefn
1254
 
1255
@defmac MEMBER_TYPE_FORCES_BLK (@var{field}, @var{mode})
1256
Return 1 if a structure or array containing @var{field} should be accessed using
1257
@code{BLKMODE}.
1258
 
1259
If @var{field} is the only field in the structure, @var{mode} is its
1260
mode, otherwise @var{mode} is VOIDmode.  @var{mode} is provided in the
1261
case where structures of one field would require the structure's mode to
1262
retain the field's mode.
1263
 
1264
Normally, this is not needed.
1265
@end defmac
1266
 
1267
@defmac ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
1268
Define this macro as an expression for the alignment of a type (given
1269
by @var{type} as a tree node) if the alignment computed in the usual
1270
way is @var{computed} and the alignment explicitly specified was
1271
@var{specified}.
1272
 
1273
The default is to use @var{specified} if it is larger; otherwise, use
1274
the smaller of @var{computed} and @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
1275
@end defmac
1276
 
1277
@defmac MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
1278
An integer expression for the size in bits of the largest integer
1279
machine mode that should actually be used.  All integer machine modes of
1280
this size or smaller can be used for structures and unions with the
1281
appropriate sizes.  If this macro is undefined, @code{GET_MODE_BITSIZE
1282
(DImode)} is assumed.
1283
@end defmac
1284
 
1285
@defmac STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE (@var{save_level})
1286
If defined, an expression of type @code{enum machine_mode} that
1287
specifies the mode of the save area operand of a
1288
@code{save_stack_@var{level}} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1289
@var{save_level} is one of @code{SAVE_BLOCK}, @code{SAVE_FUNCTION}, or
1290
@code{SAVE_NONLOCAL} and selects which of the three named patterns is
1291
having its mode specified.
1292
 
1293
You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{Pmode}.  You
1294
would most commonly define this macro if the
1295
@code{save_stack_@var{level}} patterns need to support both a 32- and a
1296
64-bit mode.
1297
@end defmac
1298
 
1299
@defmac STACK_SIZE_MODE
1300
If defined, an expression of type @code{enum machine_mode} that
1301
specifies the mode of the size increment operand of an
1302
@code{allocate_stack} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1303
 
1304
You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{word_mode}.
1305
You would most commonly define this macro if the @code{allocate_stack}
1306
pattern needs to support both a 32- and a 64-bit mode.
1307
@end defmac
1308
 
1309
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {enum machine_mode} TARGET_LIBGCC_CMP_RETURN_MODE (void)
1310
This target hook should return the mode to be used for the return value
1311
of compare instructions expanded to libgcc calls.  If not defined
1312
@code{word_mode} is returned which is the right choice for a majority of
1313
targets.
1314
@end deftypefn
1315
 
1316
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {enum machine_mode} TARGET_LIBGCC_SHIFT_COUNT_MODE (void)
1317
This target hook should return the mode to be used for the shift count operand
1318
of shift instructions expanded to libgcc calls.  If not defined
1319
@code{word_mode} is returned which is the right choice for a majority of
1320
targets.
1321
@end deftypefn
1322
 
1323
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {enum machine_mode} TARGET_UNWIND_WORD_MODE (void)
1324
Return machine mode to be used for @code{_Unwind_Word} type.
1325
The default is to use @code{word_mode}.
1326
@end deftypefn
1327
 
1328
@defmac ROUND_TOWARDS_ZERO
1329
If defined, this macro should be true if the prevailing rounding
1330
mode is towards zero.
1331
 
1332
Defining this macro only affects the way @file{libgcc.a} emulates
1333
floating-point arithmetic.
1334
 
1335
Not defining this macro is equivalent to returning zero.
1336
@end defmac
1337
 
1338
@defmac LARGEST_EXPONENT_IS_NORMAL (@var{size})
1339
This macro should return true if floats with @var{size}
1340
bits do not have a NaN or infinity representation, but use the largest
1341
exponent for normal numbers instead.
1342
 
1343
Defining this macro only affects the way @file{libgcc.a} emulates
1344
floating-point arithmetic.
1345
 
1346
The default definition of this macro returns false for all sizes.
1347
@end defmac
1348
 
1349
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_MS_BITFIELD_LAYOUT_P (const_tree @var{record_type})
1350
This target hook returns @code{true} if bit-fields in the given
1351
@var{record_type} are to be laid out following the rules of Microsoft
1352
Visual C/C++, namely: (i) a bit-field won't share the same storage
1353
unit with the previous bit-field if their underlying types have
1354
different sizes, and the bit-field will be aligned to the highest
1355
alignment of the underlying types of itself and of the previous
1356
bit-field; (ii) a zero-sized bit-field will affect the alignment of
1357
the whole enclosing structure, even if it is unnamed; except that
1358
(iii) a zero-sized bit-field will be disregarded unless it follows
1359
another bit-field of nonzero size.  If this hook returns @code{true},
1360
other macros that control bit-field layout are ignored.
1361
 
1362
When a bit-field is inserted into a packed record, the whole size
1363
of the underlying type is used by one or more same-size adjacent
1364
bit-fields (that is, if its long:3, 32 bits is used in the record,
1365
and any additional adjacent long bit-fields are packed into the same
1366
chunk of 32 bits.  However, if the size changes, a new field of that
1367
size is allocated).  In an unpacked record, this is the same as using
1368
alignment, but not equivalent when packing.
1369
 
1370
If both MS bit-fields and @samp{__attribute__((packed))} are used,
1371
the latter will take precedence.  If @samp{__attribute__((packed))} is
1372
used on a single field when MS bit-fields are in use, it will take
1373
precedence for that field, but the alignment of the rest of the structure
1374
may affect its placement.
1375
@end deftypefn
1376
 
1377
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_DECIMAL_FLOAT_SUPPORTED_P (void)
1378
Returns true if the target supports decimal floating point.
1379
@end deftypefn
1380
 
1381
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_FIXED_POINT_SUPPORTED_P (void)
1382
Returns true if the target supports fixed-point arithmetic.
1383
@end deftypefn
1384
 
1385
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_EXPAND_TO_RTL_HOOK (void)
1386
This hook is called just before expansion into rtl, allowing the target
1387
to perform additional initializations or analysis before the expansion.
1388
For example, the rs6000 port uses it to allocate a scratch stack slot
1389
for use in copying SDmode values between memory and floating point
1390
registers whenever the function being expanded has any SDmode
1391
usage.
1392
@end deftypefn
1393
 
1394
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_INSTANTIATE_DECLS (void)
1395
This hook allows the backend to perform additional instantiations on rtl
1396
that are not actually in any insns yet, but will be later.
1397
@end deftypefn
1398
 
1399
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_MANGLE_TYPE (const_tree @var{type})
1400
If your target defines any fundamental types, or any types your target
1401
uses should be mangled differently from the default, define this hook
1402
to return the appropriate encoding for these types as part of a C++
1403
mangled name.  The @var{type} argument is the tree structure representing
1404
the type to be mangled.  The hook may be applied to trees which are
1405
not target-specific fundamental types; it should return @code{NULL}
1406
for all such types, as well as arguments it does not recognize.  If the
1407
return value is not @code{NULL}, it must point to a statically-allocated
1408
string constant.
1409
 
1410
Target-specific fundamental types might be new fundamental types or
1411
qualified versions of ordinary fundamental types.  Encode new
1412
fundamental types as @samp{@w{u @var{n} @var{name}}}, where @var{name}
1413
is the name used for the type in source code, and @var{n} is the
1414
length of @var{name} in decimal.  Encode qualified versions of
1415
ordinary types as @samp{@w{U @var{n} @var{name} @var{code}}}, where
1416
@var{name} is the name used for the type qualifier in source code,
1417
@var{n} is the length of @var{name} as above, and @var{code} is the
1418
code used to represent the unqualified version of this type.  (See
1419
@code{write_builtin_type} in @file{cp/mangle.c} for the list of
1420
codes.)  In both cases the spaces are for clarity; do not include any
1421
spaces in your string.
1422
 
1423
This hook is applied to types prior to typedef resolution.  If the mangled
1424
name for a particular type depends only on that type's main variant, you
1425
can perform typedef resolution yourself using @code{TYPE_MAIN_VARIANT}
1426
before mangling.
1427
 
1428
The default version of this hook always returns @code{NULL}, which is
1429
appropriate for a target that does not define any new fundamental
1430
types.
1431
@end deftypefn
1432
 
1433
@node Type Layout
1434
@section Layout of Source Language Data Types
1435
 
1436
These macros define the sizes and other characteristics of the standard
1437
basic data types used in programs being compiled.  Unlike the macros in
1438
the previous section, these apply to specific features of C and related
1439
languages, rather than to fundamental aspects of storage layout.
1440
 
1441
@defmac INT_TYPE_SIZE
1442
A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the
1443
target machine.  If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1444
@end defmac
1445
 
1446
@defmac SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1447
A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short} on the
1448
target machine.  If you don't define this, the default is half a word.
1449
(If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up to one
1450
unit.)
1451
@end defmac
1452
 
1453
@defmac LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1454
A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1455
target machine.  If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1456
@end defmac
1457
 
1458
@defmac ADA_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1459
On some machines, the size used for the Ada equivalent of the type
1460
@code{long} by a native Ada compiler differs from that used by C@.  In
1461
that situation, define this macro to be a C expression to be used for
1462
the size of that type.  If you don't define this, the default is the
1463
value of @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE}.
1464
@end defmac
1465
 
1466
@defmac LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1467
A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long} on the
1468
target machine.  If you don't define this, the default is two
1469
words.  If you want to support GNU Ada on your machine, the value of this
1470
macro must be at least 64.
1471
@end defmac
1472
 
1473
@defmac CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1474
A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1475
target machine.  If you don't define this, the default is
1476
@code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1477
@end defmac
1478
 
1479
@defmac BOOL_TYPE_SIZE
1480
A C expression for the size in bits of the C++ type @code{bool} and
1481
C99 type @code{_Bool} on the target machine.  If you don't define
1482
this, and you probably shouldn't, the default is @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE}.
1483
@end defmac
1484
 
1485
@defmac FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1486
A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{float} on the
1487
target machine.  If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1488
@end defmac
1489
 
1490
@defmac DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1491
A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{double} on the
1492
target machine.  If you don't define this, the default is two
1493
words.
1494
@end defmac
1495
 
1496
@defmac LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1497
A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long double} on
1498
the target machine.  If you don't define this, the default is two
1499
words.
1500
@end defmac
1501
 
1502
@defmac SHORT_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1503
A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Fract} on
1504
the target machine.  If you don't define this, the default is
1505
@code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1506
@end defmac
1507
 
1508
@defmac FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1509
A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Fract} on
1510
the target machine.  If you don't define this, the default is
1511
@code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1512
@end defmac
1513
 
1514
@defmac LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1515
A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Fract} on
1516
the target machine.  If you don't define this, the default is
1517
@code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1518
@end defmac
1519
 
1520
@defmac LONG_LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1521
A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Fract} on
1522
the target machine.  If you don't define this, the default is
1523
@code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1524
@end defmac
1525
 
1526
@defmac SHORT_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1527
A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Accum} on
1528
the target machine.  If you don't define this, the default is
1529
@code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1530
@end defmac
1531
 
1532
@defmac ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1533
A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Accum} on
1534
the target machine.  If you don't define this, the default is
1535
@code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1536
@end defmac
1537
 
1538
@defmac LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1539
A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Accum} on
1540
the target machine.  If you don't define this, the default is
1541
@code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1542
@end defmac
1543
 
1544
@defmac LONG_LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1545
A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Accum} on
1546
the target machine.  If you don't define this, the default is
1547
@code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 16}.
1548
@end defmac
1549
 
1550
@defmac LIBGCC2_LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1551
Define this macro if @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE} is not constant or
1552
if you want routines in @file{libgcc2.a} for a size other than
1553
@code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}.  If you don't define this, the
1554
default is @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}.
1555
@end defmac
1556
 
1557
@defmac LIBGCC2_HAS_DF_MODE
1558
Define this macro if neither @code{DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE} nor
1559
@code{LIBGCC2_LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE} is
1560
@code{DFmode} but you want @code{DFmode} routines in @file{libgcc2.a}
1561
anyway.  If you don't define this and either @code{DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1562
or @code{LIBGCC2_LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE} is 64 then the default is 1,
1563
otherwise it is 0.
1564
@end defmac
1565
 
1566
@defmac LIBGCC2_HAS_XF_MODE
1567
Define this macro if @code{LIBGCC2_LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE} is not
1568
@code{XFmode} but you want @code{XFmode} routines in @file{libgcc2.a}
1569
anyway.  If you don't define this and @code{LIBGCC2_LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1570
is 80 then the default is 1, otherwise it is 0.
1571
@end defmac
1572
 
1573
@defmac LIBGCC2_HAS_TF_MODE
1574
Define this macro if @code{LIBGCC2_LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE} is not
1575
@code{TFmode} but you want @code{TFmode} routines in @file{libgcc2.a}
1576
anyway.  If you don't define this and @code{LIBGCC2_LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1577
is 128 then the default is 1, otherwise it is 0.
1578
@end defmac
1579
 
1580
@defmac LIBGCC2_GNU_PREFIX
1581
This macro corresponds to the @code{TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX} target
1582
hook and should be defined if that hook is overriden to be true.  It
1583
causes function names in libgcc to be changed to use a @code{__gnu_}
1584
prefix for their name rather than the default @code{__}.  A port which
1585
uses this macro should also arrange to use @file{t-gnu-prefix} in
1586
the libgcc @file{config.host}.
1587
@end defmac
1588
 
1589
@defmac SF_SIZE
1590
@defmacx DF_SIZE
1591
@defmacx XF_SIZE
1592
@defmacx TF_SIZE
1593
Define these macros to be the size in bits of the mantissa of
1594
@code{SFmode}, @code{DFmode}, @code{XFmode} and @code{TFmode} values,
1595
if the defaults in @file{libgcc2.h} are inappropriate.  By default,
1596
@code{FLT_MANT_DIG} is used for @code{SF_SIZE}, @code{LDBL_MANT_DIG}
1597
for @code{XF_SIZE} and @code{TF_SIZE}, and @code{DBL_MANT_DIG} or
1598
@code{LDBL_MANT_DIG} for @code{DF_SIZE} according to whether
1599
@code{DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE} or
1600
@code{LIBGCC2_LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE} is 64.
1601
@end defmac
1602
 
1603
@defmac TARGET_FLT_EVAL_METHOD
1604
A C expression for the value for @code{FLT_EVAL_METHOD} in @file{float.h},
1605
assuming, if applicable, that the floating-point control word is in its
1606
default state.  If you do not define this macro the value of
1607
@code{FLT_EVAL_METHOD} will be zero.
1608
@end defmac
1609
 
1610
@defmac WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1611
A C expression for the size in bits of the widest floating-point format
1612
supported by the hardware.  If you define this macro, you must specify a
1613
value less than or equal to the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}.
1614
If you do not define this macro, the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1615
is the default.
1616
@end defmac
1617
 
1618
@defmac DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1619
An expression whose value is 1 or 0, according to whether the type
1620
@code{char} should be signed or unsigned by default.  The user can
1621
always override this default with the options @option{-fsigned-char}
1622
and @option{-funsigned-char}.
1623
@end defmac
1624
 
1625
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS (void)
1626
This target hook should return true if the compiler should give an
1627
@code{enum} type only as many bytes as it takes to represent the range
1628
of possible values of that type.  It should return false if all
1629
@code{enum} types should be allocated like @code{int}.
1630
 
1631
The default is to return false.
1632
@end deftypefn
1633
 
1634
@defmac SIZE_TYPE
1635
A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1636
for size values.  The typedef name @code{size_t} is defined using the
1637
contents of the string.
1638
 
1639
The string can contain more than one keyword.  If so, separate them with
1640
spaces, and write first any length keyword, then @code{unsigned} if
1641
appropriate, and finally @code{int}.  The string must exactly match one
1642
of the data type names defined in the function
1643
@code{init_decl_processing} in the file @file{c-decl.c}.  You may not
1644
omit @code{int} or change the order---that would cause the compiler to
1645
crash on startup.
1646
 
1647
If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long unsigned
1648
int"}.
1649
@end defmac
1650
 
1651
@defmac PTRDIFF_TYPE
1652
A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1653
for the result of subtracting two pointers.  The typedef name
1654
@code{ptrdiff_t} is defined using the contents of the string.  See
1655
@code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1656
 
1657
If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long int"}.
1658
@end defmac
1659
 
1660
@defmac WCHAR_TYPE
1661
A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1662
for wide characters.  The typedef name @code{wchar_t} is defined using
1663
the contents of the string.  See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1664
information.
1665
 
1666
If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"int"}.
1667
@end defmac
1668
 
1669
@defmac WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1670
A C expression for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1671
characters.  This is used in @code{cpp}, which cannot make use of
1672
@code{WCHAR_TYPE}.
1673
@end defmac
1674
 
1675
@defmac WINT_TYPE
1676
A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to
1677
use for wide characters passed to @code{printf} and returned from
1678
@code{getwc}.  The typedef name @code{wint_t} is defined using the
1679
contents of the string.  See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1680
information.
1681
 
1682
If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"unsigned int"}.
1683
@end defmac
1684
 
1685
@defmac INTMAX_TYPE
1686
A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1687
can represent any value of any standard or extended signed integer type.
1688
The typedef name @code{intmax_t} is defined using the contents of the
1689
string.  See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1690
 
1691
If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1692
@code{"int"}, @code{"long int"}, or @code{"long long int"} that has as
1693
much precision as @code{long long int}.
1694
@end defmac
1695
 
1696
@defmac UINTMAX_TYPE
1697
A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1698
can represent any value of any standard or extended unsigned integer
1699
type.  The typedef name @code{uintmax_t} is defined using the contents
1700
of the string.  See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1701
 
1702
If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1703
@code{"unsigned int"}, @code{"long unsigned int"}, or @code{"long long
1704
unsigned int"} that has as much precision as @code{long long unsigned
1705
int}.
1706
@end defmac
1707
 
1708
@defmac SIG_ATOMIC_TYPE
1709
@defmacx INT8_TYPE
1710
@defmacx INT16_TYPE
1711
@defmacx INT32_TYPE
1712
@defmacx INT64_TYPE
1713
@defmacx UINT8_TYPE
1714
@defmacx UINT16_TYPE
1715
@defmacx UINT32_TYPE
1716
@defmacx UINT64_TYPE
1717
@defmacx INT_LEAST8_TYPE
1718
@defmacx INT_LEAST16_TYPE
1719
@defmacx INT_LEAST32_TYPE
1720
@defmacx INT_LEAST64_TYPE
1721
@defmacx UINT_LEAST8_TYPE
1722
@defmacx UINT_LEAST16_TYPE
1723
@defmacx UINT_LEAST32_TYPE
1724
@defmacx UINT_LEAST64_TYPE
1725
@defmacx INT_FAST8_TYPE
1726
@defmacx INT_FAST16_TYPE
1727
@defmacx INT_FAST32_TYPE
1728
@defmacx INT_FAST64_TYPE
1729
@defmacx UINT_FAST8_TYPE
1730
@defmacx UINT_FAST16_TYPE
1731
@defmacx UINT_FAST32_TYPE
1732
@defmacx UINT_FAST64_TYPE
1733
@defmacx INTPTR_TYPE
1734
@defmacx UINTPTR_TYPE
1735
C expressions for the standard types @code{sig_atomic_t},
1736
@code{int8_t}, @code{int16_t}, @code{int32_t}, @code{int64_t},
1737
@code{uint8_t}, @code{uint16_t}, @code{uint32_t}, @code{uint64_t},
1738
@code{int_least8_t}, @code{int_least16_t}, @code{int_least32_t},
1739
@code{int_least64_t}, @code{uint_least8_t}, @code{uint_least16_t},
1740
@code{uint_least32_t}, @code{uint_least64_t}, @code{int_fast8_t},
1741
@code{int_fast16_t}, @code{int_fast32_t}, @code{int_fast64_t},
1742
@code{uint_fast8_t}, @code{uint_fast16_t}, @code{uint_fast32_t},
1743
@code{uint_fast64_t}, @code{intptr_t}, and @code{uintptr_t}.  See
1744
@code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1745
 
1746
If any of these macros evaluates to a null pointer, the corresponding
1747
type is not supported; if GCC is configured to provide
1748
@code{<stdint.h>} in such a case, the header provided may not conform
1749
to C99, depending on the type in question.  The defaults for all of
1750
these macros are null pointers.
1751
@end defmac
1752
 
1753
@defmac TARGET_PTRMEMFUNC_VBIT_LOCATION
1754
The C++ compiler represents a pointer-to-member-function with a struct
1755
that looks like:
1756
 
1757
@smallexample
1758
  struct @{
1759
    union @{
1760
      void (*fn)();
1761
      ptrdiff_t vtable_index;
1762
    @};
1763
    ptrdiff_t delta;
1764
  @};
1765
@end smallexample
1766
 
1767
@noindent
1768
The C++ compiler must use one bit to indicate whether the function that
1769
will be called through a pointer-to-member-function is virtual.
1770
Normally, we assume that the low-order bit of a function pointer must
1771
always be zero.  Then, by ensuring that the vtable_index is odd, we can
1772
distinguish which variant of the union is in use.  But, on some
1773
platforms function pointers can be odd, and so this doesn't work.  In
1774
that case, we use the low-order bit of the @code{delta} field, and shift
1775
the remainder of the @code{delta} field to the left.
1776
 
1777
GCC will automatically make the right selection about where to store
1778
this bit using the @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY} setting for your platform.
1779
However, some platforms such as ARM/Thumb have @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}
1780
set such that functions always start at even addresses, but the lowest
1781
bit of pointers to functions indicate whether the function at that
1782
address is in ARM or Thumb mode.  If this is the case of your
1783
architecture, you should define this macro to
1784
@code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_delta}.
1785
 
1786
In general, you should not have to define this macro.  On architectures
1787
in which function addresses are always even, according to
1788
@code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}, GCC will automatically define this macro to
1789
@code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_pfn}.
1790
@end defmac
1791
 
1792
@defmac TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS
1793
Normally, the C++ compiler uses function pointers in vtables.  This
1794
macro allows the target to change to use ``function descriptors''
1795
instead.  Function descriptors are found on targets for whom a
1796
function pointer is actually a small data structure.  Normally the
1797
data structure consists of the actual code address plus a data
1798
pointer to which the function's data is relative.
1799
 
1800
If vtables are used, the value of this macro should be the number
1801
of words that the function descriptor occupies.
1802
@end defmac
1803
 
1804
@defmac TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN
1805
By default, the vtable entries are void pointers, the so the alignment
1806
is the same as pointer alignment.  The value of this macro specifies
1807
the alignment of the vtable entry in bits.  It should be defined only
1808
when special alignment is necessary. */
1809
@end defmac
1810
 
1811
@defmac TARGET_VTABLE_DATA_ENTRY_DISTANCE
1812
There are a few non-descriptor entries in the vtable at offsets below
1813
zero.  If these entries must be padded (say, to preserve the alignment
1814
specified by @code{TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN}), set this to the number
1815
of words in each data entry.
1816
@end defmac
1817
 
1818
@node Registers
1819
@section Register Usage
1820
@cindex register usage
1821
 
1822
This section explains how to describe what registers the target machine
1823
has, and how (in general) they can be used.
1824
 
1825
The description of which registers a specific instruction can use is
1826
done with register classes; see @ref{Register Classes}.  For information
1827
on using registers to access a stack frame, see @ref{Frame Registers}.
1828
For passing values in registers, see @ref{Register Arguments}.
1829
For returning values in registers, see @ref{Scalar Return}.
1830
 
1831
@menu
1832
* Register Basics::             Number and kinds of registers.
1833
* Allocation Order::            Order in which registers are allocated.
1834
* Values in Registers::         What kinds of values each reg can hold.
1835
* Leaf Functions::              Renumbering registers for leaf functions.
1836
* Stack Registers::             Handling a register stack such as 80387.
1837
@end menu
1838
 
1839
@node Register Basics
1840
@subsection Basic Characteristics of Registers
1841
 
1842
@c prevent bad page break with this line
1843
Registers have various characteristics.
1844
 
1845
@defmac FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1846
Number of hardware registers known to the compiler.  They receive
1847
numbers 0 through @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER-1}; thus, the first
1848
pseudo register's number really is assigned the number
1849
@code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
1850
@end defmac
1851
 
1852
@defmac FIXED_REGISTERS
1853
@cindex fixed register
1854
An initializer that says which registers are used for fixed purposes
1855
all throughout the compiled code and are therefore not available for
1856
general allocation.  These would include the stack pointer, the frame
1857
pointer (except on machines where that can be used as a general
1858
register when no frame pointer is needed), the program counter on
1859
machines where that is considered one of the addressable registers,
1860
and any other numbered register with a standard use.
1861
 
1862
This information is expressed as a sequence of numbers, separated by
1863
commas and surrounded by braces.  The @var{n}th number is 1 if
1864
register @var{n} is fixed, 0 otherwise.
1865
 
1866
The table initialized from this macro, and the table initialized by
1867
the following one, may be overridden at run time either automatically,
1868
by the actions of the macro @code{CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}, or by
1869
the user with the command options @option{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1870
@option{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @option{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}}.
1871
@end defmac
1872
 
1873
@defmac CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1874
@cindex call-used register
1875
@cindex call-clobbered register
1876
@cindex call-saved register
1877
Like @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} but has 1 for each register that is
1878
clobbered (in general) by function calls as well as for fixed
1879
registers.  This macro therefore identifies the registers that are not
1880
available for general allocation of values that must live across
1881
function calls.
1882
 
1883
If a register has 0 in @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}, the compiler
1884
automatically saves it on function entry and restores it on function
1885
exit, if the register is used within the function.
1886
@end defmac
1887
 
1888
@defmac CALL_REALLY_USED_REGISTERS
1889
@cindex call-used register
1890
@cindex call-clobbered register
1891
@cindex call-saved register
1892
Like @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} except this macro doesn't require
1893
that the entire set of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} be included.
1894
(@code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} must be a superset of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}).
1895
This macro is optional.  If not specified, it defaults to the value
1896
of @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}.
1897
@end defmac
1898
 
1899
@defmac HARD_REGNO_CALL_PART_CLOBBERED (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1900
@cindex call-used register
1901
@cindex call-clobbered register
1902
@cindex call-saved register
1903
A C expression that is nonzero if it is not permissible to store a
1904
value of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} across a
1905
call without some part of it being clobbered.  For most machines this
1906
macro need not be defined.  It is only required for machines that do not
1907
preserve the entire contents of a register across a call.
1908
@end defmac
1909
 
1910
@findex fixed_regs
1911
@findex call_used_regs
1912
@findex global_regs
1913
@findex reg_names
1914
@findex reg_class_contents
1915
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE (void)
1916
This hook may conditionally modify five variables
1917
@code{fixed_regs}, @code{call_used_regs}, @code{global_regs},
1918
@code{reg_names}, and @code{reg_class_contents}, to take into account
1919
any dependence of these register sets on target flags.  The first three
1920
of these are of type @code{char []} (interpreted as Boolean vectors).
1921
@code{global_regs} is a @code{const char *[]}, and
1922
@code{reg_class_contents} is a @code{HARD_REG_SET}.  Before the macro is
1923
called, @code{fixed_regs}, @code{call_used_regs},
1924
@code{reg_class_contents}, and @code{reg_names} have been initialized
1925
from @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS},
1926
@code{REG_CLASS_CONTENTS}, and @code{REGISTER_NAMES}, respectively.
1927
@code{global_regs} has been cleared, and any @option{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1928
@option{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @option{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}}
1929
command options have been applied.
1930
 
1931
@cindex disabling certain registers
1932
@cindex controlling register usage
1933
If the usage of an entire class of registers depends on the target
1934
flags, you may indicate this to GCC by using this macro to modify
1935
@code{fixed_regs} and @code{call_used_regs} to 1 for each of the
1936
registers in the classes which should not be used by GCC@.  Also define
1937
the macro @code{REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER} / @code{REG_CLASS_FROM_CONSTRAINT}
1938
to return @code{NO_REGS} if it
1939
is called with a letter for a class that shouldn't be used.
1940
 
1941
(However, if this class is not included in @code{GENERAL_REGS} and all
1942
of the insn patterns whose constraints permit this class are
1943
controlled by target switches, then GCC will automatically avoid using
1944
these registers when the target switches are opposed to them.)
1945
@end deftypefn
1946
 
1947
@defmac INCOMING_REGNO (@var{out})
1948
Define this macro if the target machine has register windows.  This C
1949
expression returns the register number as seen by the called function
1950
corresponding to the register number @var{out} as seen by the calling
1951
function.  Return @var{out} if register number @var{out} is not an
1952
outbound register.
1953
@end defmac
1954
 
1955
@defmac OUTGOING_REGNO (@var{in})
1956
Define this macro if the target machine has register windows.  This C
1957
expression returns the register number as seen by the calling function
1958
corresponding to the register number @var{in} as seen by the called
1959
function.  Return @var{in} if register number @var{in} is not an inbound
1960
register.
1961
@end defmac
1962
 
1963
@defmac LOCAL_REGNO (@var{regno})
1964
Define this macro if the target machine has register windows.  This C
1965
expression returns true if the register is call-saved but is in the
1966
register window.  Unlike most call-saved registers, such registers
1967
need not be explicitly restored on function exit or during non-local
1968
gotos.
1969
@end defmac
1970
 
1971
@defmac PC_REGNUM
1972
If the program counter has a register number, define this as that
1973
register number.  Otherwise, do not define it.
1974
@end defmac
1975
 
1976
@node Allocation Order
1977
@subsection Order of Allocation of Registers
1978
@cindex order of register allocation
1979
@cindex register allocation order
1980
 
1981
@c prevent bad page break with this line
1982
Registers are allocated in order.
1983
 
1984
@defmac REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1985
If defined, an initializer for a vector of integers, containing the
1986
numbers of hard registers in the order in which GCC should prefer
1987
to use them (from most preferred to least).
1988
 
1989
If this macro is not defined, registers are used lowest numbered first
1990
(all else being equal).
1991
 
1992
One use of this macro is on machines where the highest numbered
1993
registers must always be saved and the save-multiple-registers
1994
instruction supports only sequences of consecutive registers.  On such
1995
machines, define @code{REG_ALLOC_ORDER} to be an initializer that lists
1996
the highest numbered allocable register first.
1997
@end defmac
1998
 
1999
@defmac ADJUST_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
2000
A C statement (sans semicolon) to choose the order in which to allocate
2001
hard registers for pseudo-registers local to a basic block.
2002
 
2003
Store the desired register order in the array @code{reg_alloc_order}.
2004
Element 0 should be the register to allocate first; element 1, the next
2005
register; and so on.
2006
 
2007
The macro body should not assume anything about the contents of
2008
@code{reg_alloc_order} before execution of the macro.
2009
 
2010
On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
2011
@end defmac
2012
 
2013
@defmac HONOR_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
2014
Normally, IRA tries to estimate the costs for saving a register in the
2015
prologue and restoring it in the epilogue.  This discourages it from
2016
using call-saved registers.  If a machine wants to ensure that IRA
2017
allocates registers in the order given by REG_ALLOC_ORDER even if some
2018
call-saved registers appear earlier than call-used ones, this macro
2019
should be defined.
2020
@end defmac
2021
 
2022
@defmac IRA_HARD_REGNO_ADD_COST_MULTIPLIER (@var{regno})
2023
In some case register allocation order is not enough for the
2024
Integrated Register Allocator (@acronym{IRA}) to generate a good code.
2025
If this macro is defined, it should return a floating point value
2026
based on @var{regno}.  The cost of using @var{regno} for a pseudo will
2027
be increased by approximately the pseudo's usage frequency times the
2028
value returned by this macro.  Not defining this macro is equivalent
2029
to having it always return @code{0.0}.
2030
 
2031
On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
2032
@end defmac
2033
 
2034
@node Values in Registers
2035
@subsection How Values Fit in Registers
2036
 
2037
This section discusses the macros that describe which kinds of values
2038
(specifically, which machine modes) each register can hold, and how many
2039
consecutive registers are needed for a given mode.
2040
 
2041
@defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
2042
A C expression for the number of consecutive hard registers, starting
2043
at register number @var{regno}, required to hold a value of mode
2044
@var{mode}.  This macro must never return zero, even if a register
2045
cannot hold the requested mode - indicate that with HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK
2046
and/or CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS instead.
2047
 
2048
On a machine where all registers are exactly one word, a suitable
2049
definition of this macro is
2050
 
2051
@smallexample
2052
#define HARD_REGNO_NREGS(REGNO, MODE)            \
2053
   ((GET_MODE_SIZE (MODE) + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)  \
2054
    / UNITS_PER_WORD)
2055
@end smallexample
2056
@end defmac
2057
 
2058
@defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
2059
A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode @var{mode}, stored
2060
in memory, ends with padding that causes it to take up more space than
2061
in registers starting at register number @var{regno} (as determined by
2062
multiplying GCC's notion of the size of the register when containing
2063
this mode by the number of registers returned by
2064
@code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS}).  By default this is zero.
2065
 
2066
For example, if a floating-point value is stored in three 32-bit
2067
registers but takes up 128 bits in memory, then this would be
2068
nonzero.
2069
 
2070
This macros only needs to be defined if there are cases where
2071
@code{subreg_get_info}
2072
would otherwise wrongly determine that a @code{subreg} can be
2073
represented by an offset to the register number, when in fact such a
2074
@code{subreg} would contain some of the padding not stored in
2075
registers and so not be representable.
2076
@end defmac
2077
 
2078
@defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_WITH_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
2079
For values of @var{regno} and @var{mode} for which
2080
@code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING} returns nonzero, a C expression
2081
returning the greater number of registers required to hold the value
2082
including any padding.  In the example above, the value would be four.
2083
@end defmac
2084
 
2085
@defmac REGMODE_NATURAL_SIZE (@var{mode})
2086
Define this macro if the natural size of registers that hold values
2087
of mode @var{mode} is not the word size.  It is a C expression that
2088
should give the natural size in bytes for the specified mode.  It is
2089
used by the register allocator to try to optimize its results.  This
2090
happens for example on SPARC 64-bit where the natural size of
2091
floating-point registers is still 32-bit.
2092
@end defmac
2093
 
2094
@defmac HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
2095
A C expression that is nonzero if it is permissible to store a value
2096
of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} (or in several
2097
registers starting with that one).  For a machine where all registers
2098
are equivalent, a suitable definition is
2099
 
2100
@smallexample
2101
#define HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK(REGNO, MODE) 1
2102
@end smallexample
2103
 
2104
You need not include code to check for the numbers of fixed registers,
2105
because the allocation mechanism considers them to be always occupied.
2106
 
2107
@cindex register pairs
2108
On some machines, double-precision values must be kept in even/odd
2109
register pairs.  You can implement that by defining this macro to reject
2110
odd register numbers for such modes.
2111
 
2112
The minimum requirement for a mode to be OK in a register is that the
2113
@samp{mov@var{mode}} instruction pattern support moves between the
2114
register and other hard register in the same class and that moving a
2115
value into the register and back out not alter it.
2116
 
2117
Since the same instruction used to move @code{word_mode} will work for
2118
all narrower integer modes, it is not necessary on any machine for
2119
@code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} to distinguish between these modes, provided
2120
you define patterns @samp{movhi}, etc., to take advantage of this.  This
2121
is useful because of the interaction between @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}
2122
and @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P}; it is very desirable for all integer modes
2123
to be tieable.
2124
 
2125
Many machines have special registers for floating point arithmetic.
2126
Often people assume that floating point machine modes are allowed only
2127
in floating point registers.  This is not true.  Any registers that
2128
can hold integers can safely @emph{hold} a floating point machine
2129
mode, whether or not floating arithmetic can be done on it in those
2130
registers.  Integer move instructions can be used to move the values.
2131
 
2132
On some machines, though, the converse is true: fixed-point machine
2133
modes may not go in floating registers.  This is true if the floating
2134
registers normalize any value stored in them, because storing a
2135
non-floating value there would garble it.  In this case,
2136
@code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} should reject fixed-point machine modes in
2137
floating registers.  But if the floating registers do not automatically
2138
normalize, if you can store any bit pattern in one and retrieve it
2139
unchanged without a trap, then any machine mode may go in a floating
2140
register, so you can define this macro to say so.
2141
 
2142
The primary significance of special floating registers is rather that
2143
they are the registers acceptable in floating point arithmetic
2144
instructions.  However, this is of no concern to
2145
@code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}.  You handle it by writing the proper
2146
constraints for those instructions.
2147
 
2148
On some machines, the floating registers are especially slow to access,
2149
so that it is better to store a value in a stack frame than in such a
2150
register if floating point arithmetic is not being done.  As long as the
2151
floating registers are not in class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, they will not
2152
be used unless some pattern's constraint asks for one.
2153
@end defmac
2154
 
2155
@defmac HARD_REGNO_RENAME_OK (@var{from}, @var{to})
2156
A C expression that is nonzero if it is OK to rename a hard register
2157
@var{from} to another hard register @var{to}.
2158
 
2159
One common use of this macro is to prevent renaming of a register to
2160
another register that is not saved by a prologue in an interrupt
2161
handler.
2162
 
2163
The default is always nonzero.
2164
@end defmac
2165
 
2166
@defmac MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})
2167
A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode
2168
@var{mode1} is accessible in mode @var{mode2} without copying.
2169
 
2170
If @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode1})} and
2171
@code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode2})} are always the same for
2172
any @var{r}, then @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})}
2173
should be nonzero.  If they differ for any @var{r}, you should define
2174
this macro to return zero unless some other mechanism ensures the
2175
accessibility of the value in a narrower mode.
2176
 
2177
You should define this macro to return nonzero in as many cases as
2178
possible since doing so will allow GCC to perform better register
2179
allocation.
2180
@end defmac
2181
 
2182
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_HARD_REGNO_SCRATCH_OK (unsigned int @var{regno})
2183
This target hook should return @code{true} if it is OK to use a hard register
2184
@var{regno} as scratch reg in peephole2.
2185
 
2186
One common use of this macro is to prevent using of a register that
2187
is not saved by a prologue in an interrupt handler.
2188
 
2189
The default version of this hook always returns @code{true}.
2190
@end deftypefn
2191
 
2192
@defmac AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
2193
Define this macro if the compiler should avoid copies to/from @code{CCmode}
2194
registers.  You should only define this macro if support for copying to/from
2195
@code{CCmode} is incomplete.
2196
@end defmac
2197
 
2198
@node Leaf Functions
2199
@subsection Handling Leaf Functions
2200
 
2201
@cindex leaf functions
2202
@cindex functions, leaf
2203
On some machines, a leaf function (i.e., one which makes no calls) can run
2204
more efficiently if it does not make its own register window.  Often this
2205
means it is required to receive its arguments in the registers where they
2206
are passed by the caller, instead of the registers where they would
2207
normally arrive.
2208
 
2209
The special treatment for leaf functions generally applies only when
2210
other conditions are met; for example, often they may use only those
2211
registers for its own variables and temporaries.  We use the term ``leaf
2212
function'' to mean a function that is suitable for this special
2213
handling, so that functions with no calls are not necessarily ``leaf
2214
functions''.
2215
 
2216
GCC assigns register numbers before it knows whether the function is
2217
suitable for leaf function treatment.  So it needs to renumber the
2218
registers in order to output a leaf function.  The following macros
2219
accomplish this.
2220
 
2221
@defmac LEAF_REGISTERS
2222
Name of a char vector, indexed by hard register number, which
2223
contains 1 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
2224
function treatment.
2225
 
2226
If leaf function treatment involves renumbering the registers, then the
2227
registers marked here should be the ones before renumbering---those that
2228
GCC would ordinarily allocate.  The registers which will actually be
2229
used in the assembler code, after renumbering, should not be marked with 1
2230
in this vector.
2231
 
2232
Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize
2233
the treatment of leaf functions.
2234
@end defmac
2235
 
2236
@defmac LEAF_REG_REMAP (@var{regno})
2237
A C expression whose value is the register number to which @var{regno}
2238
should be renumbered, when a function is treated as a leaf function.
2239
 
2240
If @var{regno} is a register number which should not appear in a leaf
2241
function before renumbering, then the expression should yield @minus{}1, which
2242
will cause the compiler to abort.
2243
 
2244
Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize the
2245
treatment of leaf functions, and registers need to be renumbered to do
2246
this.
2247
@end defmac
2248
 
2249
@findex current_function_is_leaf
2250
@findex current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs
2251
@code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
2252
@code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must usually treat leaf functions
2253
specially.  They can test the C variable @code{current_function_is_leaf}
2254
which is nonzero for leaf functions.  @code{current_function_is_leaf} is
2255
set prior to local register allocation and is valid for the remaining
2256
compiler passes.  They can also test the C variable
2257
@code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} which is nonzero for leaf
2258
functions which only use leaf registers.
2259
@code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} is valid after all passes
2260
that modify the instructions have been run and is only useful if
2261
@code{LEAF_REGISTERS} is defined.
2262
@c changed this to fix overfull.  ALSO:  why the "it" at the beginning
2263
@c of the next paragraph?!  --mew 2feb93
2264
 
2265
@node Stack Registers
2266
@subsection Registers That Form a Stack
2267
 
2268
There are special features to handle computers where some of the
2269
``registers'' form a stack.  Stack registers are normally written by
2270
pushing onto the stack, and are numbered relative to the top of the
2271
stack.
2272
 
2273
Currently, GCC can only handle one group of stack-like registers, and
2274
they must be consecutively numbered.  Furthermore, the existing
2275
support for stack-like registers is specific to the 80387 floating
2276
point coprocessor.  If you have a new architecture that uses
2277
stack-like registers, you will need to do substantial work on
2278
@file{reg-stack.c} and write your machine description to cooperate
2279
with it, as well as defining these macros.
2280
 
2281
@defmac STACK_REGS
2282
Define this if the machine has any stack-like registers.
2283
@end defmac
2284
 
2285
@defmac STACK_REG_COVER_CLASS
2286
This is a cover class containing the stack registers.  Define this if
2287
the machine has any stack-like registers.
2288
@end defmac
2289
 
2290
@defmac FIRST_STACK_REG
2291
The number of the first stack-like register.  This one is the top
2292
of the stack.
2293
@end defmac
2294
 
2295
@defmac LAST_STACK_REG
2296
The number of the last stack-like register.  This one is the bottom of
2297
the stack.
2298
@end defmac
2299
 
2300
@node Register Classes
2301
@section Register Classes
2302
@cindex register class definitions
2303
@cindex class definitions, register
2304
 
2305
On many machines, the numbered registers are not all equivalent.
2306
For example, certain registers may not be allowed for indexed addressing;
2307
certain registers may not be allowed in some instructions.  These machine
2308
restrictions are described to the compiler using @dfn{register classes}.
2309
 
2310
You define a number of register classes, giving each one a name and saying
2311
which of the registers belong to it.  Then you can specify register classes
2312
that are allowed as operands to particular instruction patterns.
2313
 
2314
@findex ALL_REGS
2315
@findex NO_REGS
2316
In general, each register will belong to several classes.  In fact, one
2317
class must be named @code{ALL_REGS} and contain all the registers.  Another
2318
class must be named @code{NO_REGS} and contain no registers.  Often the
2319
union of two classes will be another class; however, this is not required.
2320
 
2321
@findex GENERAL_REGS
2322
One of the classes must be named @code{GENERAL_REGS}.  There is nothing
2323
terribly special about the name, but the operand constraint letters
2324
@samp{r} and @samp{g} specify this class.  If @code{GENERAL_REGS} is
2325
the same as @code{ALL_REGS}, just define it as a macro which expands
2326
to @code{ALL_REGS}.
2327
 
2328
Order the classes so that if class @var{x} is contained in class @var{y}
2329
then @var{x} has a lower class number than @var{y}.
2330
 
2331
The way classes other than @code{GENERAL_REGS} are specified in operand
2332
constraints is through machine-dependent operand constraint letters.
2333
You can define such letters to correspond to various classes, then use
2334
them in operand constraints.
2335
 
2336
You must define the narrowest register classes for allocatable
2337
registers, so that each class either has no subclasses, or that for
2338
some mode, the move cost between registers within the class is
2339
cheaper than moving a register in the class to or from memory
2340
(@pxref{Costs}).
2341
 
2342
You should define a class for the union of two classes whenever some
2343
instruction allows both classes.  For example, if an instruction allows
2344
either a floating point (coprocessor) register or a general register for a
2345
certain operand, you should define a class @code{FLOAT_OR_GENERAL_REGS}
2346
which includes both of them.  Otherwise you will get suboptimal code,
2347
or even internal compiler errors when reload cannot find a register in the
2348
class computed via @code{reg_class_subunion}.
2349
 
2350
You must also specify certain redundant information about the register
2351
classes: for each class, which classes contain it and which ones are
2352
contained in it; for each pair of classes, the largest class contained
2353
in their union.
2354
 
2355
When a value occupying several consecutive registers is expected in a
2356
certain class, all the registers used must belong to that class.
2357
Therefore, register classes cannot be used to enforce a requirement for
2358
a register pair to start with an even-numbered register.  The way to
2359
specify this requirement is with @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}.
2360
 
2361
Register classes used for input-operands of bitwise-and or shift
2362
instructions have a special requirement: each such class must have, for
2363
each fixed-point machine mode, a subclass whose registers can transfer that
2364
mode to or from memory.  For example, on some machines, the operations for
2365
single-byte values (@code{QImode}) are limited to certain registers.  When
2366
this is so, each register class that is used in a bitwise-and or shift
2367
instruction must have a subclass consisting of registers from which
2368
single-byte values can be loaded or stored.  This is so that
2369
@code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} can always have a possible value to return.
2370
 
2371
@deftp {Data type} {enum reg_class}
2372
An enumerated type that must be defined with all the register class names
2373
as enumerated values.  @code{NO_REGS} must be first.  @code{ALL_REGS}
2374
must be the last register class, followed by one more enumerated value,
2375
@code{LIM_REG_CLASSES}, which is not a register class but rather
2376
tells how many classes there are.
2377
 
2378
Each register class has a number, which is the value of casting
2379
the class name to type @code{int}.  The number serves as an index
2380
in many of the tables described below.
2381
@end deftp
2382
 
2383
@defmac N_REG_CLASSES
2384
The number of distinct register classes, defined as follows:
2385
 
2386
@smallexample
2387
#define N_REG_CLASSES (int) LIM_REG_CLASSES
2388
@end smallexample
2389
@end defmac
2390
 
2391
@defmac REG_CLASS_NAMES
2392
An initializer containing the names of the register classes as C string
2393
constants.  These names are used in writing some of the debugging dumps.
2394
@end defmac
2395
 
2396
@defmac REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
2397
An initializer containing the contents of the register classes, as integers
2398
which are bit masks.  The @var{n}th integer specifies the contents of class
2399
@var{n}.  The way the integer @var{mask} is interpreted is that
2400
register @var{r} is in the class if @code{@var{mask} & (1 << @var{r})} is 1.
2401
 
2402
When the machine has more than 32 registers, an integer does not suffice.
2403
Then the integers are replaced by sub-initializers, braced groupings containing
2404
several integers.  Each sub-initializer must be suitable as an initializer
2405
for the type @code{HARD_REG_SET} which is defined in @file{hard-reg-set.h}.
2406
In this situation, the first integer in each sub-initializer corresponds to
2407
registers 0 through 31, the second integer to registers 32 through 63, and
2408
so on.
2409
@end defmac
2410
 
2411
@defmac REGNO_REG_CLASS (@var{regno})
2412
A C expression whose value is a register class containing hard register
2413
@var{regno}.  In general there is more than one such class; choose a class
2414
which is @dfn{minimal}, meaning that no smaller class also contains the
2415
register.
2416
@end defmac
2417
 
2418
@defmac BASE_REG_CLASS
2419
A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2420
base register must belong.  A base register is one used in an address
2421
which is the register value plus a displacement.
2422
@end defmac
2423
 
2424
@defmac MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2425
This is a variation of the @code{BASE_REG_CLASS} macro which allows
2426
the selection of a base register in a mode dependent manner.  If
2427
@var{mode} is VOIDmode then it should return the same value as
2428
@code{BASE_REG_CLASS}.
2429
@end defmac
2430
 
2431
@defmac MODE_BASE_REG_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2432
A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2433
base register must belong in order to be used in a base plus index
2434
register address.  You should define this macro if base plus index
2435
addresses have different requirements than other base register uses.
2436
@end defmac
2437
 
2438
@defmac MODE_CODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2439
A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2440
base register for a memory reference in mode @var{mode} to address
2441
space @var{address_space} must belong.  @var{outer_code} and @var{index_code}
2442
define the context in which the base register occurs.  @var{outer_code} is
2443
the code of the immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} for the top level
2444
of an address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2445
@code{address_operand}).  @var{index_code} is the code of the corresponding
2446
index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS}; @code{SCRATCH} otherwise.
2447
@end defmac
2448
 
2449
@defmac INDEX_REG_CLASS
2450
A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2451
index register must belong.  An index register is one used in an
2452
address where its value is either multiplied by a scale factor or
2453
added to another register (as well as added to a displacement).
2454
@end defmac
2455
 
2456
@defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num})
2457
A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2458
suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses.
2459
@end defmac
2460
 
2461
@defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2462
A C expression that is just like @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
2463
that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
2464
@var{mode}.  You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
2465
reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register.  If
2466
you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
2467
@code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.  The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for
2468
addresses that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an
2469
@code{address_operand}.
2470
@end defmac
2471
 
2472
@defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_REG_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2473
A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is suitable for
2474
use as a base register in base plus index operand addresses, accessing
2475
memory in mode @var{mode}.  It may be either a suitable hard register or a
2476
pseudo register that has been allocated such a hard register.  You should
2477
define this macro if base plus index addresses have different requirements
2478
than other base register uses.
2479
 
2480
Use of this macro is deprecated; please use the more general
2481
@code{REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
2482
@end defmac
2483
 
2484
@defmac REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2485
A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2486
suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses, accessing
2487
memory in mode @var{mode} in address space @var{address_space}.
2488
This is similar to @code{REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except
2489
that that expression may examine the context in which the register
2490
appears in the memory reference.  @var{outer_code} is the code of the
2491
immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} if at the top level of the
2492
address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2493
@code{address_operand}).  @var{index_code} is the code of the
2494
corresponding index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS};
2495
@code{SCRATCH} otherwise.  The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for addresses
2496
that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an @code{address_operand}.
2497
@end defmac
2498
 
2499
@defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{num})
2500
A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2501
suitable for use as an index register in operand addresses.  It may be
2502
either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
2503
allocated such a hard register.
2504
 
2505
The difference between an index register and a base register is that
2506
the index register may be scaled.  If an address involves the sum of
2507
two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
2508
labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
2509
labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
2510
may serve in each capacity.  The compiler will try both labelings,
2511
looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
2512
only if neither labeling works.
2513
@end defmac
2514
 
2515
@deftypefn {Target Hook} reg_class_t TARGET_PREFERRED_RENAME_CLASS (reg_class_t @var{rclass})
2516
A target hook that places additional preference on the register class to use when it is necessary to rename a register in class @var{rclass} to another class, or perhaps @var{NO_REGS}, if no preferred register class is found or hook @code{preferred_rename_class} is not implemented. Sometimes returning a more restrictive class makes better code.  For example, on ARM, thumb-2 instructions using @code{LO_REGS} may be smaller than instructions using @code{GENERIC_REGS}.  By returning @code{LO_REGS} from @code{preferred_rename_class}, code size can be reduced.
2517
@end deftypefn
2518
 
2519
@deftypefn {Target Hook} reg_class_t TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (rtx @var{x}, reg_class_t @var{rclass})
2520
A target hook that places additional restrictions on the register class
2521
to use when it is necessary to copy value @var{x} into a register in class
2522
@var{rclass}.  The value is a register class; perhaps @var{rclass}, or perhaps
2523
another, smaller class.
2524
 
2525
The default version of this hook always returns value of @code{rclass} argument.
2526
 
2527
Sometimes returning a more restrictive class makes better code.  For
2528
example, on the 68000, when @var{x} is an integer constant that is in range
2529
for a @samp{moveq} instruction, the value of this macro is always
2530
@code{DATA_REGS} as long as @var{rclass} includes the data registers.
2531
Requiring a data register guarantees that a @samp{moveq} will be used.
2532
 
2533
One case where @code{TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} must not return
2534
@var{rclass} is if @var{x} is a legitimate constant which cannot be
2535
loaded into some register class.  By returning @code{NO_REGS} you can
2536
force @var{x} into a memory location.  For example, rs6000 can load
2537
immediate values into general-purpose registers, but does not have an
2538
instruction for loading an immediate value into a floating-point
2539
register, so @code{TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} returns @code{NO_REGS} when
2540
@var{x} is a floating-point constant.  If the constant can't be loaded
2541
into any kind of register, code generation will be better if
2542
@code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P} makes the constant illegitimate instead
2543
of using @code{TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}.
2544
 
2545
If an insn has pseudos in it after register allocation, reload will go
2546
through the alternatives and call repeatedly @code{TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}
2547
to find the best one.  Returning @code{NO_REGS}, in this case, makes
2548
reload add a @code{!} in front of the constraint: the x86 back-end uses
2549
this feature to discourage usage of 387 registers when math is done in
2550
the SSE registers (and vice versa).
2551
@end deftypefn
2552
 
2553
@defmac PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
2554
A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2555
to use when it is necessary to copy value @var{x} into a register in class
2556
@var{class}.  The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps
2557
another, smaller class.  On many machines, the following definition is
2558
safe:
2559
 
2560
@smallexample
2561
#define PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS(X,CLASS) CLASS
2562
@end smallexample
2563
 
2564
Sometimes returning a more restrictive class makes better code.  For
2565
example, on the 68000, when @var{x} is an integer constant that is in range
2566
for a @samp{moveq} instruction, the value of this macro is always
2567
@code{DATA_REGS} as long as @var{class} includes the data registers.
2568
Requiring a data register guarantees that a @samp{moveq} will be used.
2569
 
2570
One case where @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} must not return
2571
@var{class} is if @var{x} is a legitimate constant which cannot be
2572
loaded into some register class.  By returning @code{NO_REGS} you can
2573
force @var{x} into a memory location.  For example, rs6000 can load
2574
immediate values into general-purpose registers, but does not have an
2575
instruction for loading an immediate value into a floating-point
2576
register, so @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} returns @code{NO_REGS} when
2577
@var{x} is a floating-point constant.  If the constant can't be loaded
2578
into any kind of register, code generation will be better if
2579
@code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P} makes the constant illegitimate instead
2580
of using @code{TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}.
2581
 
2582
If an insn has pseudos in it after register allocation, reload will go
2583
through the alternatives and call repeatedly @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}
2584
to find the best one.  Returning @code{NO_REGS}, in this case, makes
2585
reload add a @code{!} in front of the constraint: the x86 back-end uses
2586
this feature to discourage usage of 387 registers when math is done in
2587
the SSE registers (and vice versa).
2588
@end defmac
2589
 
2590
@deftypefn {Target Hook} reg_class_t TARGET_PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (rtx @var{x}, reg_class_t @var{rclass})
2591
Like @code{TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, but for output reloads instead of
2592
input reloads.
2593
 
2594
The default version of this hook always returns value of @code{rclass}
2595
argument.
2596
 
2597
You can also use @code{TARGET_PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} to discourage
2598
reload from using some alternatives, like @code{TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}.
2599
@end deftypefn
2600
 
2601
@defmac LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{class})
2602
A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2603
to use when it is necessary to be able to hold a value of mode
2604
@var{mode} in a reload register for which class @var{class} would
2605
ordinarily be used.
2606
 
2607
Unlike @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, this macro should be used when
2608
there are certain modes that simply can't go in certain reload classes.
2609
 
2610
The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps another,
2611
smaller class.
2612
 
2613
Don't define this macro unless the target machine has limitations which
2614
require the macro to do something nontrivial.
2615
@end defmac
2616
 
2617
@deftypefn {Target Hook} reg_class_t TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD (bool @var{in_p}, rtx @var{x}, reg_class_t @var{reload_class}, enum machine_mode @var{reload_mode}, secondary_reload_info *@var{sri})
2618
Many machines have some registers that cannot be copied directly to or
2619
from memory or even from other types of registers.  An example is the
2620
@samp{MQ} register, which on most machines, can only be copied to or
2621
from general registers, but not memory.  Below, we shall be using the
2622
term 'intermediate register' when a move operation cannot be performed
2623
directly, but has to be done by copying the source into the intermediate
2624
register first, and then copying the intermediate register to the
2625
destination.  An intermediate register always has the same mode as
2626
source and destination.  Since it holds the actual value being copied,
2627
reload might apply optimizations to re-use an intermediate register
2628
and eliding the copy from the source when it can determine that the
2629
intermediate register still holds the required value.
2630
 
2631
Another kind of secondary reload is required on some machines which
2632
allow copying all registers to and from memory, but require a scratch
2633
register for stores to some memory locations (e.g., those with symbolic
2634
address on the RT, and those with certain symbolic address on the SPARC
2635
when compiling PIC)@.  Scratch registers need not have the same mode
2636
as the value being copied, and usually hold a different value than
2637
that being copied.  Special patterns in the md file are needed to
2638
describe how the copy is performed with the help of the scratch register;
2639
these patterns also describe the number, register class(es) and mode(s)
2640
of the scratch register(s).
2641
 
2642
In some cases, both an intermediate and a scratch register are required.
2643
 
2644
For input reloads, this target hook is called with nonzero @var{in_p},
2645
and @var{x} is an rtx that needs to be copied to a register of class
2646
@var{reload_class} in @var{reload_mode}.  For output reloads, this target
2647
hook is called with zero @var{in_p}, and a register of class @var{reload_class}
2648
needs to be copied to rtx @var{x} in @var{reload_mode}.
2649
 
2650
If copying a register of @var{reload_class} from/to @var{x} requires
2651
an intermediate register, the hook @code{secondary_reload} should
2652
return the register class required for this intermediate register.
2653
If no intermediate register is required, it should return NO_REGS.
2654
If more than one intermediate register is required, describe the one
2655
that is closest in the copy chain to the reload register.
2656
 
2657
If scratch registers are needed, you also have to describe how to
2658
perform the copy from/to the reload register to/from this
2659
closest intermediate register.  Or if no intermediate register is
2660
required, but still a scratch register is needed, describe the
2661
copy  from/to the reload register to/from the reload operand @var{x}.
2662
 
2663
You do this by setting @code{sri->icode} to the instruction code of a pattern
2664
in the md file which performs the move.  Operands 0 and 1 are the output
2665
and input of this copy, respectively.  Operands from operand 2 onward are
2666
for scratch operands.  These scratch operands must have a mode, and a
2667
single-register-class
2668
@c [later: or memory]
2669
output constraint.
2670
 
2671
When an intermediate register is used, the @code{secondary_reload}
2672
hook will be called again to determine how to copy the intermediate
2673
register to/from the reload operand @var{x}, so your hook must also
2674
have code to handle the register class of the intermediate operand.
2675
 
2676
@c [For later: maybe we'll allow multi-alternative reload patterns -
2677
@c   the port maintainer could name a mov<mode> pattern that has clobbers -
2678
@c   and match the constraints of input and output to determine the required
2679
@c   alternative.  A restriction would be that constraints used to match
2680
@c   against reloads registers would have to be written as register class
2681
@c   constraints, or we need a new target macro / hook that tells us if an
2682
@c   arbitrary constraint can match an unknown register of a given class.
2683
@c   Such a macro / hook would also be useful in other places.]
2684
 
2685
 
2686
@var{x} might be a pseudo-register or a @code{subreg} of a
2687
pseudo-register, which could either be in a hard register or in memory.
2688
Use @code{true_regnum} to find out; it will return @minus{}1 if the pseudo is
2689
in memory and the hard register number if it is in a register.
2690
 
2691
Scratch operands in memory (constraint @code{"=m"} / @code{"=&m"}) are
2692
currently not supported.  For the time being, you will have to continue
2693
to use @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} for that purpose.
2694
 
2695
@code{copy_cost} also uses this target hook to find out how values are
2696
copied.  If you want it to include some extra cost for the need to allocate
2697
(a) scratch register(s), set @code{sri->extra_cost} to the additional cost.
2698
Or if two dependent moves are supposed to have a lower cost than the sum
2699
of the individual moves due to expected fortuitous scheduling and/or special
2700
forwarding logic, you can set @code{sri->extra_cost} to a negative amount.
2701
@end deftypefn
2702
 
2703
@defmac SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2704
@defmacx SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2705
@defmacx SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2706
These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
2707
@code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD} instead.
2708
 
2709
These are obsolete macros, replaced by the @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD}
2710
target hook.  Older ports still define these macros to indicate to the
2711
reload phase that it may
2712
need to allocate at least one register for a reload in addition to the
2713
register to contain the data.  Specifically, if copying @var{x} to a
2714
register @var{class} in @var{mode} requires an intermediate register,
2715
you were supposed to define @code{SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} to return the
2716
largest register class all of whose registers can be used as
2717
intermediate registers or scratch registers.
2718
 
2719
If copying a register @var{class} in @var{mode} to @var{x} requires an
2720
intermediate or scratch register, @code{SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS}
2721
was supposed to be defined be defined to return the largest register
2722
class required.  If the
2723
requirements for input and output reloads were the same, the macro
2724
@code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS} should have been used instead of defining both
2725
macros identically.
2726
 
2727
The values returned by these macros are often @code{GENERAL_REGS}.
2728
Return @code{NO_REGS} if no spare register is needed; i.e., if @var{x}
2729
can be directly copied to or from a register of @var{class} in
2730
@var{mode} without requiring a scratch register.  Do not define this
2731
macro if it would always return @code{NO_REGS}.
2732
 
2733
If a scratch register is required (either with or without an
2734
intermediate register), you were supposed to define patterns for
2735
@samp{reload_in@var{m}} or @samp{reload_out@var{m}}, as required
2736
(@pxref{Standard Names}.  These patterns, which were normally
2737
implemented with a @code{define_expand}, should be similar to the
2738
@samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, except that operand 2 is the scratch
2739
register.
2740
 
2741
These patterns need constraints for the reload register and scratch
2742
register that
2743
contain a single register class.  If the original reload register (whose
2744
class is @var{class}) can meet the constraint given in the pattern, the
2745
value returned by these macros is used for the class of the scratch
2746
register.  Otherwise, two additional reload registers are required.
2747
Their classes are obtained from the constraints in the insn pattern.
2748
 
2749
@var{x} might be a pseudo-register or a @code{subreg} of a
2750
pseudo-register, which could either be in a hard register or in memory.
2751
Use @code{true_regnum} to find out; it will return @minus{}1 if the pseudo is
2752
in memory and the hard register number if it is in a register.
2753
 
2754
These macros should not be used in the case where a particular class of
2755
registers can only be copied to memory and not to another class of
2756
registers.  In that case, secondary reload registers are not needed and
2757
would not be helpful.  Instead, a stack location must be used to perform
2758
the copy and the @code{mov@var{m}} pattern should use memory as an
2759
intermediate storage.  This case often occurs between floating-point and
2760
general registers.
2761
@end defmac
2762
 
2763
@defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED (@var{class1}, @var{class2}, @var{m})
2764
Certain machines have the property that some registers cannot be copied
2765
to some other registers without using memory.  Define this macro on
2766
those machines to be a C expression that is nonzero if objects of mode
2767
@var{m} in registers of @var{class1} can only be copied to registers of
2768
class @var{class2} by storing a register of @var{class1} into memory
2769
and loading that memory location into a register of @var{class2}.
2770
 
2771
Do not define this macro if its value would always be zero.
2772
@end defmac
2773
 
2774
@defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX (@var{mode})
2775
Normally when @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} is defined, the compiler
2776
allocates a stack slot for a memory location needed for register copies.
2777
If this macro is defined, the compiler instead uses the memory location
2778
defined by this macro.
2779
 
2780
Do not define this macro if you do not define
2781
@code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED}.
2782
@end defmac
2783
 
2784
@defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE (@var{mode})
2785
When the compiler needs a secondary memory location to copy between two
2786
registers of mode @var{mode}, it normally allocates sufficient memory to
2787
hold a quantity of @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits and performs the store and
2788
load operations in a mode that many bits wide and whose class is the
2789
same as that of @var{mode}.
2790
 
2791
This is right thing to do on most machines because it ensures that all
2792
bits of the register are copied and prevents accesses to the registers
2793
in a narrower mode, which some machines prohibit for floating-point
2794
registers.
2795
 
2796
However, this default behavior is not correct on some machines, such as
2797
the DEC Alpha, that store short integers in floating-point registers
2798
differently than in integer registers.  On those machines, the default
2799
widening will not work correctly and you must define this macro to
2800
suppress that widening in some cases.  See the file @file{alpha.h} for
2801
details.
2802
 
2803
Do not define this macro if you do not define
2804
@code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} or if widening @var{mode} to a mode that
2805
is @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits wide is correct for your machine.
2806
@end defmac
2807
 
2808
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P (reg_class_t @var{rclass})
2809
A target hook which returns @code{true} if pseudos that have been assigned
2810
to registers of class @var{rclass} would likely be spilled because
2811
registers of @var{rclass} are needed for spill registers.
2812
 
2813
The default version of this target hook returns @code{true} if @var{rclass}
2814
has exactly one register and @code{false} otherwise.  On most machines, this
2815
default should be used.  Only use this target hook to some other expression
2816
if pseudos allocated by @file{local-alloc.c} end up in memory because their
2817
hard registers were needed for spill registers.  If this target hook returns
2818
@code{false} for those classes, those pseudos will only be allocated by
2819
@file{global.c}, which knows how to reallocate the pseudo to another
2820
register.  If there would not be another register available for reallocation,
2821
you should not change the implementation of this target hook since
2822
the only effect of such implementation would be to slow down register
2823
allocation.
2824
@end deftypefn
2825
 
2826
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {unsigned char} TARGET_CLASS_MAX_NREGS (reg_class_t @var{rclass}, enum machine_mode @var{mode})
2827
A target hook returns the maximum number of consecutive registers
2828
of class @var{rclass} needed to hold a value of mode @var{mode}.
2829
 
2830
This is closely related to the macro @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS}.  In fact,
2831
the value returned by @code{TARGET_CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{rclass},
2832
@var{mode})} target hook should be the maximum value of
2833
@code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno}, @var{mode})} for all @var{regno}
2834
values in the class @var{rclass}.
2835
 
2836
This target hook helps control the handling of multiple-word values
2837
in the reload pass.
2838
 
2839
The default version of this target hook returns the size of @var{mode}
2840
in words.
2841
@end deftypefn
2842
 
2843
@defmac CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})
2844
A C expression for the maximum number of consecutive registers
2845
of class @var{class} needed to hold a value of mode @var{mode}.
2846
 
2847
This is closely related to the macro @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS}.  In fact,
2848
the value of the macro @code{CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})}
2849
should be the maximum value of @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno},
2850
@var{mode})} for all @var{regno} values in the class @var{class}.
2851
 
2852
This macro helps control the handling of multiple-word values
2853
in the reload pass.
2854
@end defmac
2855
 
2856
@defmac CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS (@var{from}, @var{to}, @var{class})
2857
If defined, a C expression that returns nonzero for a @var{class} for which
2858
a change from mode @var{from} to mode @var{to} is invalid.
2859
 
2860
For the example, loading 32-bit integer or floating-point objects into
2861
floating-point registers on the Alpha extends them to 64 bits.
2862
Therefore loading a 64-bit object and then storing it as a 32-bit object
2863
does not store the low-order 32 bits, as would be the case for a normal
2864
register.  Therefore, @file{alpha.h} defines @code{CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS}
2865
as below:
2866
 
2867
@smallexample
2868
#define CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS(FROM, TO, CLASS) \
2869
  (GET_MODE_SIZE (FROM) != GET_MODE_SIZE (TO) \
2870
   ? reg_classes_intersect_p (FLOAT_REGS, (CLASS)) : 0)
2871
@end smallexample
2872
@end defmac
2873
 
2874
@node Old Constraints
2875
@section Obsolete Macros for Defining Constraints
2876
@cindex defining constraints, obsolete method
2877
@cindex constraints, defining, obsolete method
2878
 
2879
Machine-specific constraints can be defined with these macros instead
2880
of the machine description constructs described in @ref{Define
2881
Constraints}.  This mechanism is obsolete.  New ports should not use
2882
it; old ports should convert to the new mechanism.
2883
 
2884
@defmac CONSTRAINT_LEN (@var{char}, @var{str})
2885
For the constraint at the start of @var{str}, which starts with the letter
2886
@var{c}, return the length.  This allows you to have register class /
2887
constant / extra constraints that are longer than a single letter;
2888
you don't need to define this macro if you can do with single-letter
2889
constraints only.  The definition of this macro should use
2890
DEFAULT_CONSTRAINT_LEN for all the characters that you don't want
2891
to handle specially.
2892
There are some sanity checks in genoutput.c that check the constraint lengths
2893
for the md file, so you can also use this macro to help you while you are
2894
transitioning from a byzantine single-letter-constraint scheme: when you
2895
return a negative length for a constraint you want to re-use, genoutput
2896
will complain about every instance where it is used in the md file.
2897
@end defmac
2898
 
2899
@defmac REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER (@var{char})
2900
A C expression which defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
2901
letters for register classes.  If @var{char} is such a letter, the
2902
value should be the register class corresponding to it.  Otherwise,
2903
the value should be @code{NO_REGS}.  The register letter @samp{r},
2904
corresponding to class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, will not be passed
2905
to this macro; you do not need to handle it.
2906
@end defmac
2907
 
2908
@defmac REG_CLASS_FROM_CONSTRAINT (@var{char}, @var{str})
2909
Like @code{REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER}, but you also get the constraint string
2910
passed in @var{str}, so that you can use suffixes to distinguish between
2911
different variants.
2912
@end defmac
2913
 
2914
@defmac CONST_OK_FOR_LETTER_P (@var{value}, @var{c})
2915
A C expression that defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
2916
letters (@samp{I}, @samp{J}, @samp{K}, @dots{} @samp{P}) that specify
2917
particular ranges of integer values.  If @var{c} is one of those
2918
letters, the expression should check that @var{value}, an integer, is in
2919
the appropriate range and return 1 if so, 0 otherwise.  If @var{c} is
2920
not one of those letters, the value should be 0 regardless of
2921
@var{value}.
2922
@end defmac
2923
 
2924
@defmac CONST_OK_FOR_CONSTRAINT_P (@var{value}, @var{c}, @var{str})
2925
Like @code{CONST_OK_FOR_LETTER_P}, but you also get the constraint
2926
string passed in @var{str}, so that you can use suffixes to distinguish
2927
between different variants.
2928
@end defmac
2929
 
2930
@defmac CONST_DOUBLE_OK_FOR_LETTER_P (@var{value}, @var{c})
2931
A C expression that defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
2932
letters that specify particular ranges of @code{const_double} values
2933
(@samp{G} or @samp{H}).
2934
 
2935
If @var{c} is one of those letters, the expression should check that
2936
@var{value}, an RTX of code @code{const_double}, is in the appropriate
2937
range and return 1 if so, 0 otherwise.  If @var{c} is not one of those
2938
letters, the value should be 0 regardless of @var{value}.
2939
 
2940
@code{const_double} is used for all floating-point constants and for
2941
@code{DImode} fixed-point constants.  A given letter can accept either
2942
or both kinds of values.  It can use @code{GET_MODE} to distinguish
2943
between these kinds.
2944
@end defmac
2945
 
2946
@defmac CONST_DOUBLE_OK_FOR_CONSTRAINT_P (@var{value}, @var{c}, @var{str})
2947
Like @code{CONST_DOUBLE_OK_FOR_LETTER_P}, but you also get the constraint
2948
string passed in @var{str}, so that you can use suffixes to distinguish
2949
between different variants.
2950
@end defmac
2951
 
2952
@defmac EXTRA_CONSTRAINT (@var{value}, @var{c})
2953
A C expression that defines the optional machine-dependent constraint
2954
letters that can be used to segregate specific types of operands, usually
2955
memory references, for the target machine.  Any letter that is not
2956
elsewhere defined and not matched by @code{REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER} /
2957
@code{REG_CLASS_FROM_CONSTRAINT}
2958
may be used.  Normally this macro will not be defined.
2959
 
2960
If it is required for a particular target machine, it should return 1
2961
if @var{value} corresponds to the operand type represented by the
2962
constraint letter @var{c}.  If @var{c} is not defined as an extra
2963
constraint, the value returned should be 0 regardless of @var{value}.
2964
 
2965
For example, on the ROMP, load instructions cannot have their output
2966
in r0 if the memory reference contains a symbolic address.  Constraint
2967
letter @samp{Q} is defined as representing a memory address that does
2968
@emph{not} contain a symbolic address.  An alternative is specified with
2969
a @samp{Q} constraint on the input and @samp{r} on the output.  The next
2970
alternative specifies @samp{m} on the input and a register class that
2971
does not include r0 on the output.
2972
@end defmac
2973
 
2974
@defmac EXTRA_CONSTRAINT_STR (@var{value}, @var{c}, @var{str})
2975
Like @code{EXTRA_CONSTRAINT}, but you also get the constraint string passed
2976
in @var{str}, so that you can use suffixes to distinguish between different
2977
variants.
2978
@end defmac
2979
 
2980
@defmac EXTRA_MEMORY_CONSTRAINT (@var{c}, @var{str})
2981
A C expression that defines the optional machine-dependent constraint
2982
letters, amongst those accepted by @code{EXTRA_CONSTRAINT}, that should
2983
be treated like memory constraints by the reload pass.
2984
 
2985
It should return 1 if the operand type represented by the constraint
2986
at the start of @var{str}, the first letter of which is the letter @var{c},
2987
comprises a subset of all memory references including
2988
all those whose address is simply a base register.  This allows the reload
2989
pass to reload an operand, if it does not directly correspond to the operand
2990
type of @var{c}, by copying its address into a base register.
2991
 
2992
For example, on the S/390, some instructions do not accept arbitrary
2993
memory references, but only those that do not make use of an index
2994
register.  The constraint letter @samp{Q} is defined via
2995
@code{EXTRA_CONSTRAINT} as representing a memory address of this type.
2996
If the letter @samp{Q} is marked as @code{EXTRA_MEMORY_CONSTRAINT},
2997
a @samp{Q} constraint can handle any memory operand, because the
2998
reload pass knows it can be reloaded by copying the memory address
2999
into a base register if required.  This is analogous to the way
3000
an @samp{o} constraint can handle any memory operand.
3001
@end defmac
3002
 
3003
@defmac EXTRA_ADDRESS_CONSTRAINT (@var{c}, @var{str})
3004
A C expression that defines the optional machine-dependent constraint
3005
letters, amongst those accepted by @code{EXTRA_CONSTRAINT} /
3006
@code{EXTRA_CONSTRAINT_STR}, that should
3007
be treated like address constraints by the reload pass.
3008
 
3009
It should return 1 if the operand type represented by the constraint
3010
at the start of @var{str}, which starts with the letter @var{c}, comprises
3011
a subset of all memory addresses including
3012
all those that consist of just a base register.  This allows the reload
3013
pass to reload an operand, if it does not directly correspond to the operand
3014
type of @var{str}, by copying it into a base register.
3015
 
3016
Any constraint marked as @code{EXTRA_ADDRESS_CONSTRAINT} can only
3017
be used with the @code{address_operand} predicate.  It is treated
3018
analogously to the @samp{p} constraint.
3019
@end defmac
3020
 
3021
@node Stack and Calling
3022
@section Stack Layout and Calling Conventions
3023
@cindex calling conventions
3024
 
3025
@c prevent bad page break with this line
3026
This describes the stack layout and calling conventions.
3027
 
3028
@menu
3029
* Frame Layout::
3030
* Exception Handling::
3031
* Stack Checking::
3032
* Frame Registers::
3033
* Elimination::
3034
* Stack Arguments::
3035
* Register Arguments::
3036
* Scalar Return::
3037
* Aggregate Return::
3038
* Caller Saves::
3039
* Function Entry::
3040
* Profiling::
3041
* Tail Calls::
3042
* Stack Smashing Protection::
3043
@end menu
3044
 
3045
@node Frame Layout
3046
@subsection Basic Stack Layout
3047
@cindex stack frame layout
3048
@cindex frame layout
3049
 
3050
@c prevent bad page break with this line
3051
Here is the basic stack layout.
3052
 
3053
@defmac STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3054
Define this macro if pushing a word onto the stack moves the stack
3055
pointer to a smaller address.
3056
 
3057
When we say, ``define this macro if @dots{}'', it means that the
3058
compiler checks this macro only with @code{#ifdef} so the precise
3059
definition used does not matter.
3060
@end defmac
3061
 
3062
@defmac STACK_PUSH_CODE
3063
This macro defines the operation used when something is pushed
3064
on the stack.  In RTL, a push operation will be
3065
@code{(set (mem (STACK_PUSH_CODE (reg sp))) @dots{})}
3066
 
3067
The choices are @code{PRE_DEC}, @code{POST_DEC}, @code{PRE_INC},
3068
and @code{POST_INC}.  Which of these is correct depends on
3069
the stack direction and on whether the stack pointer points
3070
to the last item on the stack or whether it points to the
3071
space for the next item on the stack.
3072
 
3073
The default is @code{PRE_DEC} when @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is
3074
defined, which is almost always right, and @code{PRE_INC} otherwise,
3075
which is often wrong.
3076
@end defmac
3077
 
3078
@defmac FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3079
Define this macro to nonzero value if the addresses of local variable slots
3080
are at negative offsets from the frame pointer.
3081
@end defmac
3082
 
3083
@defmac ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
3084
Define this macro if successive arguments to a function occupy decreasing
3085
addresses on the stack.
3086
@end defmac
3087
 
3088
@defmac STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
3089
Offset from the frame pointer to the first local variable slot to be allocated.
3090
 
3091
If @code{FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD}, find the next slot's offset by
3092
subtracting the first slot's length from @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
3093
Otherwise, it is found by adding the length of the first slot to the
3094
value @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
3095
@c i'm not sure if the above is still correct.. had to change it to get
3096
@c rid of an overfull.  --mew 2feb93
3097
@end defmac
3098
 
3099
@defmac STACK_ALIGNMENT_NEEDED
3100
Define to zero to disable final alignment of the stack during reload.
3101
The nonzero default for this macro is suitable for most ports.
3102
 
3103
On ports where @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET} is nonzero or where there
3104
is a register save block following the local block that doesn't require
3105
alignment to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, it may be beneficial to disable
3106
stack alignment and do it in the backend.
3107
@end defmac
3108
 
3109
@defmac STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
3110
Offset from the stack pointer register to the first location at which
3111
outgoing arguments are placed.  If not specified, the default value of
3112
zero is used.  This is the proper value for most machines.
3113
 
3114
If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
3115
the first location at which outgoing arguments are placed.
3116
@end defmac
3117
 
3118
@defmac FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
3119
Offset from the argument pointer register to the first argument's
3120
address.  On some machines it may depend on the data type of the
3121
function.
3122
 
3123
If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
3124
the first argument's address.
3125
@end defmac
3126
 
3127
@defmac STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
3128
Offset from the stack pointer register to an item dynamically allocated
3129
on the stack, e.g., by @code{alloca}.
3130
 
3131
The default value for this macro is @code{STACK_POINTER_OFFSET} plus the
3132
length of the outgoing arguments.  The default is correct for most
3133
machines.  See @file{function.c} for details.
3134
@end defmac
3135
 
3136
@defmac INITIAL_FRAME_ADDRESS_RTX
3137
A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address of the initial
3138
stack frame. This address is passed to @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and
3139
@code{DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS}.  If you don't define this macro, a reasonable
3140
default value will be used.  Define this macro in order to make frame pointer
3141
elimination work in the presence of @code{__builtin_frame_address (count)} and
3142
@code{__builtin_return_address (count)} for @code{count} not equal to zero.
3143
@end defmac
3144
 
3145
@defmac DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS (@var{frameaddr})
3146
A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address in a stack
3147
frame where the pointer to the caller's frame is stored.  Assume that
3148
@var{frameaddr} is an RTL expression for the address of the stack frame
3149
itself.
3150
 
3151
If you don't define this macro, the default is to return the value
3152
of @var{frameaddr}---that is, the stack frame address is also the
3153
address of the stack word that points to the previous frame.
3154
@end defmac
3155
 
3156
@defmac SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
3157
If defined, a C expression that produces the machine-specific code to
3158
setup the stack so that arbitrary frames can be accessed.  For example,
3159
on the SPARC, we must flush all of the register windows to the stack
3160
before we can access arbitrary stack frames.  You will seldom need to
3161
define this macro.
3162
@end defmac
3163
 
3164
@deftypefn {Target Hook} rtx TARGET_BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE (void)
3165
This target hook should return an rtx that is used to store
3166
the address of the current frame into the built in @code{setjmp} buffer.
3167
The default value, @code{virtual_stack_vars_rtx}, is correct for most
3168
machines.  One reason you may need to define this target hook is if
3169
@code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} is the appropriate value on your machine.
3170
@end deftypefn
3171
 
3172
@defmac FRAME_ADDR_RTX (@var{frameaddr})
3173
A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the frame
3174
address for the current frame.  @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer
3175
of the current frame.  This is used for __builtin_frame_address.
3176
You need only define this macro if the frame address is not the same
3177
as the frame pointer.  Most machines do not need to define it.
3178
@end defmac
3179
 
3180
@defmac RETURN_ADDR_RTX (@var{count}, @var{frameaddr})
3181
A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the return
3182
address for the frame @var{count} steps up from the current frame, after
3183
the prologue.  @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer of the @var{count}
3184
frame, or the frame pointer of the @var{count} @minus{} 1 frame if
3185
@code{RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME} is defined.
3186
 
3187
The value of the expression must always be the correct address when
3188
@var{count} is zero, but may be @code{NULL_RTX} if there is no way to
3189
determine the return address of other frames.
3190
@end defmac
3191
 
3192
@defmac RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
3193
Define this if the return address of a particular stack frame is accessed
3194
from the frame pointer of the previous stack frame.
3195
@end defmac
3196
 
3197
@defmac INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
3198
A C expression whose value is RTL representing the location of the
3199
incoming return address at the beginning of any function, before the
3200
prologue.  This RTL is either a @code{REG}, indicating that the return
3201
value is saved in @samp{REG}, or a @code{MEM} representing a location in
3202
the stack.
3203
 
3204
You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
3205
debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
3206
 
3207
If this RTL is a @code{REG}, you should also define
3208
@code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (REGNO)}.
3209
@end defmac
3210
 
3211
@defmac DWARF_ALT_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN
3212
A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 column
3213
number that may be used as an alternative return column.  The column
3214
must not correspond to any gcc hard register (that is, it must not
3215
be in the range of @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM}).
3216
 
3217
This macro can be useful if @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} is set to a
3218
general register, but an alternative column needs to be used for signal
3219
frames.  Some targets have also used different frame return columns
3220
over time.
3221
@end defmac
3222
 
3223
@defmac DWARF_ZERO_REG
3224
A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 register
3225
number that is considered to always have the value zero.  This should
3226
only be defined if the target has an architected zero register, and
3227
someone decided it was a good idea to use that register number to
3228
terminate the stack backtrace.  New ports should avoid this.
3229
@end defmac
3230
 
3231
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_DWARF_HANDLE_FRAME_UNSPEC (const char *@var{label}, rtx @var{pattern}, int @var{index})
3232
This target hook allows the backend to emit frame-related insns that
3233
contain UNSPECs or UNSPEC_VOLATILEs.  The DWARF 2 call frame debugging
3234
info engine will invoke it on insns of the form
3235
@smallexample
3236
(set (reg) (unspec [@dots{}] UNSPEC_INDEX))
3237
@end smallexample
3238
and
3239
@smallexample
3240
(set (reg) (unspec_volatile [@dots{}] UNSPECV_INDEX)).
3241
@end smallexample
3242
to let the backend emit the call frame instructions.  @var{label} is
3243
the CFI label attached to the insn, @var{pattern} is the pattern of
3244
the insn and @var{index} is @code{UNSPEC_INDEX} or @code{UNSPECV_INDEX}.
3245
@end deftypefn
3246
 
3247
@defmac INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
3248
A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
3249
from the value of the stack pointer register to the top of the stack
3250
frame at the beginning of any function, before the prologue.  The top of
3251
the frame is defined to be the value of the stack pointer in the
3252
previous frame, just before the call instruction.
3253
 
3254
You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
3255
debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
3256
@end defmac
3257
 
3258
@defmac ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
3259
A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
3260
from the argument pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa).  The
3261
final value should coincide with that calculated by
3262
@code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}.  Which is unfortunately not usable
3263
during virtual register instantiation.
3264
 
3265
The default value for this macro is
3266
@code{FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (fundecl) + crtl->args.pretend_args_size},
3267
which is correct for most machines; in general, the arguments are found
3268
immediately before the stack frame.  Note that this is not the case on
3269
some targets that save registers into the caller's frame, such as SPARC
3270
and rs6000, and so such targets need to define this macro.
3271
 
3272
You only need to define this macro if the default is incorrect, and you
3273
want to support call frame debugging information like that provided by
3274
DWARF 2.
3275
@end defmac
3276
 
3277
@defmac FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
3278
If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
3279
in bytes from the frame pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa).
3280
The final value should coincide with that calculated by
3281
@code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}.
3282
 
3283
Normally the CFA is calculated as an offset from the argument pointer,
3284
via @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}, but if the argument pointer is
3285
variable due to the ABI, this may not be possible.  If this macro is
3286
defined, it implies that the virtual register instantiation should be
3287
based on the frame pointer instead of the argument pointer.  Only one
3288
of @code{FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET} and @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}
3289
should be defined.
3290
@end defmac
3291
 
3292
@defmac CFA_FRAME_BASE_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
3293
If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
3294
in bytes from the canonical frame address (cfa) to the frame base used
3295
in DWARF 2 debug information.  The default is zero.  A different value
3296
may reduce the size of debug information on some ports.
3297
@end defmac
3298
 
3299
@node Exception Handling
3300
@subsection Exception Handling Support
3301
@cindex exception handling
3302
 
3303
@defmac EH_RETURN_DATA_REGNO (@var{N})
3304
A C expression whose value is the @var{N}th register number used for
3305
data by exception handlers, or @code{INVALID_REGNUM} if fewer than
3306
@var{N} registers are usable.
3307
 
3308
The exception handling library routines communicate with the exception
3309
handlers via a set of agreed upon registers.  Ideally these registers
3310
should be call-clobbered; it is possible to use call-saved registers,
3311
but may negatively impact code size.  The target must support at least
3312
2 data registers, but should define 4 if there are enough free registers.
3313
 
3314
You must define this macro if you want to support call frame exception
3315
handling like that provided by DWARF 2.
3316
@end defmac
3317
 
3318
@defmac EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX
3319
A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
3320
to store a stack adjustment to be applied before function return.
3321
This is used to unwind the stack to an exception handler's call frame.
3322
It will be assigned zero on code paths that return normally.
3323
 
3324
Typically this is a call-clobbered hard register that is otherwise
3325
untouched by the epilogue, but could also be a stack slot.
3326
 
3327
Do not define this macro if the stack pointer is saved and restored
3328
by the regular prolog and epilog code in the call frame itself; in
3329
this case, the exception handling library routines will update the
3330
stack location to be restored in place.  Otherwise, you must define
3331
this macro if you want to support call frame exception handling like
3332
that provided by DWARF 2.
3333
@end defmac
3334
 
3335
@defmac EH_RETURN_HANDLER_RTX
3336
A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
3337
to store the address of an exception handler to which we should
3338
return.  It will not be assigned on code paths that return normally.
3339
 
3340
Typically this is the location in the call frame at which the normal
3341
return address is stored.  For targets that return by popping an
3342
address off the stack, this might be a memory address just below
3343
the @emph{target} call frame rather than inside the current call
3344
frame.  If defined, @code{EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX} will have already
3345
been assigned, so it may be used to calculate the location of the
3346
target call frame.
3347
 
3348
Some targets have more complex requirements than storing to an
3349
address calculable during initial code generation.  In that case
3350
the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern should be used instead.
3351
 
3352
If you want to support call frame exception handling, you must
3353
define either this macro or the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern.
3354
@end defmac
3355
 
3356
@defmac RETURN_ADDR_OFFSET
3357
If defined, an integer-valued C expression for which rtl will be generated
3358
to add it to the exception handler address before it is searched in the
3359
exception handling tables, and to subtract it again from the address before
3360
using it to return to the exception handler.
3361
@end defmac
3362
 
3363
@defmac ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT (@var{code}, @var{global})
3364
This macro chooses the encoding of pointers embedded in the exception
3365
handling sections.  If at all possible, this should be defined such
3366
that the exception handling section will not require dynamic relocations,
3367
and so may be read-only.
3368
 
3369
@var{code} is 0 for data, 1 for code labels, 2 for function pointers.
3370
@var{global} is true if the symbol may be affected by dynamic relocations.
3371
The macro should return a combination of the @code{DW_EH_PE_*} defines
3372
as found in @file{dwarf2.h}.
3373
 
3374
If this macro is not defined, pointers will not be encoded but
3375
represented directly.
3376
@end defmac
3377
 
3378
@defmac ASM_MAYBE_OUTPUT_ENCODED_ADDR_RTX (@var{file}, @var{encoding}, @var{size}, @var{addr}, @var{done})
3379
This macro allows the target to emit whatever special magic is required
3380
to represent the encoding chosen by @code{ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT}.
3381
Generic code takes care of pc-relative and indirect encodings; this must
3382
be defined if the target uses text-relative or data-relative encodings.
3383
 
3384
This is a C statement that branches to @var{done} if the format was
3385
handled.  @var{encoding} is the format chosen, @var{size} is the number
3386
of bytes that the format occupies, @var{addr} is the @code{SYMBOL_REF}
3387
to be emitted.
3388
@end defmac
3389
 
3390
@defmac MD_FALLBACK_FRAME_STATE_FOR (@var{context}, @var{fs})
3391
This macro allows the target to add CPU and operating system specific
3392
code to the call-frame unwinder for use when there is no unwind data
3393
available.  The most common reason to implement this macro is to unwind
3394
through signal frames.
3395
 
3396
This macro is called from @code{uw_frame_state_for} in
3397
@file{unwind-dw2.c}, @file{unwind-dw2-xtensa.c} and
3398
@file{unwind-ia64.c}.  @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
3399
@var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}.  Examine @code{context->ra}
3400
for the address of the code being executed and @code{context->cfa} for
3401
the stack pointer value.  If the frame can be decoded, the register
3402
save addresses should be updated in @var{fs} and the macro should
3403
evaluate to @code{_URC_NO_REASON}.  If the frame cannot be decoded,
3404
the macro should evaluate to @code{_URC_END_OF_STACK}.
3405
 
3406
For proper signal handling in Java this macro is accompanied by
3407
@code{MAKE_THROW_FRAME}, defined in @file{libjava/include/*-signal.h} headers.
3408
@end defmac
3409
 
3410
@defmac MD_HANDLE_UNWABI (@var{context}, @var{fs})
3411
This macro allows the target to add operating system specific code to the
3412
call-frame unwinder to handle the IA-64 @code{.unwabi} unwinding directive,
3413
usually used for signal or interrupt frames.
3414
 
3415
This macro is called from @code{uw_update_context} in @file{unwind-ia64.c}.
3416
@var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
3417
@var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}.  Examine @code{fs->unwabi}
3418
for the abi and context in the @code{.unwabi} directive.  If the
3419
@code{.unwabi} directive can be handled, the register save addresses should
3420
be updated in @var{fs}.
3421
@end defmac
3422
 
3423
@defmac TARGET_USES_WEAK_UNWIND_INFO
3424
A C expression that evaluates to true if the target requires unwind
3425
info to be given comdat linkage.  Define it to be @code{1} if comdat
3426
linkage is necessary.  The default is @code{0}.
3427
@end defmac
3428
 
3429
@node Stack Checking
3430
@subsection Specifying How Stack Checking is Done
3431
 
3432
GCC will check that stack references are within the boundaries of the
3433
stack, if the option @option{-fstack-check} is specified, in one of
3434
three ways:
3435
 
3436
@enumerate
3437
@item
3438
If the value of the @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC
3439
will assume that you have arranged for full stack checking to be done
3440
at appropriate places in the configuration files.  GCC will not do
3441
other special processing.
3442
 
3443
@item
3444
If @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} is zero and the value of the
3445
@code{STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC will assume
3446
that you have arranged for static stack checking (checking of the
3447
static stack frame of functions) to be done at appropriate places
3448
in the configuration files.  GCC will only emit code to do dynamic
3449
stack checking (checking on dynamic stack allocations) using the third
3450
approach below.
3451
 
3452
@item
3453
If neither of the above are true, GCC will generate code to periodically
3454
``probe'' the stack pointer using the values of the macros defined below.
3455
@end enumerate
3456
 
3457
If neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined,
3458
GCC will change its allocation strategy for large objects if the option
3459
@option{-fstack-check} is specified: they will always be allocated
3460
dynamically if their size exceeds @code{STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE} bytes.
3461
 
3462
@defmac STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
3463
A nonzero value if stack checking is done by the configuration files in a
3464
machine-dependent manner.  You should define this macro if stack checking
3465
is required by the ABI of your machine or if you would like to do stack
3466
checking in some more efficient way than the generic approach.  The default
3467
value of this macro is zero.
3468
@end defmac
3469
 
3470
@defmac STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN
3471
A nonzero value if static stack checking is done by the configuration files
3472
in a machine-dependent manner.  You should define this macro if you would
3473
like to do static stack checking in some more efficient way than the generic
3474
approach.  The default value of this macro is zero.
3475
@end defmac
3476
 
3477
@defmac STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL_EXP
3478
An integer specifying the interval at which GCC must generate stack probe
3479
instructions, defined as 2 raised to this integer.  You will normally
3480
define this macro so that the interval be no larger than the size of
3481
the ``guard pages'' at the end of a stack area.  The default value
3482
of 12 (4096-byte interval) is suitable for most systems.
3483
@end defmac
3484
 
3485
@defmac STACK_CHECK_MOVING_SP
3486
An integer which is nonzero if GCC should move the stack pointer page by page
3487
when doing probes.  This can be necessary on systems where the stack pointer
3488
contains the bottom address of the memory area accessible to the executing
3489
thread at any point in time.  In this situation an alternate signal stack
3490
is required in order to be able to recover from a stack overflow.  The
3491
default value of this macro is zero.
3492
@end defmac
3493
 
3494
@defmac STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
3495
The number of bytes of stack needed to recover from a stack overflow, for
3496
languages where such a recovery is supported.  The default value of 75 words
3497
with the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism and
3498
8192 bytes with other exception handling mechanisms should be adequate for
3499
most machines.
3500
@end defmac
3501
 
3502
The following macros are relevant only if neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
3503
nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined; you can omit them altogether
3504
in the opposite case.
3505
 
3506
@defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
3507
The maximum size of a stack frame, in bytes.  GCC will generate probe
3508
instructions in non-leaf functions to ensure at least this many bytes of
3509
stack are available.  If a stack frame is larger than this size, stack
3510
checking will not be reliable and GCC will issue a warning.  The
3511
default is chosen so that GCC only generates one instruction on most
3512
systems.  You should normally not change the default value of this macro.
3513
@end defmac
3514
 
3515
@defmac STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
3516
GCC uses this value to generate the above warning message.  It
3517
represents the amount of fixed frame used by a function, not including
3518
space for any callee-saved registers, temporaries and user variables.
3519
You need only specify an upper bound for this amount and will normally
3520
use the default of four words.
3521
@end defmac
3522
 
3523
@defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
3524
The maximum size, in bytes, of an object that GCC will place in the
3525
fixed area of the stack frame when the user specifies
3526
@option{-fstack-check}.
3527
GCC computed the default from the values of the above macros and you will
3528
normally not need to override that default.
3529
@end defmac
3530
 
3531
@need 2000
3532
@node Frame Registers
3533
@subsection Registers That Address the Stack Frame
3534
 
3535
@c prevent bad page break with this line
3536
This discusses registers that address the stack frame.
3537
 
3538
@defmac STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
3539
The register number of the stack pointer register, which must also be a
3540
fixed register according to @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}.  On most machines,
3541
the hardware determines which register this is.
3542
@end defmac
3543
 
3544
@defmac FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
3545
The register number of the frame pointer register, which is used to
3546
access automatic variables in the stack frame.  On some machines, the
3547
hardware determines which register this is.  On other machines, you can
3548
choose any register you wish for this purpose.
3549
@end defmac
3550
 
3551
@defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
3552
On some machines the offset between the frame pointer and starting
3553
offset of the automatic variables is not known until after register
3554
allocation has been done (for example, because the saved registers are
3555
between these two locations).  On those machines, define
3556
@code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} the number of a special, fixed register to
3557
be used internally until the offset is known, and define
3558
@code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} to be the actual hard register number
3559
used for the frame pointer.
3560
 
3561
You should define this macro only in the very rare circumstances when it
3562
is not possible to calculate the offset between the frame pointer and
3563
the automatic variables until after register allocation has been
3564
completed.  When this macro is defined, you must also indicate in your
3565
definition of @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} how to eliminate
3566
@code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} into either @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}
3567
or @code{STACK_POINTER_REGNUM}.
3568
 
3569
Do not define this macro if it would be the same as
3570
@code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}.
3571
@end defmac
3572
 
3573
@defmac ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
3574
The register number of the arg pointer register, which is used to access
3575
the function's argument list.  On some machines, this is the same as the
3576
frame pointer register.  On some machines, the hardware determines which
3577
register this is.  On other machines, you can choose any register you
3578
wish for this purpose.  If this is not the same register as the frame
3579
pointer register, then you must mark it as a fixed register according to
3580
@code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, or arrange to be able to eliminate it
3581
(@pxref{Elimination}).
3582
@end defmac
3583
 
3584
@defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
3585
Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
3586
@code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{frame_pointer_rtx} should be
3587
the same.  The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
3588
== FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
3589
definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
3590
@end defmac
3591
 
3592
@defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_ARG_POINTER
3593
Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
3594
@code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{arg_pointer_rtx} should be the
3595
same.  The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM ==
3596
ARG_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
3597
definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
3598
@end defmac
3599
 
3600
@defmac RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
3601
The register number of the return address pointer register, which is used to
3602
access the current function's return address from the stack.  On some
3603
machines, the return address is not at a fixed offset from the frame
3604
pointer or stack pointer or argument pointer.  This register can be defined
3605
to point to the return address on the stack, and then be converted by
3606
@code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} into either the frame pointer or stack pointer.
3607
 
3608
Do not define this macro unless there is no other way to get the return
3609
address from the stack.
3610
@end defmac
3611
 
3612
@defmac STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
3613
@defmacx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
3614
Register numbers used for passing a function's static chain pointer.  If
3615
register windows are used, the register number as seen by the called
3616
function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM}, while the register
3617
number as seen by the calling function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM}.  If
3618
these registers are the same, @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM} need
3619
not be defined.
3620
 
3621
The static chain register need not be a fixed register.
3622
 
3623
If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros should not be
3624
defined; instead, the @code{TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN} hook should be used.
3625
@end defmac
3626
 
3627
@deftypefn {Target Hook} rtx TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN (const_tree @var{fndecl}, bool @var{incoming_p})
3628
This hook replaces the use of @code{STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM} et al for
3629
targets that may use different static chain locations for different
3630
nested functions.  This may be required if the target has function
3631
attributes that affect the calling conventions of the function and
3632
those calling conventions use different static chain locations.
3633
 
3634
The default version of this hook uses @code{STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM} et al.
3635
 
3636
If the static chain is passed in memory, this hook should be used to
3637
provide rtx giving @code{mem} expressions that denote where they are stored.
3638
Often the @code{mem} expression as seen by the caller will be at an offset
3639
from the stack pointer and the @code{mem} expression as seen by the callee
3640
will be at an offset from the frame pointer.
3641
@findex stack_pointer_rtx
3642
@findex frame_pointer_rtx
3643
@findex arg_pointer_rtx
3644
The variables @code{stack_pointer_rtx}, @code{frame_pointer_rtx}, and
3645
@code{arg_pointer_rtx} will have been initialized and should be used
3646
to refer to those items.
3647
@end deftypefn
3648
 
3649
@defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
3650
This macro specifies the maximum number of hard registers that can be
3651
saved in a call frame.  This is used to size data structures used in
3652
DWARF2 exception handling.
3653
 
3654
Prior to GCC 3.0, this macro was needed in order to establish a stable
3655
exception handling ABI in the face of adding new hard registers for ISA
3656
extensions.  In GCC 3.0 and later, the EH ABI is insulated from changes
3657
in the number of hard registers.  Nevertheless, this macro can still be
3658
used to reduce the runtime memory requirements of the exception handling
3659
routines, which can be substantial if the ISA contains a lot of
3660
registers that are not call-saved.
3661
 
3662
If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
3663
@code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
3664
@end defmac
3665
 
3666
@defmac PRE_GCC3_DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
3667
 
3668
This macro is similar to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}, but is provided
3669
for backward compatibility in pre GCC 3.0 compiled code.
3670
 
3671
If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
3672
@code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}.
3673
@end defmac
3674
 
3675
@defmac DWARF_REG_TO_UNWIND_COLUMN (@var{regno})
3676
 
3677
Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
3678
is different than the internal representation for unwind column.
3679
Given a dwarf register, this macro should return the internal unwind
3680
column number to use instead.
3681
 
3682
See the PowerPC's SPE target for an example.
3683
@end defmac
3684
 
3685
@defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (@var{regno})
3686
 
3687
Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
3688
used in .eh_frame or .debug_frame is different from that used in other
3689
debug info sections.  Given a GCC hard register number, this macro
3690
should return the .eh_frame register number.  The default is
3691
@code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})}.
3692
 
3693
@end defmac
3694
 
3695
@defmac DWARF2_FRAME_REG_OUT (@var{regno}, @var{for_eh})
3696
 
3697
Define this macro to map register numbers held in the call frame info
3698
that GCC has collected using @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM} to those that
3699
should be output in .debug_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is zero) and
3700
.eh_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is nonzero).  The default is to
3701
return @code{@var{regno}}.
3702
 
3703
@end defmac
3704
 
3705
@defmac REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT
3706
 
3707
Define this macro if the target stores register values as
3708
@code{_Unwind_Word} type in unwind context.  It should be defined if
3709
target register size is larger than the size of @code{void *}.  The
3710
default is to store register values as @code{void *} type.
3711
 
3712
@end defmac
3713
 
3714
@defmac ASSUME_EXTENDED_UNWIND_CONTEXT
3715
 
3716
Define this macro to be 1 if the target always uses extended unwind
3717
context with version, args_size and by_value fields.  If it is undefined,
3718
it will be defined to 1 when @code{REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT} is
3719
defined and 0 otherwise.
3720
 
3721
@end defmac
3722
 
3723
@node Elimination
3724
@subsection Eliminating Frame Pointer and Arg Pointer
3725
 
3726
@c prevent bad page break with this line
3727
This is about eliminating the frame pointer and arg pointer.
3728
 
3729
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED (void)
3730
This target hook should return @code{true} if a function must have and use
3731
a frame pointer.  This target hook is called in the reload pass.  If its return
3732
value is @code{true} the function will have a frame pointer.
3733
 
3734
This target hook can in principle examine the current function and decide
3735
according to the facts, but on most machines the constant @code{false} or the
3736
constant @code{true} suffices.  Use @code{false} when the machine allows code
3737
to be generated with no frame pointer, and doing so saves some time or space.
3738
Use @code{true} when there is no possible advantage to avoiding a frame
3739
pointer.
3740
 
3741
In certain cases, the compiler does not know how to produce valid code
3742
without a frame pointer.  The compiler recognizes those cases and
3743
automatically gives the function a frame pointer regardless of what
3744
@code{TARGET_FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED} returns.  You don't need to worry about
3745
them.
3746
 
3747
In a function that does not require a frame pointer, the frame pointer
3748
register can be allocated for ordinary usage, unless you mark it as a
3749
fixed register.  See @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} for more information.
3750
 
3751
Default return value is @code{false}.
3752
@end deftypefn
3753
 
3754
@findex get_frame_size
3755
@defmac INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET (@var{depth-var})
3756
A C statement to store in the variable @var{depth-var} the difference
3757
between the frame pointer and the stack pointer values immediately after
3758
the function prologue.  The value would be computed from information
3759
such as the result of @code{get_frame_size ()} and the tables of
3760
registers @code{regs_ever_live} and @code{call_used_regs}.
3761
 
3762
If @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is defined, this macro will be not be used and
3763
need not be defined.  Otherwise, it must be defined even if
3764
@code{TARGET_FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED} always returns true; in that
3765
case, you may set @var{depth-var} to anything.
3766
@end defmac
3767
 
3768
@defmac ELIMINABLE_REGS
3769
If defined, this macro specifies a table of register pairs used to
3770
eliminate unneeded registers that point into the stack frame.  If it is not
3771
defined, the only elimination attempted by the compiler is to replace
3772
references to the frame pointer with references to the stack pointer.
3773
 
3774
The definition of this macro is a list of structure initializations, each
3775
of which specifies an original and replacement register.
3776
 
3777
On some machines, the position of the argument pointer is not known until
3778
the compilation is completed.  In such a case, a separate hard register
3779
must be used for the argument pointer.  This register can be eliminated by
3780
replacing it with either the frame pointer or the argument pointer,
3781
depending on whether or not the frame pointer has been eliminated.
3782
 
3783
In this case, you might specify:
3784
@smallexample
3785
#define ELIMINABLE_REGS  \
3786
@{@{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3787
 @{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3788
 @{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}@}
3789
@end smallexample
3790
 
3791
Note that the elimination of the argument pointer with the stack pointer is
3792
specified first since that is the preferred elimination.
3793
@end defmac
3794
 
3795
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_CAN_ELIMINATE (const int @var{from_reg}, const int @var{to_reg})
3796
This target hook should returns @code{true} if the compiler is allowed to
3797
try to replace register number @var{from_reg} with register number
3798
@var{to_reg}.  This target hook need only be defined if @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS}
3799
is defined, and will usually be @code{true}, since most of the cases
3800
preventing register elimination are things that the compiler already
3801
knows about.
3802
 
3803
Default return value is @code{true}.
3804
@end deftypefn
3805
 
3806
@defmac INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg}, @var{offset-var})
3807
This macro is similar to @code{INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET}.  It
3808
specifies the initial difference between the specified pair of
3809
registers.  This macro must be defined if @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is
3810
defined.
3811
@end defmac
3812
 
3813
@node Stack Arguments
3814
@subsection Passing Function Arguments on the Stack
3815
@cindex arguments on stack
3816
@cindex stack arguments
3817
 
3818
The macros in this section control how arguments are passed
3819
on the stack.  See the following section for other macros that
3820
control passing certain arguments in registers.
3821
 
3822
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES (const_tree @var{fntype})
3823
This target hook returns @code{true} if an argument declared in a
3824
prototype as an integral type smaller than @code{int} should actually be
3825
passed as an @code{int}.  In addition to avoiding errors in certain
3826
cases of mismatch, it also makes for better code on certain machines.
3827
The default is to not promote prototypes.
3828
@end deftypefn
3829
 
3830
@defmac PUSH_ARGS
3831
A C expression.  If nonzero, push insns will be used to pass
3832
outgoing arguments.
3833
If the target machine does not have a push instruction, set it to zero.
3834
That directs GCC to use an alternate strategy: to
3835
allocate the entire argument block and then store the arguments into
3836
it.  When @code{PUSH_ARGS} is nonzero, @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} must be defined too.
3837
@end defmac
3838
 
3839
@defmac PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
3840
A C expression.  If nonzero, function arguments will be evaluated from
3841
last to first, rather than from first to last.  If this macro is not
3842
defined, it defaults to @code{PUSH_ARGS} on targets where the stack
3843
and args grow in opposite directions, and 0 otherwise.
3844
@end defmac
3845
 
3846
@defmac PUSH_ROUNDING (@var{npushed})
3847
A C expression that is the number of bytes actually pushed onto the
3848
stack when an instruction attempts to push @var{npushed} bytes.
3849
 
3850
On some machines, the definition
3851
 
3852
@smallexample
3853
#define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (BYTES)
3854
@end smallexample
3855
 
3856
@noindent
3857
will suffice.  But on other machines, instructions that appear
3858
to push one byte actually push two bytes in an attempt to maintain
3859
alignment.  Then the definition should be
3860
 
3861
@smallexample
3862
#define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (((BYTES) + 1) & ~1)
3863
@end smallexample
3864
 
3865
If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
3866
@end defmac
3867
 
3868
@findex current_function_outgoing_args_size
3869
@defmac ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
3870
A C expression.  If nonzero, the maximum amount of space required for outgoing arguments
3871
will be computed and placed into the variable
3872
@code{current_function_outgoing_args_size}.  No space will be pushed
3873
onto the stack for each call; instead, the function prologue should
3874
increase the stack frame size by this amount.
3875
 
3876
Setting both @code{PUSH_ARGS} and @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS}
3877
is not proper.
3878
@end defmac
3879
 
3880
@defmac REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3881
Define this macro if functions should assume that stack space has been
3882
allocated for arguments even when their values are passed in
3883
registers.
3884
 
3885
The value of this macro is the size, in bytes, of the area reserved for
3886
arguments passed in registers for the function represented by @var{fndecl},
3887
which can be zero if GCC is calling a library function.
3888
The argument @var{fndecl} can be the FUNCTION_DECL, or the type itself
3889
of the function.
3890
 
3891
This space can be allocated by the caller, or be a part of the
3892
machine-dependent stack frame: @code{OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} says
3893
which.
3894
@end defmac
3895
@c above is overfull.  not sure what to do.  --mew 5feb93  did
3896
@c something, not sure if it looks good.  --mew 10feb93
3897
 
3898
@defmac OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fntype})
3899
Define this to a nonzero value if it is the responsibility of the
3900
caller to allocate the area reserved for arguments passed in registers
3901
when calling a function of @var{fntype}.  @var{fntype} may be NULL
3902
if the function called is a library function.
3903
 
3904
If @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, this macro controls
3905
whether the space for these arguments counts in the value of
3906
@code{current_function_outgoing_args_size}.
3907
@end defmac
3908
 
3909
@defmac STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
3910
Define this macro if @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is defined, but the
3911
stack parameters don't skip the area specified by it.
3912
@c i changed this, makes more sens and it should have taken care of the
3913
@c overfull.. not as specific, tho.  --mew 5feb93
3914
 
3915
Normally, when a parameter is not passed in registers, it is placed on the
3916
stack beyond the @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} area.  Defining this macro
3917
suppresses this behavior and causes the parameter to be passed on the
3918
stack in its natural location.
3919
@end defmac
3920
 
3921
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_RETURN_POPS_ARGS (tree @var{fundecl}, tree @var{funtype}, int @var{size})
3922
This target hook returns the number of bytes of its own arguments that
3923
a function pops on returning, or 0 if the function pops no arguments
3924
and the caller must therefore pop them all after the function returns.
3925
 
3926
@var{fundecl} is a C variable whose value is a tree node that describes
3927
the function in question.  Normally it is a node of type
3928
@code{FUNCTION_DECL} that describes the declaration of the function.
3929
From this you can obtain the @code{DECL_ATTRIBUTES} of the function.
3930
 
3931
@var{funtype} is a C variable whose value is a tree node that
3932
describes the function in question.  Normally it is a node of type
3933
@code{FUNCTION_TYPE} that describes the data type of the function.
3934
From this it is possible to obtain the data types of the value and
3935
arguments (if known).
3936
 
3937
When a call to a library function is being considered, @var{fundecl}
3938
will contain an identifier node for the library function.  Thus, if
3939
you need to distinguish among various library functions, you can do so
3940
by their names.  Note that ``library function'' in this context means
3941
a function used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known specially
3942
in the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being compiled.
3943
 
3944
@var{size} is the number of bytes of arguments passed on the
3945
stack.  If a variable number of bytes is passed, it is zero, and
3946
argument popping will always be the responsibility of the calling function.
3947
 
3948
On the VAX, all functions always pop their arguments, so the definition
3949
of this macro is @var{size}.  On the 68000, using the standard
3950
calling convention, no functions pop their arguments, so the value of
3951
the macro is always 0 in this case.  But an alternative calling
3952
convention is available in which functions that take a fixed number of
3953
arguments pop them but other functions (such as @code{printf}) pop
3954
nothing (the caller pops all).  When this convention is in use,
3955
@var{funtype} is examined to determine whether a function takes a fixed
3956
number of arguments.
3957
@end deftypefn
3958
 
3959
@defmac CALL_POPS_ARGS (@var{cum})
3960
A C expression that should indicate the number of bytes a call sequence
3961
pops off the stack.  It is added to the value of @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS}
3962
when compiling a function call.
3963
 
3964
@var{cum} is the variable in which all arguments to the called function
3965
have been accumulated.
3966
 
3967
On certain architectures, such as the SH5, a call trampoline is used
3968
that pops certain registers off the stack, depending on the arguments
3969
that have been passed to the function.  Since this is a property of the
3970
call site, not of the called function, @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} is not
3971
appropriate.
3972
@end defmac
3973
 
3974
@node Register Arguments
3975
@subsection Passing Arguments in Registers
3976
@cindex arguments in registers
3977
@cindex registers arguments
3978
 
3979
This section describes the macros which let you control how various
3980
types of arguments are passed in registers or how they are arranged in
3981
the stack.
3982
 
3983
@deftypefn {Target Hook} rtx TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG (cumulative_args_t @var{ca}, enum machine_mode @var{mode}, const_tree @var{type}, bool @var{named})
3984
Return an RTX indicating whether a function argument is passed in a
3985
register and if so, which register.
3986
 
3987
The arguments are @var{ca}, which summarizes all the previous
3988
arguments; @var{mode}, the machine mode of the argument; @var{type},
3989
the data type of the argument as a tree node or 0 if that is not known
3990
(which happens for C support library functions); and @var{named},
3991
which is @code{true} for an ordinary argument and @code{false} for
3992
nameless arguments that correspond to @samp{@dots{}} in the called
3993
function's prototype.  @var{type} can be an incomplete type if a
3994
syntax error has previously occurred.
3995
 
3996
The return value is usually either a @code{reg} RTX for the hard
3997
register in which to pass the argument, or zero to pass the argument
3998
on the stack.
3999
 
4000
The value of the expression can also be a @code{parallel} RTX@.  This is
4001
used when an argument is passed in multiple locations.  The mode of the
4002
@code{parallel} should be the mode of the entire argument.  The
4003
@code{parallel} holds any number of @code{expr_list} pairs; each one
4004
describes where part of the argument is passed.  In each
4005
@code{expr_list} the first operand must be a @code{reg} RTX for the hard
4006
register in which to pass this part of the argument, and the mode of the
4007
register RTX indicates how large this part of the argument is.  The
4008
second operand of the @code{expr_list} is a @code{const_int} which gives
4009
the offset in bytes into the entire argument of where this part starts.
4010
As a special exception the first @code{expr_list} in the @code{parallel}
4011
RTX may have a first operand of zero.  This indicates that the entire
4012
argument is also stored on the stack.
4013
 
4014
The last time this hook is called, it is called with @code{MODE ==
4015
VOIDmode}, and its result is passed to the @code{call} or @code{call_value}
4016
pattern as operands 2 and 3 respectively.
4017
 
4018
@cindex @file{stdarg.h} and register arguments
4019
The usual way to make the ISO library @file{stdarg.h} work on a
4020
machine where some arguments are usually passed in registers, is to
4021
cause nameless arguments to be passed on the stack instead.  This is
4022
done by making @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG} return 0 whenever
4023
@var{named} is @code{false}.
4024
 
4025
@cindex @code{TARGET_MUST_PASS_IN_STACK}, and @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG}
4026
@cindex @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}, and @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG}
4027
You may use the hook @code{targetm.calls.must_pass_in_stack}
4028
in the definition of this macro to determine if this argument is of a
4029
type that must be passed in the stack.  If @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}
4030
is not defined and @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG} returns nonzero for such an
4031
argument, the compiler will abort.  If @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is
4032
defined, the argument will be computed in the stack and then loaded into
4033
a register.
4034
@end deftypefn
4035
 
4036
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (enum machine_mode @var{mode}, const_tree @var{type})
4037
This target hook should return @code{true} if we should not pass @var{type}
4038
solely in registers.  The file @file{expr.h} defines a
4039
definition that is usually appropriate, refer to @file{expr.h} for additional
4040
documentation.
4041
@end deftypefn
4042
 
4043
@deftypefn {Target Hook} rtx TARGET_FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG (cumulative_args_t @var{ca}, enum machine_mode @var{mode}, const_tree @var{type}, bool @var{named})
4044
Define this hook if the target machine has ``register windows'', so
4045
that the register in which a function sees an arguments is not
4046
necessarily the same as the one in which the caller passed the
4047
argument.
4048
 
4049
For such machines, @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG} computes the register in
4050
which the caller passes the value, and
4051
@code{TARGET_FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG} should be defined in a similar
4052
fashion to tell the function being called where the arguments will
4053
arrive.
4054
 
4055
If @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG} is not defined,
4056
@code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG} serves both purposes.
4057
@end deftypefn
4058
 
4059
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_ARG_PARTIAL_BYTES (cumulative_args_t @var{cum}, enum machine_mode @var{mode}, tree @var{type}, bool @var{named})
4060
This target hook returns the number of bytes at the beginning of an
4061
argument that must be put in registers.  The value must be zero for
4062
arguments that are passed entirely in registers or that are entirely
4063
pushed on the stack.
4064
 
4065
On some machines, certain arguments must be passed partially in
4066
registers and partially in memory.  On these machines, typically the
4067
first few words of arguments are passed in registers, and the rest
4068
on the stack.  If a multi-word argument (a @code{double} or a
4069
structure) crosses that boundary, its first few words must be passed
4070
in registers and the rest must be pushed.  This macro tells the
4071
compiler when this occurs, and how many bytes should go in registers.
4072
 
4073
@code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG} for these arguments should return the first
4074
register to be used by the caller for this argument; likewise
4075
@code{TARGET_FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG}, for the called function.
4076
@end deftypefn
4077
 
4078
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_PASS_BY_REFERENCE (cumulative_args_t @var{cum}, enum machine_mode @var{mode}, const_tree @var{type}, bool @var{named})
4079
This target hook should return @code{true} if an argument at the
4080
position indicated by @var{cum} should be passed by reference.  This
4081
predicate is queried after target independent reasons for being
4082
passed by reference, such as @code{TREE_ADDRESSABLE (type)}.
4083
 
4084
If the hook returns true, a copy of that argument is made in memory and a
4085
pointer to the argument is passed instead of the argument itself.
4086
The pointer is passed in whatever way is appropriate for passing a pointer
4087
to that type.
4088
@end deftypefn
4089
 
4090
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_CALLEE_COPIES (cumulative_args_t @var{cum}, enum machine_mode @var{mode}, const_tree @var{type}, bool @var{named})
4091
The function argument described by the parameters to this hook is
4092
known to be passed by reference.  The hook should return true if the
4093
function argument should be copied by the callee instead of copied
4094
by the caller.
4095
 
4096
For any argument for which the hook returns true, if it can be
4097
determined that the argument is not modified, then a copy need
4098
not be generated.
4099
 
4100
The default version of this hook always returns false.
4101
@end deftypefn
4102
 
4103
@defmac CUMULATIVE_ARGS
4104
A C type for declaring a variable that is used as the first argument
4105
of @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG} and other related values.  For some
4106
target machines, the type @code{int} suffices and can hold the number
4107
of bytes of argument so far.
4108
 
4109
There is no need to record in @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} anything about the
4110
arguments that have been passed on the stack.  The compiler has other
4111
variables to keep track of that.  For target machines on which all
4112
arguments are passed on the stack, there is no need to store anything in
4113
@code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}; however, the data structure must exist and
4114
should not be empty, so use @code{int}.
4115
@end defmac
4116
 
4117
@defmac OVERRIDE_ABI_FORMAT (@var{fndecl})
4118
If defined, this macro is called before generating any code for a
4119
function, but after the @var{cfun} descriptor for the function has been
4120
created.  The back end may use this macro to update @var{cfun} to
4121
reflect an ABI other than that which would normally be used by default.
4122
If the compiler is generating code for a compiler-generated function,
4123
@var{fndecl} may be @code{NULL}.
4124
@end defmac
4125
 
4126
@defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname}, @var{fndecl}, @var{n_named_args})
4127
A C statement (sans semicolon) for initializing the variable
4128
@var{cum} for the state at the beginning of the argument list.  The
4129
variable has type @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}.  The value of @var{fntype}
4130
is the tree node for the data type of the function which will receive
4131
the args, or 0 if the args are to a compiler support library function.
4132
For direct calls that are not libcalls, @var{fndecl} contain the
4133
declaration node of the function.  @var{fndecl} is also set when
4134
@code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used to find arguments for the function
4135
being compiled.  @var{n_named_args} is set to the number of named
4136
arguments, including a structure return address if it is passed as a
4137
parameter, when making a call.  When processing incoming arguments,
4138
@var{n_named_args} is set to @minus{}1.
4139
 
4140
When processing a call to a compiler support library function,
4141
@var{libname} identifies which one.  It is a @code{symbol_ref} rtx which
4142
contains the name of the function, as a string.  @var{libname} is 0 when
4143
an ordinary C function call is being processed.  Thus, each time this
4144
macro is called, either @var{libname} or @var{fntype} is nonzero, but
4145
never both of them at once.
4146
@end defmac
4147
 
4148
@defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_LIBCALL_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{libname})
4149
Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but only used for outgoing libcalls,
4150
it gets a @code{MODE} argument instead of @var{fntype}, that would be
4151
@code{NULL}.  @var{indirect} would always be zero, too.  If this macro
4152
is not defined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (cum, NULL_RTX, libname,
4153
0)} is used instead.
4154
@end defmac
4155
 
4156
@defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname})
4157
Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but overrides it for the purposes of
4158
finding the arguments for the function being compiled.  If this macro is
4159
undefined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used instead.
4160
 
4161
The value passed for @var{libname} is always 0, since library routines
4162
with special calling conventions are never compiled with GCC@.  The
4163
argument @var{libname} exists for symmetry with
4164
@code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}.
4165
@c could use "this macro" in place of @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}, maybe.
4166
@c --mew 5feb93   i switched the order of the sentences.  --mew 10feb93
4167
@end defmac
4168
 
4169
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE (cumulative_args_t @var{ca}, enum machine_mode @var{mode}, const_tree @var{type}, bool @var{named})
4170
This hook updates the summarizer variable pointed to by @var{ca} to
4171
advance past an argument in the argument list.  The values @var{mode},
4172
@var{type} and @var{named} describe that argument.  Once this is done,
4173
the variable @var{cum} is suitable for analyzing the @emph{following}
4174
argument with @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG}, etc.
4175
 
4176
This hook need not do anything if the argument in question was passed
4177
on the stack.  The compiler knows how to track the amount of stack space
4178
used for arguments without any special help.
4179
@end deftypefn
4180
 
4181
@defmac FUNCTION_ARG_OFFSET (@var{mode}, @var{type})
4182
If defined, a C expression that is the number of bytes to add to the
4183
offset of the argument passed in memory.  This is needed for the SPU,
4184
which passes @code{char} and @code{short} arguments in the preferred
4185
slot that is in the middle of the quad word instead of starting at the
4186
top.
4187
@end defmac
4188
 
4189
@defmac FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type})
4190
If defined, a C expression which determines whether, and in which direction,
4191
to pad out an argument with extra space.  The value should be of type
4192
@code{enum direction}: either @code{upward} to pad above the argument,
4193
@code{downward} to pad below, or @code{none} to inhibit padding.
4194
 
4195
The @emph{amount} of padding is not controlled by this macro, but by the
4196
target hook @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ROUND_BOUNDARY}.  It is
4197
always just enough to reach the next multiple of that boundary.
4198
 
4199
This macro has a default definition which is right for most systems.
4200
For little-endian machines, the default is to pad upward.  For
4201
big-endian machines, the default is to pad downward for an argument of
4202
constant size shorter than an @code{int}, and upward otherwise.
4203
@end defmac
4204
 
4205
@defmac PAD_VARARGS_DOWN
4206
If defined, a C expression which determines whether the default
4207
implementation of va_arg will attempt to pad down before reading the
4208
next argument, if that argument is smaller than its aligned space as
4209
controlled by @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}.  If this macro is not defined, all such
4210
arguments are padded down if @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN} is true.
4211
@end defmac
4212
 
4213
@defmac BLOCK_REG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{first})
4214
Specify padding for the last element of a block move between registers and
4215
memory.  @var{first} is nonzero if this is the only element.  Defining this
4216
macro allows better control of register function parameters on big-endian
4217
machines, without using @code{PARALLEL} rtl.  In particular,
4218
@code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK} need not test padding and mode of types in
4219
registers, as there is no longer a "wrong" part of a register;  For example,
4220
a three byte aggregate may be passed in the high part of a register if so
4221
required.
4222
@end defmac
4223
 
4224
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {unsigned int} TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY (enum machine_mode @var{mode}, const_tree @var{type})
4225
This hook returns the alignment boundary, in bits, of an argument
4226
with the specified mode and type.  The default hook returns
4227
@code{PARM_BOUNDARY} for all arguments.
4228
@end deftypefn
4229
 
4230
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {unsigned int} TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ROUND_BOUNDARY (enum machine_mode @var{mode}, const_tree @var{type})
4231
Normally, the size of an argument is rounded up to @code{PARM_BOUNDARY},
4232
which is the default value for this hook.  You can define this hook to
4233
return a different value if an argument size must be rounded to a larger
4234
value.
4235
@end deftypefn
4236
 
4237
@defmac FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
4238
A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
4239
register in which function arguments are sometimes passed.  This does
4240
@emph{not} include implicit arguments such as the static chain and
4241
the structure-value address.  On many machines, no registers can be
4242
used for this purpose since all function arguments are pushed on the
4243
stack.
4244
@end defmac
4245
 
4246
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_SPLIT_COMPLEX_ARG (const_tree @var{type})
4247
This hook should return true if parameter of type @var{type} are passed
4248
as two scalar parameters.  By default, GCC will attempt to pack complex
4249
arguments into the target's word size.  Some ABIs require complex arguments
4250
to be split and treated as their individual components.  For example, on
4251
AIX64, complex floats should be passed in a pair of floating point
4252
registers, even though a complex float would fit in one 64-bit floating
4253
point register.
4254
 
4255
The default value of this hook is @code{NULL}, which is treated as always
4256
false.
4257
@end deftypefn
4258
 
4259
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_BUILD_BUILTIN_VA_LIST (void)
4260
This hook returns a type node for @code{va_list} for the target.
4261
The default version of the hook returns @code{void*}.
4262
@end deftypefn
4263
 
4264
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_ENUM_VA_LIST_P (int @var{idx}, const char **@var{pname}, tree *@var{ptree})
4265
This target hook is used in function @code{c_common_nodes_and_builtins}
4266
to iterate through the target specific builtin types for va_list. The
4267
variable @var{idx} is used as iterator. @var{pname} has to be a pointer
4268
to a @code{const char *} and @var{ptree} a pointer to a @code{tree} typed
4269
variable.
4270
The arguments @var{pname} and @var{ptree} are used to store the result of
4271
this macro and are set to the name of the va_list builtin type and its
4272
internal type.
4273
If the return value of this macro is zero, then there is no more element.
4274
Otherwise the @var{IDX} should be increased for the next call of this
4275
macro to iterate through all types.
4276
@end deftypefn
4277
 
4278
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_FN_ABI_VA_LIST (tree @var{fndecl})
4279
This hook returns the va_list type of the calling convention specified by
4280
@var{fndecl}.
4281
The default version of this hook returns @code{va_list_type_node}.
4282
@end deftypefn
4283
 
4284
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_CANONICAL_VA_LIST_TYPE (tree @var{type})
4285
This hook returns the va_list type of the calling convention specified by the
4286
type of @var{type}. If @var{type} is not a valid va_list type, it returns
4287
@code{NULL_TREE}.
4288
@end deftypefn
4289
 
4290
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_GIMPLIFY_VA_ARG_EXPR (tree @var{valist}, tree @var{type}, gimple_seq *@var{pre_p}, gimple_seq *@var{post_p})
4291
This hook performs target-specific gimplification of
4292
@code{VA_ARG_EXPR}.  The first two parameters correspond to the
4293
arguments to @code{va_arg}; the latter two are as in
4294
@code{gimplify.c:gimplify_expr}.
4295
@end deftypefn
4296
 
4297
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_VALID_POINTER_MODE (enum machine_mode @var{mode})
4298
Define this to return nonzero if the port can handle pointers
4299
with machine mode @var{mode}.  The default version of this
4300
hook returns true for both @code{ptr_mode} and @code{Pmode}.
4301
@end deftypefn
4302
 
4303
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_REF_MAY_ALIAS_ERRNO (struct ao_ref_s *@var{ref})
4304
Define this to return nonzero if the memory reference @var{ref}  may alias with the system C library errno location.  The default  version of this hook assumes the system C library errno location  is either a declaration of type int or accessed by dereferencing  a pointer to int.
4305
@end deftypefn
4306
 
4307
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_SCALAR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P (enum machine_mode @var{mode})
4308
Define this to return nonzero if the port is prepared to handle
4309
insns involving scalar mode @var{mode}.  For a scalar mode to be
4310
considered supported, all the basic arithmetic and comparisons
4311
must work.
4312
 
4313
The default version of this hook returns true for any mode
4314
required to handle the basic C types (as defined by the port).
4315
Included here are the double-word arithmetic supported by the
4316
code in @file{optabs.c}.
4317
@end deftypefn
4318
 
4319
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_VECTOR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P (enum machine_mode @var{mode})
4320
Define this to return nonzero if the port is prepared to handle
4321
insns involving vector mode @var{mode}.  At the very least, it
4322
must have move patterns for this mode.
4323
@end deftypefn
4324
 
4325
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_ARRAY_MODE_SUPPORTED_P (enum machine_mode @var{mode}, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT @var{nelems})
4326
Return true if GCC should try to use a scalar mode to store an array
4327
of @var{nelems} elements, given that each element has mode @var{mode}.
4328
Returning true here overrides the usual @code{MAX_FIXED_MODE} limit
4329
and allows GCC to use any defined integer mode.
4330
 
4331
One use of this hook is to support vector load and store operations
4332
that operate on several homogeneous vectors.  For example, ARM NEON
4333
has operations like:
4334
 
4335
@smallexample
4336
int8x8x3_t vld3_s8 (const int8_t *)
4337
@end smallexample
4338
 
4339
where the return type is defined as:
4340
 
4341
@smallexample
4342
typedef struct int8x8x3_t
4343
@{
4344
  int8x8_t val[3];
4345
@} int8x8x3_t;
4346
@end smallexample
4347
 
4348
If this hook allows @code{val} to have a scalar mode, then
4349
@code{int8x8x3_t} can have the same mode.  GCC can then store
4350
@code{int8x8x3_t}s in registers rather than forcing them onto the stack.
4351
@end deftypefn
4352
 
4353
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES_FOR_MODE_P (enum machine_mode @var{mode})
4354
Define this to return nonzero for machine modes for which the port has
4355
small register classes.  If this target hook returns nonzero for a given
4356
@var{mode}, the compiler will try to minimize the lifetime of registers
4357
in @var{mode}.  The hook may be called with @code{VOIDmode} as argument.
4358
In this case, the hook is expected to return nonzero if it returns nonzero
4359
for any mode.
4360
 
4361
On some machines, it is risky to let hard registers live across arbitrary
4362
insns.  Typically, these machines have instructions that require values
4363
to be in specific registers (like an accumulator), and reload will fail
4364
if the required hard register is used for another purpose across such an
4365
insn.
4366
 
4367
Passes before reload do not know which hard registers will be used
4368
in an instruction, but the machine modes of the registers set or used in
4369
the instruction are already known.  And for some machines, register
4370
classes are small for, say, integer registers but not for floating point
4371
registers.  For example, the AMD x86-64 architecture requires specific
4372
registers for the legacy x86 integer instructions, but there are many
4373
SSE registers for floating point operations.  On such targets, a good
4374
strategy may be to return nonzero from this hook for @code{INTEGRAL_MODE_P}
4375
machine modes but zero for the SSE register classes.
4376
 
4377
The default version of this hook returns false for any mode.  It is always
4378
safe to redefine this hook to return with a nonzero value.  But if you
4379
unnecessarily define it, you will reduce the amount of optimizations
4380
that can be performed in some cases.  If you do not define this hook
4381
to return a nonzero value when it is required, the compiler will run out
4382
of spill registers and print a fatal error message.
4383
@end deftypefn
4384
 
4385
@deftypevr {Target Hook} {unsigned int} TARGET_FLAGS_REGNUM
4386
If the target has a dedicated flags register, and it needs to use the post-reload comparison elimination pass, then this value should be set appropriately.
4387
@end deftypevr
4388
 
4389
@node Scalar Return
4390
@subsection How Scalar Function Values Are Returned
4391
@cindex return values in registers
4392
@cindex values, returned by functions
4393
@cindex scalars, returned as values
4394
 
4395
This section discusses the macros that control returning scalars as
4396
values---values that can fit in registers.
4397
 
4398
@deftypefn {Target Hook} rtx TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE (const_tree @var{ret_type}, const_tree @var{fn_decl_or_type}, bool @var{outgoing})
4399
 
4400
Define this to return an RTX representing the place where a function
4401
returns or receives a value of data type @var{ret_type}, a tree node
4402
representing a data type.  @var{fn_decl_or_type} is a tree node
4403
representing @code{FUNCTION_DECL} or @code{FUNCTION_TYPE} of a
4404
function being called.  If @var{outgoing} is false, the hook should
4405
compute the register in which the caller will see the return value.
4406
Otherwise, the hook should return an RTX representing the place where
4407
a function returns a value.
4408
 
4409
On many machines, only @code{TYPE_MODE (@var{ret_type})} is relevant.
4410
(Actually, on most machines, scalar values are returned in the same
4411
place regardless of mode.)  The value of the expression is usually a
4412
@code{reg} RTX for the hard register where the return value is stored.
4413
The value can also be a @code{parallel} RTX, if the return value is in
4414
multiple places.  See @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG} for an explanation of the
4415
@code{parallel} form.   Note that the callee will populate every
4416
location specified in the @code{parallel}, but if the first element of
4417
the @code{parallel} contains the whole return value, callers will use
4418
that element as the canonical location and ignore the others.  The m68k
4419
port uses this type of @code{parallel} to return pointers in both
4420
@samp{%a0} (the canonical location) and @samp{%d0}.
4421
 
4422
If @code{TARGET_PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN} returns true, you must apply
4423
the same promotion rules specified in @code{PROMOTE_MODE} if
4424
@var{valtype} is a scalar type.
4425
 
4426
If the precise function being called is known, @var{func} is a tree
4427
node (@code{FUNCTION_DECL}) for it; otherwise, @var{func} is a null
4428
pointer.  This makes it possible to use a different value-returning
4429
convention for specific functions when all their calls are
4430
known.
4431
 
4432
Some target machines have ``register windows'' so that the register in
4433
which a function returns its value is not the same as the one in which
4434
the caller sees the value.  For such machines, you should return
4435
different RTX depending on @var{outgoing}.
4436
 
4437
@code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} is not used for return values with
4438
aggregate data types, because these are returned in another way.  See
4439
@code{TARGET_STRUCT_VALUE_RTX} and related macros, below.
4440
@end deftypefn
4441
 
4442
@defmac FUNCTION_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
4443
This macro has been deprecated.  Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} for
4444
a new target instead.
4445
@end defmac
4446
 
4447
@defmac LIBCALL_VALUE (@var{mode})
4448
A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a library
4449
function returns a value of mode @var{mode}.
4450
 
4451
Note that ``library function'' in this context means a compiler
4452
support routine, used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known
4453
specially by the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being
4454
compiled.
4455
@end defmac
4456
 
4457
@deftypefn {Target Hook} rtx TARGET_LIBCALL_VALUE (enum machine_mode @var{mode}, const_rtx @var{fun})
4458
Define this hook if the back-end needs to know the name of the libcall
4459
function in order to determine where the result should be returned.
4460
 
4461
The mode of the result is given by @var{mode} and the name of the called
4462
library function is given by @var{fun}.  The hook should return an RTX
4463
representing the place where the library function result will be returned.
4464
 
4465
If this hook is not defined, then LIBCALL_VALUE will be used.
4466
@end deftypefn
4467
 
4468
@defmac FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
4469
A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
4470
register in which the values of called function may come back.
4471
 
4472
A register whose use for returning values is limited to serving as the
4473
second of a pair (for a value of type @code{double}, say) need not be
4474
recognized by this macro.  So for most machines, this definition
4475
suffices:
4476
 
4477
@smallexample
4478
#define FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P(N) ((N) == 0)
4479
@end smallexample
4480
 
4481
If the machine has register windows, so that the caller and the called
4482
function use different registers for the return value, this macro
4483
should recognize only the caller's register numbers.
4484
 
4485
This macro has been deprecated.  Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P}
4486
for a new target instead.
4487
@end defmac
4488
 
4489
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P (const unsigned int @var{regno})
4490
A target hook that return @code{true} if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
4491
register in which the values of called function may come back.
4492
 
4493
A register whose use for returning values is limited to serving as the
4494
second of a pair (for a value of type @code{double}, say) need not be
4495
recognized by this target hook.
4496
 
4497
If the machine has register windows, so that the caller and the called
4498
function use different registers for the return value, this target hook
4499
should recognize only the caller's register numbers.
4500
 
4501
If this hook is not defined, then FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P will be used.
4502
@end deftypefn
4503
 
4504
@defmac APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
4505
Define this macro if @samp{untyped_call} and @samp{untyped_return}
4506
need more space than is implied by @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} for
4507
saving and restoring an arbitrary return value.
4508
@end defmac
4509
 
4510
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_RETURN_IN_MSB (const_tree @var{type})
4511
This hook should return true if values of type @var{type} are returned
4512
at the most significant end of a register (in other words, if they are
4513
padded at the least significant end).  You can assume that @var{type}
4514
is returned in a register; the caller is required to check this.
4515
 
4516
Note that the register provided by @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} must
4517
be able to hold the complete return value.  For example, if a 1-, 2-
4518
or 3-byte structure is returned at the most significant end of a
4519
4-byte register, @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} should provide an
4520
@code{SImode} rtx.
4521
@end deftypefn
4522
 
4523
@node Aggregate Return
4524
@subsection How Large Values Are Returned
4525
@cindex aggregates as return values
4526
@cindex large return values
4527
@cindex returning aggregate values
4528
@cindex structure value address
4529
 
4530
When a function value's mode is @code{BLKmode} (and in some other
4531
cases), the value is not returned according to
4532
@code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} (@pxref{Scalar Return}).  Instead, the
4533
caller passes the address of a block of memory in which the value
4534
should be stored.  This address is called the @dfn{structure value
4535
address}.
4536
 
4537
This section describes how to control returning structure values in
4538
memory.
4539
 
4540
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY (const_tree @var{type}, const_tree @var{fntype})
4541
This target hook should return a nonzero value to say to return the
4542
function value in memory, just as large structures are always returned.
4543
Here @var{type} will be the data type of the value, and @var{fntype}
4544
will be the type of the function doing the returning, or @code{NULL} for
4545
libcalls.
4546
 
4547
Note that values of mode @code{BLKmode} must be explicitly handled
4548
by this function.  Also, the option @option{-fpcc-struct-return}
4549
takes effect regardless of this macro.  On most systems, it is
4550
possible to leave the hook undefined; this causes a default
4551
definition to be used, whose value is the constant 1 for @code{BLKmode}
4552
values, and 0 otherwise.
4553
 
4554
Do not use this hook to indicate that structures and unions should always
4555
be returned in memory.  You should instead use @code{DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN}
4556
to indicate this.
4557
@end deftypefn
4558
 
4559
@defmac DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
4560
Define this macro to be 1 if all structure and union return values must be
4561
in memory.  Since this results in slower code, this should be defined
4562
only if needed for compatibility with other compilers or with an ABI@.
4563
If you define this macro to be 0, then the conventions used for structure
4564
and union return values are decided by the @code{TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY}
4565
target hook.
4566
 
4567
If not defined, this defaults to the value 1.
4568
@end defmac
4569
 
4570
@deftypefn {Target Hook} rtx TARGET_STRUCT_VALUE_RTX (tree @var{fndecl}, int @var{incoming})
4571
This target hook should return the location of the structure value
4572
address (normally a @code{mem} or @code{reg}), or 0 if the address is
4573
passed as an ``invisible'' first argument.  Note that @var{fndecl} may
4574
be @code{NULL}, for libcalls.  You do not need to define this target
4575
hook if the address is always passed as an ``invisible'' first
4576
argument.
4577
 
4578
On some architectures the place where the structure value address
4579
is found by the called function is not the same place that the
4580
caller put it.  This can be due to register windows, or it could
4581
be because the function prologue moves it to a different place.
4582
@var{incoming} is @code{1} or @code{2} when the location is needed in
4583
the context of the called function, and @code{0} in the context of
4584
the caller.
4585
 
4586
If @var{incoming} is nonzero and the address is to be found on the
4587
stack, return a @code{mem} which refers to the frame pointer. If
4588
@var{incoming} is @code{2}, the result is being used to fetch the
4589
structure value address at the beginning of a function.  If you need
4590
to emit adjusting code, you should do it at this point.
4591
@end deftypefn
4592
 
4593
@defmac PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
4594
Define this macro if the usual system convention on the target machine
4595
for returning structures and unions is for the called function to return
4596
the address of a static variable containing the value.
4597
 
4598
Do not define this if the usual system convention is for the caller to
4599
pass an address to the subroutine.
4600
 
4601
This macro has effect in @option{-fpcc-struct-return} mode, but it does
4602
nothing when you use @option{-freg-struct-return} mode.
4603
@end defmac
4604
 
4605
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {enum machine_mode} TARGET_GET_RAW_RESULT_MODE (int @var{regno})
4606
This target hook returns the mode to be used when accessing raw return registers in @code{__builtin_return}.  Define this macro if the value in @var{reg_raw_mode} is not correct.
4607
@end deftypefn
4608
 
4609
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {enum machine_mode} TARGET_GET_RAW_ARG_MODE (int @var{regno})
4610
This target hook returns the mode to be used when accessing raw argument registers in @code{__builtin_apply_args}.  Define this macro if the value in @var{reg_raw_mode} is not correct.
4611
@end deftypefn
4612
 
4613
@node Caller Saves
4614
@subsection Caller-Saves Register Allocation
4615
 
4616
If you enable it, GCC can save registers around function calls.  This
4617
makes it possible to use call-clobbered registers to hold variables that
4618
must live across calls.
4619
 
4620
@defmac CALLER_SAVE_PROFITABLE (@var{refs}, @var{calls})
4621
A C expression to determine whether it is worthwhile to consider placing
4622
a pseudo-register in a call-clobbered hard register and saving and
4623
restoring it around each function call.  The expression should be 1 when
4624
this is worth doing, and 0 otherwise.
4625
 
4626
If you don't define this macro, a default is used which is good on most
4627
machines: @code{4 * @var{calls} < @var{refs}}.
4628
@end defmac
4629
 
4630
@defmac HARD_REGNO_CALLER_SAVE_MODE (@var{regno}, @var{nregs})
4631
A C expression specifying which mode is required for saving @var{nregs}
4632
of a pseudo-register in call-clobbered hard register @var{regno}.  If
4633
@var{regno} is unsuitable for caller save, @code{VOIDmode} should be
4634
returned.  For most machines this macro need not be defined since GCC
4635
will select the smallest suitable mode.
4636
@end defmac
4637
 
4638
@node Function Entry
4639
@subsection Function Entry and Exit
4640
@cindex function entry and exit
4641
@cindex prologue
4642
@cindex epilogue
4643
 
4644
This section describes the macros that output function entry
4645
(@dfn{prologue}) and exit (@dfn{epilogue}) code.
4646
 
4647
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE (FILE *@var{file}, HOST_WIDE_INT @var{size})
4648
If defined, a function that outputs the assembler code for entry to a
4649
function.  The prologue is responsible for setting up the stack frame,
4650
initializing the frame pointer register, saving registers that must be
4651
saved, and allocating @var{size} additional bytes of storage for the
4652
local variables.  @var{size} is an integer.  @var{file} is a stdio
4653
stream to which the assembler code should be output.
4654
 
4655
The label for the beginning of the function need not be output by this
4656
macro.  That has already been done when the macro is run.
4657
 
4658
@findex regs_ever_live
4659
To determine which registers to save, the macro can refer to the array
4660
@code{regs_ever_live}: element @var{r} is nonzero if hard register
4661
@var{r} is used anywhere within the function.  This implies the function
4662
prologue should save register @var{r}, provided it is not one of the
4663
call-used registers.  (@code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must likewise use
4664
@code{regs_ever_live}.)
4665
 
4666
On machines that have ``register windows'', the function entry code does
4667
not save on the stack the registers that are in the windows, even if
4668
they are supposed to be preserved by function calls; instead it takes
4669
appropriate steps to ``push'' the register stack, if any non-call-used
4670
registers are used in the function.
4671
 
4672
@findex frame_pointer_needed
4673
On machines where functions may or may not have frame-pointers, the
4674
function entry code must vary accordingly; it must set up the frame
4675
pointer if one is wanted, and not otherwise.  To determine whether a
4676
frame pointer is in wanted, the macro can refer to the variable
4677
@code{frame_pointer_needed}.  The variable's value will be 1 at run
4678
time in a function that needs a frame pointer.  @xref{Elimination}.
4679
 
4680
The function entry code is responsible for allocating any stack space
4681
required for the function.  This stack space consists of the regions
4682
listed below.  In most cases, these regions are allocated in the
4683
order listed, with the last listed region closest to the top of the
4684
stack (the lowest address if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is defined, and
4685
the highest address if it is not defined).  You can use a different order
4686
for a machine if doing so is more convenient or required for
4687
compatibility reasons.  Except in cases where required by standard
4688
or by a debugger, there is no reason why the stack layout used by GCC
4689
need agree with that used by other compilers for a machine.
4690
@end deftypefn
4691
 
4692
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_END_PROLOGUE (FILE *@var{file})
4693
If defined, a function that outputs assembler code at the end of a
4694
prologue.  This should be used when the function prologue is being
4695
emitted as RTL, and you have some extra assembler that needs to be
4696
emitted.  @xref{prologue instruction pattern}.
4697
@end deftypefn
4698
 
4699
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_BEGIN_EPILOGUE (FILE *@var{file})
4700
If defined, a function that outputs assembler code at the start of an
4701
epilogue.  This should be used when the function epilogue is being
4702
emitted as RTL, and you have some extra assembler that needs to be
4703
emitted.  @xref{epilogue instruction pattern}.
4704
@end deftypefn
4705
 
4706
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE (FILE *@var{file}, HOST_WIDE_INT @var{size})
4707
If defined, a function that outputs the assembler code for exit from a
4708
function.  The epilogue is responsible for restoring the saved
4709
registers and stack pointer to their values when the function was
4710
called, and returning control to the caller.  This macro takes the
4711
same arguments as the macro @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE}, and the
4712
registers to restore are determined from @code{regs_ever_live} and
4713
@code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} in the same way.
4714
 
4715
On some machines, there is a single instruction that does all the work
4716
of returning from the function.  On these machines, give that
4717
instruction the name @samp{return} and do not define the macro
4718
@code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} at all.
4719
 
4720
Do not define a pattern named @samp{return} if you want the
4721
@code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} to be used.  If you want the target
4722
switches to control whether return instructions or epilogues are used,
4723
define a @samp{return} pattern with a validity condition that tests the
4724
target switches appropriately.  If the @samp{return} pattern's validity
4725
condition is false, epilogues will be used.
4726
 
4727
On machines where functions may or may not have frame-pointers, the
4728
function exit code must vary accordingly.  Sometimes the code for these
4729
two cases is completely different.  To determine whether a frame pointer
4730
is wanted, the macro can refer to the variable
4731
@code{frame_pointer_needed}.  The variable's value will be 1 when compiling
4732
a function that needs a frame pointer.
4733
 
4734
Normally, @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
4735
@code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must treat leaf functions specially.
4736
The C variable @code{current_function_is_leaf} is nonzero for such a
4737
function.  @xref{Leaf Functions}.
4738
 
4739
On some machines, some functions pop their arguments on exit while
4740
others leave that for the caller to do.  For example, the 68020 when
4741
given @option{-mrtd} pops arguments in functions that take a fixed
4742
number of arguments.
4743
 
4744
@findex current_function_pops_args
4745
Your definition of the macro @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} decides which
4746
functions pop their own arguments.  @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE}
4747
needs to know what was decided.  The number of bytes of the current
4748
function's arguments that this function should pop is available in
4749
@code{crtl->args.pops_args}.  @xref{Scalar Return}.
4750
@end deftypefn
4751
 
4752
@itemize @bullet
4753
@item
4754
@findex current_function_pretend_args_size
4755
A region of @code{current_function_pretend_args_size} bytes of
4756
uninitialized space just underneath the first argument arriving on the
4757
stack.  (This may not be at the very start of the allocated stack region
4758
if the calling sequence has pushed anything else since pushing the stack
4759
arguments.  But usually, on such machines, nothing else has been pushed
4760
yet, because the function prologue itself does all the pushing.)  This
4761
region is used on machines where an argument may be passed partly in
4762
registers and partly in memory, and, in some cases to support the
4763
features in @code{<stdarg.h>}.
4764
 
4765
@item
4766
An area of memory used to save certain registers used by the function.
4767
The size of this area, which may also include space for such things as
4768
the return address and pointers to previous stack frames, is
4769
machine-specific and usually depends on which registers have been used
4770
in the function.  Machines with register windows often do not require
4771
a save area.
4772
 
4773
@item
4774
A region of at least @var{size} bytes, possibly rounded up to an allocation
4775
boundary, to contain the local variables of the function.  On some machines,
4776
this region and the save area may occur in the opposite order, with the
4777
save area closer to the top of the stack.
4778
 
4779
@item
4780
@cindex @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} and stack frames
4781
Optionally, when @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, a region of
4782
@code{current_function_outgoing_args_size} bytes to be used for outgoing
4783
argument lists of the function.  @xref{Stack Arguments}.
4784
@end itemize
4785
 
4786
@defmac EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
4787
Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if the return
4788
instruction or the function epilogue ignores the value of the stack
4789
pointer; in other words, if it is safe to delete an instruction to
4790
adjust the stack pointer before a return from the function.  The
4791
default is 0.
4792
 
4793
Note that this macro's value is relevant only for functions for which
4794
frame pointers are maintained.  It is never safe to delete a final
4795
stack adjustment in a function that has no frame pointer, and the
4796
compiler knows this regardless of @code{EXIT_IGNORE_STACK}.
4797
@end defmac
4798
 
4799
@defmac EPILOGUE_USES (@var{regno})
4800
Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
4801
used by the epilogue or the @samp{return} pattern.  The stack and frame
4802
pointer registers are already assumed to be used as needed.
4803
@end defmac
4804
 
4805
@defmac EH_USES (@var{regno})
4806
Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
4807
used by the exception handling mechanism, and so should be considered live
4808
on entry to an exception edge.
4809
@end defmac
4810
 
4811
@defmac DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE
4812
Define this macro if the function epilogue contains delay slots to which
4813
instructions from the rest of the function can be ``moved''.  The
4814
definition should be a C expression whose value is an integer
4815
representing the number of delay slots there.
4816
@end defmac
4817
 
4818
@defmac ELIGIBLE_FOR_EPILOGUE_DELAY (@var{insn}, @var{n})
4819
A C expression that returns 1 if @var{insn} can be placed in delay
4820
slot number @var{n} of the epilogue.
4821
 
4822
The argument @var{n} is an integer which identifies the delay slot now
4823
being considered (since different slots may have different rules of
4824
eligibility).  It is never negative and is always less than the number
4825
of epilogue delay slots (what @code{DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE} returns).
4826
If you reject a particular insn for a given delay slot, in principle, it
4827
may be reconsidered for a subsequent delay slot.  Also, other insns may
4828
(at least in principle) be considered for the so far unfilled delay
4829
slot.
4830
 
4831
@findex current_function_epilogue_delay_list
4832
@findex final_scan_insn
4833
The insns accepted to fill the epilogue delay slots are put in an RTL
4834
list made with @code{insn_list} objects, stored in the variable
4835
@code{current_function_epilogue_delay_list}.  The insn for the first
4836
delay slot comes first in the list.  Your definition of the macro
4837
@code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} should fill the delay slots by
4838
outputting the insns in this list, usually by calling
4839
@code{final_scan_insn}.
4840
 
4841
You need not define this macro if you did not define
4842
@code{DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE}.
4843
@end defmac
4844
 
4845
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK (FILE *@var{file}, tree @var{thunk_fndecl}, HOST_WIDE_INT @var{delta}, HOST_WIDE_INT @var{vcall_offset}, tree @var{function})
4846
A function that outputs the assembler code for a thunk
4847
function, used to implement C++ virtual function calls with multiple
4848
inheritance.  The thunk acts as a wrapper around a virtual function,
4849
adjusting the implicit object parameter before handing control off to
4850
the real function.
4851
 
4852
First, emit code to add the integer @var{delta} to the location that
4853
contains the incoming first argument.  Assume that this argument
4854
contains a pointer, and is the one used to pass the @code{this} pointer
4855
in C++.  This is the incoming argument @emph{before} the function prologue,
4856
e.g.@: @samp{%o0} on a sparc.  The addition must preserve the values of
4857
all other incoming arguments.
4858
 
4859
Then, if @var{vcall_offset} is nonzero, an additional adjustment should be
4860
made after adding @code{delta}.  In particular, if @var{p} is the
4861
adjusted pointer, the following adjustment should be made:
4862
 
4863
@smallexample
4864
p += (*((ptrdiff_t **)p))[vcall_offset/sizeof(ptrdiff_t)]
4865
@end smallexample
4866
 
4867
After the additions, emit code to jump to @var{function}, which is a
4868
@code{FUNCTION_DECL}.  This is a direct pure jump, not a call, and does
4869
not touch the return address.  Hence returning from @var{FUNCTION} will
4870
return to whoever called the current @samp{thunk}.
4871
 
4872
The effect must be as if @var{function} had been called directly with
4873
the adjusted first argument.  This macro is responsible for emitting all
4874
of the code for a thunk function; @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE}
4875
and @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} are not invoked.
4876
 
4877
The @var{thunk_fndecl} is redundant.  (@var{delta} and @var{function}
4878
have already been extracted from it.)  It might possibly be useful on
4879
some targets, but probably not.
4880
 
4881
If you do not define this macro, the target-independent code in the C++
4882
front end will generate a less efficient heavyweight thunk that calls
4883
@var{function} instead of jumping to it.  The generic approach does
4884
not support varargs.
4885
@end deftypefn
4886
 
4887
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_ASM_CAN_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK (const_tree @var{thunk_fndecl}, HOST_WIDE_INT @var{delta}, HOST_WIDE_INT @var{vcall_offset}, const_tree @var{function})
4888
A function that returns true if TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK would be able
4889
to output the assembler code for the thunk function specified by the
4890
arguments it is passed, and false otherwise.  In the latter case, the
4891
generic approach will be used by the C++ front end, with the limitations
4892
previously exposed.
4893
@end deftypefn
4894
 
4895
@node Profiling
4896
@subsection Generating Code for Profiling
4897
@cindex profiling, code generation
4898
 
4899
These macros will help you generate code for profiling.
4900
 
4901
@defmac FUNCTION_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
4902
A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
4903
assembler code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount}.
4904
 
4905
@findex mcount
4906
The details of how @code{mcount} expects to be called are determined by
4907
your operating system environment, not by GCC@.  To figure them out,
4908
compile a small program for profiling using the system's installed C
4909
compiler and look at the assembler code that results.
4910
 
4911
Older implementations of @code{mcount} expect the address of a counter
4912
variable to be loaded into some register.  The name of this variable is
4913
@samp{LP} followed by the number @var{labelno}, so you would generate
4914
the name using @samp{LP%d} in a @code{fprintf}.
4915
@end defmac
4916
 
4917
@defmac PROFILE_HOOK
4918
A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some assembly
4919
code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount} even the target does
4920
not support profiling.
4921
@end defmac
4922
 
4923
@defmac NO_PROFILE_COUNTERS
4924
Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if the
4925
@code{mcount} subroutine on your system does not need a counter variable
4926
allocated for each function.  This is true for almost all modern
4927
implementations.  If you define this macro, you must not use the
4928
@var{labelno} argument to @code{FUNCTION_PROFILER}.
4929
@end defmac
4930
 
4931
@defmac PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
4932
Define this macro if the code for function profiling should come before
4933
the function prologue.  Normally, the profiling code comes after.
4934
@end defmac
4935
 
4936
@node Tail Calls
4937
@subsection Permitting tail calls
4938
@cindex tail calls
4939
 
4940
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL (tree @var{decl}, tree @var{exp})
4941
True if it is ok to do sibling call optimization for the specified
4942
call expression @var{exp}.  @var{decl} will be the called function,
4943
or @code{NULL} if this is an indirect call.
4944
 
4945
It is not uncommon for limitations of calling conventions to prevent
4946
tail calls to functions outside the current unit of translation, or
4947
during PIC compilation.  The hook is used to enforce these restrictions,
4948
as the @code{sibcall} md pattern can not fail, or fall over to a
4949
``normal'' call.  The criteria for successful sibling call optimization
4950
may vary greatly between different architectures.
4951
@end deftypefn
4952
 
4953
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_EXTRA_LIVE_ON_ENTRY (bitmap @var{regs})
4954
Add any hard registers to @var{regs} that are live on entry to the
4955
function.  This hook only needs to be defined to provide registers that
4956
cannot be found by examination of FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P, the callee saved
4957
registers, STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM, STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM,
4958
TARGET_STRUCT_VALUE_RTX, FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, EH_USES,
4959
FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, and the PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM.
4960
@end deftypefn
4961
 
4962
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_SET_UP_BY_PROLOGUE (struct hard_reg_set_container *@var{})
4963
This hook should add additional registers that are computed by the prologue to the hard regset for shrink-wrapping optimization purposes.
4964
@end deftypefn
4965
 
4966
@node Stack Smashing Protection
4967
@subsection Stack smashing protection
4968
@cindex stack smashing protection
4969
 
4970
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_GUARD (void)
4971
This hook returns a @code{DECL} node for the external variable to use
4972
for the stack protection guard.  This variable is initialized by the
4973
runtime to some random value and is used to initialize the guard value
4974
that is placed at the top of the local stack frame.  The type of this
4975
variable must be @code{ptr_type_node}.
4976
 
4977
The default version of this hook creates a variable called
4978
@samp{__stack_chk_guard}, which is normally defined in @file{libgcc2.c}.
4979
@end deftypefn
4980
 
4981
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_FAIL (void)
4982
This hook returns a tree expression that alerts the runtime that the
4983
stack protect guard variable has been modified.  This expression should
4984
involve a call to a @code{noreturn} function.
4985
 
4986
The default version of this hook invokes a function called
4987
@samp{__stack_chk_fail}, taking no arguments.  This function is
4988
normally defined in @file{libgcc2.c}.
4989
@end deftypefn
4990
 
4991
@deftypefn {Common Target Hook} bool TARGET_SUPPORTS_SPLIT_STACK (bool @var{report}, struct gcc_options *@var{opts})
4992
Whether this target supports splitting the stack when the options described in @var{opts} have been passed.  This is called after options have been parsed, so the target may reject splitting the stack in some configurations.  The default version of this hook returns false.  If @var{report} is true, this function may issue a warning or error; if @var{report} is false, it must simply return a value
4993
@end deftypefn
4994
 
4995
@node Varargs
4996
@section Implementing the Varargs Macros
4997
@cindex varargs implementation
4998
 
4999
GCC comes with an implementation of @code{<varargs.h>} and
5000
@code{<stdarg.h>} that work without change on machines that pass arguments
5001
on the stack.  Other machines require their own implementations of
5002
varargs, and the two machine independent header files must have
5003
conditionals to include it.
5004
 
5005
ISO @code{<stdarg.h>} differs from traditional @code{<varargs.h>} mainly in
5006
the calling convention for @code{va_start}.  The traditional
5007
implementation takes just one argument, which is the variable in which
5008
to store the argument pointer.  The ISO implementation of
5009
@code{va_start} takes an additional second argument.  The user is
5010
supposed to write the last named argument of the function here.
5011
 
5012
However, @code{va_start} should not use this argument.  The way to find
5013
the end of the named arguments is with the built-in functions described
5014
below.
5015
 
5016
@defmac __builtin_saveregs ()
5017
Use this built-in function to save the argument registers in memory so
5018
that the varargs mechanism can access them.  Both ISO and traditional
5019
versions of @code{va_start} must use @code{__builtin_saveregs}, unless
5020
you use @code{TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} (see below) instead.
5021
 
5022
On some machines, @code{__builtin_saveregs} is open-coded under the
5023
control of the target hook @code{TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}.  On
5024
other machines, it calls a routine written in assembler language,
5025
found in @file{libgcc2.c}.
5026
 
5027
Code generated for the call to @code{__builtin_saveregs} appears at the
5028
beginning of the function, as opposed to where the call to
5029
@code{__builtin_saveregs} is written, regardless of what the code is.
5030
This is because the registers must be saved before the function starts
5031
to use them for its own purposes.
5032
@c i rewrote the first sentence above to fix an overfull hbox. --mew
5033
@c 10feb93
5034
@end defmac
5035
 
5036
@defmac __builtin_next_arg (@var{lastarg})
5037
This builtin returns the address of the first anonymous stack
5038
argument, as type @code{void *}.  If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, it
5039
returns the address of the location above the first anonymous stack
5040
argument.  Use it in @code{va_start} to initialize the pointer for
5041
fetching arguments from the stack.  Also use it in @code{va_start} to
5042
verify that the second parameter @var{lastarg} is the last named argument
5043
of the current function.
5044
@end defmac
5045
 
5046
@defmac __builtin_classify_type (@var{object})
5047
Since each machine has its own conventions for which data types are
5048
passed in which kind of register, your implementation of @code{va_arg}
5049
has to embody these conventions.  The easiest way to categorize the
5050
specified data type is to use @code{__builtin_classify_type} together
5051
with @code{sizeof} and @code{__alignof__}.
5052
 
5053
@code{__builtin_classify_type} ignores the value of @var{object},
5054
considering only its data type.  It returns an integer describing what
5055
kind of type that is---integer, floating, pointer, structure, and so on.
5056
 
5057
The file @file{typeclass.h} defines an enumeration that you can use to
5058
interpret the values of @code{__builtin_classify_type}.
5059
@end defmac
5060
 
5061
These machine description macros help implement varargs:
5062
 
5063
@deftypefn {Target Hook} rtx TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS (void)
5064
If defined, this hook produces the machine-specific code for a call to
5065
@code{__builtin_saveregs}.  This code will be moved to the very
5066
beginning of the function, before any parameter access are made.  The
5067
return value of this function should be an RTX that contains the value
5068
to use as the return of @code{__builtin_saveregs}.
5069
@end deftypefn
5070
 
5071
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS (cumulative_args_t @var{args_so_far}, enum machine_mode @var{mode}, tree @var{type}, int *@var{pretend_args_size}, int @var{second_time})
5072
This target hook offers an alternative to using
5073
@code{__builtin_saveregs} and defining the hook
5074
@code{TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}.  Use it to store the anonymous
5075
register arguments into the stack so that all the arguments appear to
5076
have been passed consecutively on the stack.  Once this is done, you can
5077
use the standard implementation of varargs that works for machines that
5078
pass all their arguments on the stack.
5079
 
5080
The argument @var{args_so_far} points to the @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} data
5081
structure, containing the values that are obtained after processing the
5082
named arguments.  The arguments @var{mode} and @var{type} describe the
5083
last named argument---its machine mode and its data type as a tree node.
5084
 
5085
The target hook should do two things: first, push onto the stack all the
5086
argument registers @emph{not} used for the named arguments, and second,
5087
store the size of the data thus pushed into the @code{int}-valued
5088
variable pointed to by @var{pretend_args_size}.  The value that you
5089
store here will serve as additional offset for setting up the stack
5090
frame.
5091
 
5092
Because you must generate code to push the anonymous arguments at
5093
compile time without knowing their data types,
5094
@code{TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} is only useful on machines that
5095
have just a single category of argument register and use it uniformly
5096
for all data types.
5097
 
5098
If the argument @var{second_time} is nonzero, it means that the
5099
arguments of the function are being analyzed for the second time.  This
5100
happens for an inline function, which is not actually compiled until the
5101
end of the source file.  The hook @code{TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} should
5102
not generate any instructions in this case.
5103
@end deftypefn
5104
 
5105
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING (cumulative_args_t @var{ca})
5106
Define this hook to return @code{true} if the location where a function
5107
argument is passed depends on whether or not it is a named argument.
5108
 
5109
This hook controls how the @var{named} argument to @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG}
5110
is set for varargs and stdarg functions.  If this hook returns
5111
@code{true}, the @var{named} argument is always true for named
5112
arguments, and false for unnamed arguments.  If it returns @code{false},
5113
but @code{TARGET_PRETEND_OUTGOING_VARARGS_NAMED} returns @code{true},
5114
then all arguments are treated as named.  Otherwise, all named arguments
5115
except the last are treated as named.
5116
 
5117
You need not define this hook if it always returns @code{false}.
5118
@end deftypefn
5119
 
5120
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_PRETEND_OUTGOING_VARARGS_NAMED (cumulative_args_t @var{ca})
5121
If you need to conditionally change ABIs so that one works with
5122
@code{TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS}, but the other works like neither
5123
@code{TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} nor @code{TARGET_STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING} was
5124
defined, then define this hook to return @code{true} if
5125
@code{TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} is used, @code{false} otherwise.
5126
Otherwise, you should not define this hook.
5127
@end deftypefn
5128
 
5129
@node Trampolines
5130
@section Trampolines for Nested Functions
5131
@cindex trampolines for nested functions
5132
@cindex nested functions, trampolines for
5133
 
5134
A @dfn{trampoline} is a small piece of code that is created at run time
5135
when the address of a nested function is taken.  It normally resides on
5136
the stack, in the stack frame of the containing function.  These macros
5137
tell GCC how to generate code to allocate and initialize a
5138
trampoline.
5139
 
5140
The instructions in the trampoline must do two things: load a constant
5141
address into the static chain register, and jump to the real address of
5142
the nested function.  On CISC machines such as the m68k, this requires
5143
two instructions, a move immediate and a jump.  Then the two addresses
5144
exist in the trampoline as word-long immediate operands.  On RISC
5145
machines, it is often necessary to load each address into a register in
5146
two parts.  Then pieces of each address form separate immediate
5147
operands.
5148
 
5149
The code generated to initialize the trampoline must store the variable
5150
parts---the static chain value and the function address---into the
5151
immediate operands of the instructions.  On a CISC machine, this is
5152
simply a matter of copying each address to a memory reference at the
5153
proper offset from the start of the trampoline.  On a RISC machine, it
5154
may be necessary to take out pieces of the address and store them
5155
separately.
5156
 
5157
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE (FILE *@var{f})
5158
This hook is called by @code{assemble_trampoline_template} to output,
5159
on the stream @var{f}, assembler code for a block of data that contains
5160
the constant parts of a trampoline.  This code should not include a
5161
label---the label is taken care of automatically.
5162
 
5163
If you do not define this hook, it means no template is needed
5164
for the target.  Do not define this hook on systems where the block move
5165
code to copy the trampoline into place would be larger than the code
5166
to generate it on the spot.
5167
@end deftypefn
5168
 
5169
@defmac TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
5170
Return the section into which the trampoline template is to be placed
5171
(@pxref{Sections}).  The default value is @code{readonly_data_section}.
5172
@end defmac
5173
 
5174
@defmac TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
5175
A C expression for the size in bytes of the trampoline, as an integer.
5176
@end defmac
5177
 
5178
@defmac TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
5179
Alignment required for trampolines, in bits.
5180
 
5181
If you don't define this macro, the value of @code{FUNCTION_ALIGNMENT}
5182
is used for aligning trampolines.
5183
@end defmac
5184
 
5185
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_INIT (rtx @var{m_tramp}, tree @var{fndecl}, rtx @var{static_chain})
5186
This hook is called to initialize a trampoline.
5187
@var{m_tramp} is an RTX for the memory block for the trampoline; @var{fndecl}
5188
is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} for the nested function; @var{static_chain} is an
5189
RTX for the static chain value that should be passed to the function
5190
when it is called.
5191
 
5192
If the target defines @code{TARGET_ASM_TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE}, then the
5193
first thing this hook should do is emit a block move into @var{m_tramp}
5194
from the memory block returned by @code{assemble_trampoline_template}.
5195
Note that the block move need only cover the constant parts of the
5196
trampoline.  If the target isolates the variable parts of the trampoline
5197
to the end, not all @code{TRAMPOLINE_SIZE} bytes need be copied.
5198
 
5199
If the target requires any other actions, such as flushing caches or
5200
enabling stack execution, these actions should be performed after
5201
initializing the trampoline proper.
5202
@end deftypefn
5203
 
5204
@deftypefn {Target Hook} rtx TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_ADJUST_ADDRESS (rtx @var{addr})
5205
This hook should perform any machine-specific adjustment in
5206
the address of the trampoline.  Its argument contains the address of the
5207
memory block that was passed to @code{TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_INIT}.  In case
5208
the address to be used for a function call should be different from the
5209
address at which the template was stored, the different address should
5210
be returned; otherwise @var{addr} should be returned unchanged.
5211
If this hook is not defined, @var{addr} will be used for function calls.
5212
@end deftypefn
5213
 
5214
Implementing trampolines is difficult on many machines because they have
5215
separate instruction and data caches.  Writing into a stack location
5216
fails to clear the memory in the instruction cache, so when the program
5217
jumps to that location, it executes the old contents.
5218
 
5219
Here are two possible solutions.  One is to clear the relevant parts of
5220
the instruction cache whenever a trampoline is set up.  The other is to
5221
make all trampolines identical, by having them jump to a standard
5222
subroutine.  The former technique makes trampoline execution faster; the
5223
latter makes initialization faster.
5224
 
5225
To clear the instruction cache when a trampoline is initialized, define
5226
the following macro.
5227
 
5228
@defmac CLEAR_INSN_CACHE (@var{beg}, @var{end})
5229
If defined, expands to a C expression clearing the @emph{instruction
5230
cache} in the specified interval.  The definition of this macro would
5231
typically be a series of @code{asm} statements.  Both @var{beg} and
5232
@var{end} are both pointer expressions.
5233
@end defmac
5234
 
5235
To use a standard subroutine, define the following macro.  In addition,
5236
you must make sure that the instructions in a trampoline fill an entire
5237
cache line with identical instructions, or else ensure that the
5238
beginning of the trampoline code is always aligned at the same point in
5239
its cache line.  Look in @file{m68k.h} as a guide.
5240
 
5241
@defmac TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
5242
Define this macro if trampolines need a special subroutine to do their
5243
work.  The macro should expand to a series of @code{asm} statements
5244
which will be compiled with GCC@.  They go in a library function named
5245
@code{__transfer_from_trampoline}.
5246
 
5247
If you need to avoid executing the ordinary prologue code of a compiled
5248
C function when you jump to the subroutine, you can do so by placing a
5249
special label of your own in the assembler code.  Use one @code{asm}
5250
statement to generate an assembler label, and another to make the label
5251
global.  Then trampolines can use that label to jump directly to your
5252
special assembler code.
5253
@end defmac
5254
 
5255
@node Library Calls
5256
@section Implicit Calls to Library Routines
5257
@cindex library subroutine names
5258
@cindex @file{libgcc.a}
5259
 
5260
@c prevent bad page break with this line
5261
Here is an explanation of implicit calls to library routines.
5262
 
5263
@defmac DECLARE_LIBRARY_RENAMES
5264
This macro, if defined, should expand to a piece of C code that will get
5265
expanded when compiling functions for libgcc.a.  It can be used to
5266
provide alternate names for GCC's internal library functions if there
5267
are ABI-mandated names that the compiler should provide.
5268
@end defmac
5269
 
5270
@findex set_optab_libfunc
5271
@findex init_one_libfunc
5272
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_INIT_LIBFUNCS (void)
5273
This hook should declare additional library routines or rename
5274
existing ones, using the functions @code{set_optab_libfunc} and
5275
@code{init_one_libfunc} defined in @file{optabs.c}.
5276
@code{init_optabs} calls this macro after initializing all the normal
5277
library routines.
5278
 
5279
The default is to do nothing.  Most ports don't need to define this hook.
5280
@end deftypefn
5281
 
5282
@deftypevr {Target Hook} bool TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX
5283
If false (the default), internal library routines start with two
5284
underscores.  If set to true, these routines start with @code{__gnu_}
5285
instead.  E.g., @code{__muldi3} changes to @code{__gnu_muldi3}.  This
5286
currently only affects functions defined in @file{libgcc2.c}.  If this
5287
is set to true, the @file{tm.h} file must also
5288
@code{#define LIBGCC2_GNU_PREFIX}.
5289
@end deftypevr
5290
 
5291
@defmac FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL (@var{mode}, @var{comparison})
5292
This macro should return @code{true} if the library routine that
5293
implements the floating point comparison operator @var{comparison} in
5294
mode @var{mode} will return a boolean, and @var{false} if it will
5295
return a tristate.
5296
 
5297
GCC's own floating point libraries return tristates from the
5298
comparison operators, so the default returns false always.  Most ports
5299
don't need to define this macro.
5300
@end defmac
5301
 
5302
@defmac TARGET_LIB_INT_CMP_BIASED
5303
This macro should evaluate to @code{true} if the integer comparison
5304
functions (like @code{__cmpdi2}) return 0 to indicate that the first
5305
operand is smaller than the second, 1 to indicate that they are equal,
5306
and 2 to indicate that the first operand is greater than the second.
5307
If this macro evaluates to @code{false} the comparison functions return
5308
@minus{}1, 0, and 1 instead of 0, 1, and 2.  If the target uses the routines
5309
in @file{libgcc.a}, you do not need to define this macro.
5310
@end defmac
5311
 
5312
@cindex @code{EDOM}, implicit usage
5313
@findex matherr
5314
@defmac TARGET_EDOM
5315
The value of @code{EDOM} on the target machine, as a C integer constant
5316
expression.  If you don't define this macro, GCC does not attempt to
5317
deposit the value of @code{EDOM} into @code{errno} directly.  Look in
5318
@file{/usr/include/errno.h} to find the value of @code{EDOM} on your
5319
system.
5320
 
5321
If you do not define @code{TARGET_EDOM}, then compiled code reports
5322
domain errors by calling the library function and letting it report the
5323
error.  If mathematical functions on your system use @code{matherr} when
5324
there is an error, then you should leave @code{TARGET_EDOM} undefined so
5325
that @code{matherr} is used normally.
5326
@end defmac
5327
 
5328
@cindex @code{errno}, implicit usage
5329
@defmac GEN_ERRNO_RTX
5330
Define this macro as a C expression to create an rtl expression that
5331
refers to the global ``variable'' @code{errno}.  (On certain systems,
5332
@code{errno} may not actually be a variable.)  If you don't define this
5333
macro, a reasonable default is used.
5334
@end defmac
5335
 
5336
@cindex C99 math functions, implicit usage
5337
@defmac TARGET_C99_FUNCTIONS
5338
When this macro is nonzero, GCC will implicitly optimize @code{sin} calls into
5339
@code{sinf} and similarly for other functions defined by C99 standard.  The
5340
default is zero because a number of existing systems lack support for these
5341
functions in their runtime so this macro needs to be redefined to one on
5342
systems that do support the C99 runtime.
5343
@end defmac
5344
 
5345
@cindex sincos math function, implicit usage
5346
@defmac TARGET_HAS_SINCOS
5347
When this macro is nonzero, GCC will implicitly optimize calls to @code{sin}
5348
and @code{cos} with the same argument to a call to @code{sincos}.  The
5349
default is zero.  The target has to provide the following functions:
5350
@smallexample
5351
void sincos(double x, double *sin, double *cos);
5352
void sincosf(float x, float *sin, float *cos);
5353
void sincosl(long double x, long double *sin, long double *cos);
5354
@end smallexample
5355
@end defmac
5356
 
5357
@defmac NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
5358
Set this macro to 1 to use the "NeXT" Objective-C message sending conventions
5359
by default.  This calling convention involves passing the object, the selector
5360
and the method arguments all at once to the method-lookup library function.
5361
This is the usual setting when targeting Darwin/Mac OS X systems, which have
5362
the NeXT runtime installed.
5363
 
5364
If the macro is set to 0, the "GNU" Objective-C message sending convention
5365
will be used by default.  This convention passes just the object and the
5366
selector to the method-lookup function, which returns a pointer to the method.
5367
 
5368
In either case, it remains possible to select code-generation for the alternate
5369
scheme, by means of compiler command line switches.
5370
@end defmac
5371
 
5372
@node Addressing Modes
5373
@section Addressing Modes
5374
@cindex addressing modes
5375
 
5376
@c prevent bad page break with this line
5377
This is about addressing modes.
5378
 
5379
@defmac HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
5380
@defmacx HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
5381
@defmacx HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
5382
@defmacx HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
5383
A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre-increment,
5384
pre-decrement, post-increment, or post-decrement addressing respectively.
5385
@end defmac
5386
 
5387
@defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_DISP
5388
@defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_DISP
5389
A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
5390
post-address side-effect generation involving constants other than
5391
the size of the memory operand.
5392
@end defmac
5393
 
5394
@defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_REG
5395
@defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_REG
5396
A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
5397
post-address side-effect generation involving a register displacement.
5398
@end defmac
5399
 
5400
@defmac CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (@var{x})
5401
A C expression that is 1 if the RTX @var{x} is a constant which
5402
is a valid address.  On most machines the default definition of
5403
@code{(CONSTANT_P (@var{x}) && GET_CODE (@var{x}) != CONST_DOUBLE)}
5404
is acceptable, but a few machines are more restrictive as to which
5405
constant addresses are supported.
5406
@end defmac
5407
 
5408
@defmac CONSTANT_P (@var{x})
5409
@code{CONSTANT_P}, which is defined by target-independent code,
5410
accepts integer-values expressions whose values are not explicitly
5411
known, such as @code{symbol_ref}, @code{label_ref}, and @code{high}
5412
expressions and @code{const} arithmetic expressions, in addition to
5413
@code{const_int} and @code{const_double} expressions.
5414
@end defmac
5415
 
5416
@defmac MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
5417
A number, the maximum number of registers that can appear in a valid
5418
memory address.  Note that it is up to you to specify a value equal to
5419
the maximum number that @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} would ever
5420
accept.
5421
@end defmac
5422
 
5423
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P (enum machine_mode @var{mode}, rtx @var{x}, bool @var{strict})
5424
A function that returns whether @var{x} (an RTX) is a legitimate memory
5425
address on the target machine for a memory operand of mode @var{mode}.
5426
 
5427
Legitimate addresses are defined in two variants: a strict variant and a
5428
non-strict one.  The @var{strict} parameter chooses which variant is
5429
desired by the caller.
5430
 
5431
The strict variant is used in the reload pass.  It must be defined so
5432
that any pseudo-register that has not been allocated a hard register is
5433
considered a memory reference.  This is because in contexts where some
5434
kind of register is required, a pseudo-register with no hard register
5435
must be rejected.  For non-hard registers, the strict variant should look
5436
up the @code{reg_renumber} array; it should then proceed using the hard
5437
register number in the array, or treat the pseudo as a memory reference
5438
if the array holds @code{-1}.
5439
 
5440
The non-strict variant is used in other passes.  It must be defined to
5441
accept all pseudo-registers in every context where some kind of
5442
register is required.
5443
 
5444
Normally, constant addresses which are the sum of a @code{symbol_ref}
5445
and an integer are stored inside a @code{const} RTX to mark them as
5446
constant.  Therefore, there is no need to recognize such sums
5447
specifically as legitimate addresses.  Normally you would simply
5448
recognize any @code{const} as legitimate.
5449
 
5450
Usually @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS} is not prepared to handle constant
5451
sums that are not marked with  @code{const}.  It assumes that a naked
5452
@code{plus} indicates indexing.  If so, then you @emph{must} reject such
5453
naked constant sums as illegitimate addresses, so that none of them will
5454
be given to @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}.
5455
 
5456
@cindex @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} and address validation
5457
On some machines, whether a symbolic address is legitimate depends on
5458
the section that the address refers to.  On these machines, define the
5459
target hook @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information
5460
into the @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here.  When you see a
5461
@code{const}, you will have to look inside it to find the
5462
@code{symbol_ref} in order to determine the section.  @xref{Assembler
5463
Format}.
5464
 
5465
@cindex @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS}
5466
Some ports are still using a deprecated legacy substitute for
5467
this hook, the @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} macro.  This macro
5468
has this syntax:
5469
 
5470
@example
5471
#define GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS (@var{mode}, @var{x}, @var{label})
5472
@end example
5473
 
5474
@noindent
5475
and should @code{goto @var{label}} if the address @var{x} is a valid
5476
address on the target machine for a memory operand of mode @var{mode}.
5477
 
5478
@findex REG_OK_STRICT
5479
Compiler source files that want to use the strict variant of this
5480
macro define the macro @code{REG_OK_STRICT}.  You should use an
5481
@code{#ifdef REG_OK_STRICT} conditional to define the strict variant in
5482
that case and the non-strict variant otherwise.
5483
 
5484
Using the hook is usually simpler because it limits the number of
5485
files that are recompiled when changes are made.
5486
@end deftypefn
5487
 
5488
@defmac TARGET_MEM_CONSTRAINT
5489
A single character to be used instead of the default @code{'m'}
5490
character for general memory addresses.  This defines the constraint
5491
letter which matches the memory addresses accepted by
5492
@code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P}.  Define this macro if you want to
5493
support new address formats in your back end without changing the
5494
semantics of the @code{'m'} constraint.  This is necessary in order to
5495
preserve functionality of inline assembly constructs using the
5496
@code{'m'} constraint.
5497
@end defmac
5498
 
5499
@defmac FIND_BASE_TERM (@var{x})
5500
A C expression to determine the base term of address @var{x},
5501
or to provide a simplified version of @var{x} from which @file{alias.c}
5502
can easily find the base term.  This macro is used in only two places:
5503
@code{find_base_value} and @code{find_base_term} in @file{alias.c}.
5504
 
5505
It is always safe for this macro to not be defined.  It exists so
5506
that alias analysis can understand machine-dependent addresses.
5507
 
5508
The typical use of this macro is to handle addresses containing
5509
a label_ref or symbol_ref within an UNSPEC@.
5510
@end defmac
5511
 
5512
@deftypefn {Target Hook} rtx TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS (rtx @var{x}, rtx @var{oldx}, enum machine_mode @var{mode})
5513
This hook is given an invalid memory address @var{x} for an
5514
operand of mode @var{mode} and should try to return a valid memory
5515
address.
5516
 
5517
@findex break_out_memory_refs
5518
@var{x} will always be the result of a call to @code{break_out_memory_refs},
5519
and @var{oldx} will be the operand that was given to that function to produce
5520
@var{x}.
5521
 
5522
The code of the hook should not alter the substructure of
5523
@var{x}.  If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
5524
should return the new @var{x}.
5525
 
5526
It is not necessary for this hook to come up with a legitimate address.
5527
The compiler has standard ways of doing so in all cases.  In fact, it
5528
is safe to omit this hook or make it return @var{x} if it cannot find
5529
a valid way to legitimize the address.  But often a machine-dependent
5530
strategy can generate better code.
5531
@end deftypefn
5532
 
5533
@defmac LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{opnum}, @var{type}, @var{ind_levels}, @var{win})
5534
A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x}, which is an address
5535
that needs reloading, with a valid memory address for an operand of mode
5536
@var{mode}.  @var{win} will be a C statement label elsewhere in the code.
5537
It is not necessary to define this macro, but it might be useful for
5538
performance reasons.
5539
 
5540
For example, on the i386, it is sometimes possible to use a single
5541
reload register instead of two by reloading a sum of two pseudo
5542
registers into a register.  On the other hand, for number of RISC
5543
processors offsets are limited so that often an intermediate address
5544
needs to be generated in order to address a stack slot.  By defining
5545
@code{LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS} appropriately, the intermediate addresses
5546
generated for adjacent some stack slots can be made identical, and thus
5547
be shared.
5548
 
5549
@emph{Note}: This macro should be used with caution.  It is necessary
5550
to know something of how reload works in order to effectively use this,
5551
and it is quite easy to produce macros that build in too much knowledge
5552
of reload internals.
5553
 
5554
@emph{Note}: This macro must be able to reload an address created by a
5555
previous invocation of this macro.  If it fails to handle such addresses
5556
then the compiler may generate incorrect code or abort.
5557
 
5558
@findex push_reload
5559
The macro definition should use @code{push_reload} to indicate parts that
5560
need reloading; @var{opnum}, @var{type} and @var{ind_levels} are usually
5561
suitable to be passed unaltered to @code{push_reload}.
5562
 
5563
The code generated by this macro must not alter the substructure of
5564
@var{x}.  If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
5565
should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
5566
This also applies to parts that you change indirectly by calling
5567
@code{push_reload}.
5568
 
5569
@findex strict_memory_address_p
5570
The macro definition may use @code{strict_memory_address_p} to test if
5571
the address has become legitimate.
5572
 
5573
@findex copy_rtx
5574
If you want to change only a part of @var{x}, one standard way of doing
5575
this is to use @code{copy_rtx}.  Note, however, that it unshares only a
5576
single level of rtl.  Thus, if the part to be changed is not at the
5577
top level, you'll need to replace first the top level.
5578
It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
5579
address;  but often a machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
5580
@end defmac
5581
 
5582
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS_P (const_rtx @var{addr})
5583
This hook returns @code{true} if memory address @var{addr} can have
5584
different meanings depending on the machine mode of the memory
5585
reference it is used for or if the address is valid for some modes
5586
but not others.
5587
 
5588
Autoincrement and autodecrement addresses typically have mode-dependent
5589
effects because the amount of the increment or decrement is the size
5590
of the operand being addressed.  Some machines have other mode-dependent
5591
addresses.  Many RISC machines have no mode-dependent addresses.
5592
 
5593
You may assume that @var{addr} is a valid address for the machine.
5594
 
5595
The default version of this hook returns @code{false}.
5596
@end deftypefn
5597
 
5598
@defmac GO_IF_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS (@var{addr}, @var{label})
5599
A C statement or compound statement with a conditional @code{goto
5600
@var{label};} executed if memory address @var{x} (an RTX) can have
5601
different meanings depending on the machine mode of the memory
5602
reference it is used for or if the address is valid for some modes
5603
but not others.
5604
 
5605
Autoincrement and autodecrement addresses typically have mode-dependent
5606
effects because the amount of the increment or decrement is the size
5607
of the operand being addressed.  Some machines have other mode-dependent
5608
addresses.  Many RISC machines have no mode-dependent addresses.
5609
 
5610
You may assume that @var{addr} is a valid address for the machine.
5611
 
5612
These are obsolete macros, replaced by the
5613
@code{TARGET_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS_P} target hook.
5614
@end defmac
5615
 
5616
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (enum machine_mode @var{mode}, rtx @var{x})
5617
This hook returns true if @var{x} is a legitimate constant for a
5618
@var{mode}-mode immediate operand on the target machine.  You can assume that
5619
@var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not check this.
5620
 
5621
The default definition returns true.
5622
@end deftypefn
5623
 
5624
@deftypefn {Target Hook} rtx TARGET_DELEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS (rtx @var{x})
5625
This hook is used to undo the possibly obfuscating effects of the
5626
@code{LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS} and @code{LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS} target
5627
macros.  Some backend implementations of these macros wrap symbol
5628
references inside an @code{UNSPEC} rtx to represent PIC or similar
5629
addressing modes.  This target hook allows GCC's optimizers to understand
5630
the semantics of these opaque @code{UNSPEC}s by converting them back
5631
into their original form.
5632
@end deftypefn
5633
 
5634
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_CONST_NOT_OK_FOR_DEBUG_P (rtx @var{x})
5635
This hook should return true if @var{x} should not be emitted into
5636
debug sections.
5637
@end deftypefn
5638
 
5639
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_CANNOT_FORCE_CONST_MEM (enum machine_mode @var{mode}, rtx @var{x})
5640
This hook should return true if @var{x} is of a form that cannot (or
5641
should not) be spilled to the constant pool.  @var{mode} is the mode
5642
of @var{x}.
5643
 
5644
The default version of this hook returns false.
5645
 
5646
The primary reason to define this hook is to prevent reload from
5647
deciding that a non-legitimate constant would be better reloaded
5648
from the constant pool instead of spilling and reloading a register
5649
holding the constant.  This restriction is often true of addresses
5650
of TLS symbols for various targets.
5651
@end deftypefn
5652
 
5653
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_CONSTANT_P (enum machine_mode @var{mode}, const_rtx @var{x})
5654
This hook should return true if pool entries for constant @var{x} can
5655
be placed in an @code{object_block} structure.  @var{mode} is the mode
5656
of @var{x}.
5657
 
5658
The default version returns false for all constants.
5659
@end deftypefn
5660
 
5661
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_BUILTIN_RECIPROCAL (unsigned @var{fn}, bool @var{md_fn}, bool @var{sqrt})
5662
This hook should return the DECL of a function that implements reciprocal of
5663
the builtin function with builtin function code @var{fn}, or
5664
@code{NULL_TREE} if such a function is not available.  @var{md_fn} is true
5665
when @var{fn} is a code of a machine-dependent builtin function.  When
5666
@var{sqrt} is true, additional optimizations that apply only to the reciprocal
5667
of a square root function are performed, and only reciprocals of @code{sqrt}
5668
function are valid.
5669
@end deftypefn
5670
 
5671
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MASK_FOR_LOAD (void)
5672
This hook should return the DECL of a function @var{f} that given an
5673
address @var{addr} as an argument returns a mask @var{m} that can be
5674
used to extract from two vectors the relevant data that resides in
5675
@var{addr} in case @var{addr} is not properly aligned.
5676
 
5677
The autovectorizer, when vectorizing a load operation from an address
5678
@var{addr} that may be unaligned, will generate two vector loads from
5679
the two aligned addresses around @var{addr}. It then generates a
5680
@code{REALIGN_LOAD} operation to extract the relevant data from the
5681
two loaded vectors. The first two arguments to @code{REALIGN_LOAD},
5682
@var{v1} and @var{v2}, are the two vectors, each of size @var{VS}, and
5683
the third argument, @var{OFF}, defines how the data will be extracted
5684
from these two vectors: if @var{OFF} is 0, then the returned vector is
5685
@var{v2}; otherwise, the returned vector is composed from the last
5686
@var{VS}-@var{OFF} elements of @var{v1} concatenated to the first
5687
@var{OFF} elements of @var{v2}.
5688
 
5689
If this hook is defined, the autovectorizer will generate a call
5690
to @var{f} (using the DECL tree that this hook returns) and will
5691
use the return value of @var{f} as the argument @var{OFF} to
5692
@code{REALIGN_LOAD}. Therefore, the mask @var{m} returned by @var{f}
5693
should comply with the semantics expected by @code{REALIGN_LOAD}
5694
described above.
5695
If this hook is not defined, then @var{addr} will be used as
5696
the argument @var{OFF} to @code{REALIGN_LOAD}, in which case the low
5697
log2(@var{VS}) @minus{} 1 bits of @var{addr} will be considered.
5698
@end deftypefn
5699
 
5700
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MUL_WIDEN_EVEN (tree @var{x})
5701
This hook should return the DECL of a function @var{f} that implements
5702
widening multiplication of the even elements of two input vectors of type @var{x}.
5703
 
5704
If this hook is defined, the autovectorizer will use it along with the
5705
@code{TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MUL_WIDEN_ODD} target hook when vectorizing
5706
widening multiplication in cases that the order of the results does not have to be
5707
preserved (e.g.@: used only by a reduction computation). Otherwise, the
5708
@code{widen_mult_hi/lo} idioms will be used.
5709
@end deftypefn
5710
 
5711
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MUL_WIDEN_ODD (tree @var{x})
5712
This hook should return the DECL of a function @var{f} that implements
5713
widening multiplication of the odd elements of two input vectors of type @var{x}.
5714
 
5715
If this hook is defined, the autovectorizer will use it along with the
5716
@code{TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MUL_WIDEN_EVEN} target hook when vectorizing
5717
widening multiplication in cases that the order of the results does not have to be
5718
preserved (e.g.@: used only by a reduction computation). Otherwise, the
5719
@code{widen_mult_hi/lo} idioms will be used.
5720
@end deftypefn
5721
 
5722
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZATION_COST (enum vect_cost_for_stmt @var{type_of_cost}, tree @var{vectype}, int @var{misalign})
5723
Returns cost of different scalar or vector statements for vectorization cost model.
5724
For vector memory operations the cost may depend on type (@var{vectype}) and
5725
misalignment value (@var{misalign}).
5726
@end deftypefn
5727
 
5728
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_VECTORIZE_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT_REACHABLE (const_tree @var{type}, bool @var{is_packed})
5729
Return true if vector alignment is reachable (by peeling N iterations) for the given type.
5730
@end deftypefn
5731
 
5732
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_VECTORIZE_VEC_PERM_CONST_OK (enum @var{machine_mode}, const unsigned char *@var{sel})
5733
Return true if a vector created for @code{vec_perm_const} is valid.
5734
@end deftypefn
5735
 
5736
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_CONVERSION (unsigned @var{code}, tree @var{dest_type}, tree @var{src_type})
5737
This hook should return the DECL of a function that implements conversion of the
5738
input vector of type @var{src_type} to type @var{dest_type}.
5739
The value of @var{code} is one of the enumerators in @code{enum tree_code} and
5740
specifies how the conversion is to be applied
5741
(truncation, rounding, etc.).
5742
 
5743
If this hook is defined, the autovectorizer will use the
5744
@code{TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_CONVERSION} target hook when vectorizing
5745
conversion. Otherwise, it will return @code{NULL_TREE}.
5746
@end deftypefn
5747
 
5748
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZED_FUNCTION (tree @var{fndecl}, tree @var{vec_type_out}, tree @var{vec_type_in})
5749
This hook should return the decl of a function that implements the
5750
vectorized variant of the builtin function with builtin function code
5751
@var{code} or @code{NULL_TREE} if such a function is not available.
5752
The value of @var{fndecl} is the builtin function declaration.  The
5753
return type of the vectorized function shall be of vector type
5754
@var{vec_type_out} and the argument types should be @var{vec_type_in}.
5755
@end deftypefn
5756
 
5757
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_VECTORIZE_SUPPORT_VECTOR_MISALIGNMENT (enum machine_mode @var{mode}, const_tree @var{type}, int @var{misalignment}, bool @var{is_packed})
5758
This hook should return true if the target supports misaligned vector
5759
store/load of a specific factor denoted in the @var{misalignment}
5760
parameter.  The vector store/load should be of machine mode @var{mode} and
5761
the elements in the vectors should be of type @var{type}.  @var{is_packed}
5762
parameter is true if the memory access is defined in a packed struct.
5763
@end deftypefn
5764
 
5765
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {enum machine_mode} TARGET_VECTORIZE_PREFERRED_SIMD_MODE (enum machine_mode @var{mode})
5766
This hook should return the preferred mode for vectorizing scalar
5767
mode @var{mode}.  The default is
5768
equal to @code{word_mode}, because the vectorizer can do some
5769
transformations even in absence of specialized @acronym{SIMD} hardware.
5770
@end deftypefn
5771
 
5772
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {unsigned int} TARGET_VECTORIZE_AUTOVECTORIZE_VECTOR_SIZES (void)
5773
This hook should return a mask of sizes that should be iterated over
5774
after trying to autovectorize using the vector size derived from the
5775
mode returned by @code{TARGET_VECTORIZE_PREFERRED_SIMD_MODE}.
5776
The default is zero which means to not iterate over other vector sizes.
5777
@end deftypefn
5778
 
5779
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_TM_LOAD (tree)
5780
This hook should return the built-in decl needed to load a vector of the given type within a transaction.
5781
@end deftypefn
5782
 
5783
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_TM_STORE (tree)
5784
This hook should return the built-in decl needed to store a vector of the given type within a transaction.
5785
@end deftypefn
5786
 
5787
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_GATHER (const_tree @var{mem_vectype}, const_tree @var{index_type}, int @var{scale})
5788
Target builtin that implements vector gather operation.  @var{mem_vectype}
5789
is the vector type of the load and @var{index_type} is scalar type of
5790
the index, scaled by @var{scale}.
5791
The default is @code{NULL_TREE} which means to not vectorize gather
5792
loads.
5793
@end deftypefn
5794
 
5795
@node Anchored Addresses
5796
@section Anchored Addresses
5797
@cindex anchored addresses
5798
@cindex @option{-fsection-anchors}
5799
 
5800
GCC usually addresses every static object as a separate entity.
5801
For example, if we have:
5802
 
5803
@smallexample
5804
static int a, b, c;
5805
int foo (void) @{ return a + b + c; @}
5806
@end smallexample
5807
 
5808
the code for @code{foo} will usually calculate three separate symbolic
5809
addresses: those of @code{a}, @code{b} and @code{c}.  On some targets,
5810
it would be better to calculate just one symbolic address and access
5811
the three variables relative to it.  The equivalent pseudocode would
5812
be something like:
5813
 
5814
@smallexample
5815
int foo (void)
5816
@{
5817
  register int *xr = &x;
5818
  return xr[&a - &x] + xr[&b - &x] + xr[&c - &x];
5819
@}
5820
@end smallexample
5821
 
5822
(which isn't valid C).  We refer to shared addresses like @code{x} as
5823
``section anchors''.  Their use is controlled by @option{-fsection-anchors}.
5824
 
5825
The hooks below describe the target properties that GCC needs to know
5826
in order to make effective use of section anchors.  It won't use
5827
section anchors at all unless either @code{TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET}
5828
or @code{TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET} is set to a nonzero value.
5829
 
5830
@deftypevr {Target Hook} HOST_WIDE_INT TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET
5831
The minimum offset that should be applied to a section anchor.
5832
On most targets, it should be the smallest offset that can be
5833
applied to a base register while still giving a legitimate address
5834
for every mode.  The default value is 0.
5835
@end deftypevr
5836
 
5837
@deftypevr {Target Hook} HOST_WIDE_INT TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET
5838
Like @code{TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET}, but the maximum (inclusive)
5839
offset that should be applied to section anchors.  The default
5840
value is 0.
5841
@end deftypevr
5842
 
5843
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ANCHOR (rtx @var{x})
5844
Write the assembly code to define section anchor @var{x}, which is a
5845
@code{SYMBOL_REF} for which @samp{SYMBOL_REF_ANCHOR_P (@var{x})} is true.
5846
The hook is called with the assembly output position set to the beginning
5847
of @code{SYMBOL_REF_BLOCK (@var{x})}.
5848
 
5849
If @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} is available, the hook's default definition uses
5850
it to define the symbol as @samp{. + SYMBOL_REF_BLOCK_OFFSET (@var{x})}.
5851
If @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} is not available, the hook's default definition
5852
is @code{NULL}, which disables the use of section anchors altogether.
5853
@end deftypefn
5854
 
5855
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_USE_ANCHORS_FOR_SYMBOL_P (const_rtx @var{x})
5856
Return true if GCC should attempt to use anchors to access @code{SYMBOL_REF}
5857
@var{x}.  You can assume @samp{SYMBOL_REF_HAS_BLOCK_INFO_P (@var{x})} and
5858
@samp{!SYMBOL_REF_ANCHOR_P (@var{x})}.
5859
 
5860
The default version is correct for most targets, but you might need to
5861
intercept this hook to handle things like target-specific attributes
5862
or target-specific sections.
5863
@end deftypefn
5864
 
5865
@node Condition Code
5866
@section Condition Code Status
5867
@cindex condition code status
5868
 
5869
The macros in this section can be split in two families, according to the
5870
two ways of representing condition codes in GCC.
5871
 
5872
The first representation is the so called @code{(cc0)} representation
5873
(@pxref{Jump Patterns}), where all instructions can have an implicit
5874
clobber of the condition codes.  The second is the condition code
5875
register representation, which provides better schedulability for
5876
architectures that do have a condition code register, but on which
5877
most instructions do not affect it.  The latter category includes
5878
most RISC machines.
5879
 
5880
The implicit clobbering poses a strong restriction on the placement of
5881
the definition and use of the condition code, which need to be in adjacent
5882
insns for machines using @code{(cc0)}.  This can prevent important
5883
optimizations on some machines.  For example, on the IBM RS/6000, there
5884
is a delay for taken branches unless the condition code register is set
5885
three instructions earlier than the conditional branch.  The instruction
5886
scheduler cannot perform this optimization if it is not permitted to
5887
separate the definition and use of the condition code register.
5888
 
5889
For this reason, it is possible and suggested to use a register to
5890
represent the condition code for new ports.  If there is a specific
5891
condition code register in the machine, use a hard register.  If the
5892
condition code or comparison result can be placed in any general register,
5893
or if there are multiple condition registers, use a pseudo register.
5894
Registers used to store the condition code value will usually have a mode
5895
that is in class @code{MODE_CC}.
5896
 
5897
Alternatively, you can use @code{BImode} if the comparison operator is
5898
specified already in the compare instruction.  In this case, you are not
5899
interested in most macros in this section.
5900
 
5901
@menu
5902
* CC0 Condition Codes::      Old style representation of condition codes.
5903
* MODE_CC Condition Codes::  Modern representation of condition codes.
5904
* Cond Exec Macros::         Macros to control conditional execution.
5905
@end menu
5906
 
5907
@node CC0 Condition Codes
5908
@subsection Representation of condition codes using @code{(cc0)}
5909
@findex cc0
5910
 
5911
@findex cc_status
5912
The file @file{conditions.h} defines a variable @code{cc_status} to
5913
describe how the condition code was computed (in case the interpretation of
5914
the condition code depends on the instruction that it was set by).  This
5915
variable contains the RTL expressions on which the condition code is
5916
currently based, and several standard flags.
5917
 
5918
Sometimes additional machine-specific flags must be defined in the machine
5919
description header file.  It can also add additional machine-specific
5920
information by defining @code{CC_STATUS_MDEP}.
5921
 
5922
@defmac CC_STATUS_MDEP
5923
C code for a data type which is used for declaring the @code{mdep}
5924
component of @code{cc_status}.  It defaults to @code{int}.
5925
 
5926
This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
5927
@end defmac
5928
 
5929
@defmac CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
5930
A C expression to initialize the @code{mdep} field to ``empty''.
5931
The default definition does nothing, since most machines don't use
5932
the field anyway.  If you want to use the field, you should probably
5933
define this macro to initialize it.
5934
 
5935
This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
5936
@end defmac
5937
 
5938
@defmac NOTICE_UPDATE_CC (@var{exp}, @var{insn})
5939
A C compound statement to set the components of @code{cc_status}
5940
appropriately for an insn @var{insn} whose body is @var{exp}.  It is
5941
this macro's responsibility to recognize insns that set the condition
5942
code as a byproduct of other activity as well as those that explicitly
5943
set @code{(cc0)}.
5944
 
5945
This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
5946
 
5947
If there are insns that do not set the condition code but do alter
5948
other machine registers, this macro must check to see whether they
5949
invalidate the expressions that the condition code is recorded as
5950
reflecting.  For example, on the 68000, insns that store in address
5951
registers do not set the condition code, which means that usually
5952
@code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} can leave @code{cc_status} unaltered for such
5953
insns.  But suppose that the previous insn set the condition code
5954
based on location @samp{a4@@(102)} and the current insn stores a new
5955
value in @samp{a4}.  Although the condition code is not changed by
5956
this, it will no longer be true that it reflects the contents of
5957
@samp{a4@@(102)}.  Therefore, @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must alter
5958
@code{cc_status} in this case to say that nothing is known about the
5959
condition code value.
5960
 
5961
The definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must be prepared to deal
5962
with the results of peephole optimization: insns whose patterns are
5963
@code{parallel} RTXs containing various @code{reg}, @code{mem} or
5964
constants which are just the operands.  The RTL structure of these
5965
insns is not sufficient to indicate what the insns actually do.  What
5966
@code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} should do when it sees one is just to run
5967
@code{CC_STATUS_INIT}.
5968
 
5969
A possible definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} is to call a function
5970
that looks at an attribute (@pxref{Insn Attributes}) named, for example,
5971
@samp{cc}.  This avoids having detailed information about patterns in
5972
two places, the @file{md} file and in @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC}.
5973
@end defmac
5974
 
5975
@node MODE_CC Condition Codes
5976
@subsection Representation of condition codes using registers
5977
@findex CCmode
5978
@findex MODE_CC
5979
 
5980
@defmac SELECT_CC_MODE (@var{op}, @var{x}, @var{y})
5981
On many machines, the condition code may be produced by other instructions
5982
than compares, for example the branch can use directly the condition
5983
code set by a subtract instruction.  However, on some machines
5984
when the condition code is set this way some bits (such as the overflow
5985
bit) are not set in the same way as a test instruction, so that a different
5986
branch instruction must be used for some conditional branches.  When
5987
this happens, use the machine mode of the condition code register to
5988
record different formats of the condition code register.  Modes can
5989
also be used to record which compare instruction (e.g. a signed or an
5990
unsigned comparison) produced the condition codes.
5991
 
5992
If other modes than @code{CCmode} are required, add them to
5993
@file{@var{machine}-modes.def} and define @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} to choose
5994
a mode given an operand of a compare.  This is needed because the modes
5995
have to be chosen not only during RTL generation but also, for example,
5996
by instruction combination.  The result of @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} should
5997
be consistent with the mode used in the patterns; for example to support
5998
the case of the add on the SPARC discussed above, we have the pattern
5999
 
6000
@smallexample
6001
(define_insn ""
6002
  [(set (reg:CC_NOOV 0)
6003
        (compare:CC_NOOV
6004
          (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "%r")
6005
                   (match_operand:SI 1 "arith_operand" "rI"))
6006
          (const_int 0)))]
6007
  ""
6008
  "@dots{}")
6009
@end smallexample
6010
 
6011
@noindent
6012
together with a @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} that returns @code{CC_NOOVmode}
6013
for comparisons whose argument is a @code{plus}:
6014
 
6015
@smallexample
6016
#define SELECT_CC_MODE(OP,X,Y) \
6017
  (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (X)) == MODE_FLOAT          \
6018
   ? ((OP == EQ || OP == NE) ? CCFPmode : CCFPEmode)    \
6019
   : ((GET_CODE (X) == PLUS || GET_CODE (X) == MINUS    \
6020
       || GET_CODE (X) == NEG) \
6021
      ? CC_NOOVmode : CCmode))
6022
@end smallexample
6023
 
6024
Another reason to use modes is to retain information on which operands
6025
were used by the comparison; see @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE} later in
6026
this section.
6027
 
6028
You should define this macro if and only if you define extra CC modes
6029
in @file{@var{machine}-modes.def}.
6030
@end defmac
6031
 
6032
@defmac CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON (@var{code}, @var{op0}, @var{op1})
6033
On some machines not all possible comparisons are defined, but you can
6034
convert an invalid comparison into a valid one.  For example, the Alpha
6035
does not have a @code{GT} comparison, but you can use an @code{LT}
6036
comparison instead and swap the order of the operands.
6037
 
6038
On such machines, define this macro to be a C statement to do any
6039
required conversions.  @var{code} is the initial comparison code
6040
and @var{op0} and @var{op1} are the left and right operands of the
6041
comparison, respectively.  You should modify @var{code}, @var{op0}, and
6042
@var{op1} as required.
6043
 
6044
GCC will not assume that the comparison resulting from this macro is
6045
valid but will see if the resulting insn matches a pattern in the
6046
@file{md} file.
6047
 
6048
You need not define this macro if it would never change the comparison
6049
code or operands.
6050
@end defmac
6051
 
6052
@defmac REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})
6053
A C expression whose value is one if it is always safe to reverse a
6054
comparison whose mode is @var{mode}.  If @code{SELECT_CC_MODE}
6055
can ever return @var{mode} for a floating-point inequality comparison,
6056
then @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} must be zero.
6057
 
6058
You need not define this macro if it would always returns zero or if the
6059
floating-point format is anything other than @code{IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT}.
6060
For example, here is the definition used on the SPARC, where floating-point
6061
inequality comparisons are always given @code{CCFPEmode}:
6062
 
6063
@smallexample
6064
#define REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE(MODE)  ((MODE) != CCFPEmode)
6065
@end smallexample
6066
@end defmac
6067
 
6068
@defmac REVERSE_CONDITION (@var{code}, @var{mode})
6069
A C expression whose value is reversed condition code of the @var{code} for
6070
comparison done in CC_MODE @var{mode}.  The macro is used only in case
6071
@code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} is nonzero.  Define this macro in case
6072
machine has some non-standard way how to reverse certain conditionals.  For
6073
instance in case all floating point conditions are non-trapping, compiler may
6074
freely convert unordered compares to ordered one.  Then definition may look
6075
like:
6076
 
6077
@smallexample
6078
#define REVERSE_CONDITION(CODE, MODE) \
6079
   ((MODE) != CCFPmode ? reverse_condition (CODE) \
6080
    : reverse_condition_maybe_unordered (CODE))
6081
@end smallexample
6082
@end defmac
6083
 
6084
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_FIXED_CONDITION_CODE_REGS (unsigned int *@var{p1}, unsigned int *@var{p2})
6085
On targets which do not use @code{(cc0)}, and which use a hard
6086
register rather than a pseudo-register to hold condition codes, the
6087
regular CSE passes are often not able to identify cases in which the
6088
hard register is set to a common value.  Use this hook to enable a
6089
small pass which optimizes such cases.  This hook should return true
6090
to enable this pass, and it should set the integers to which its
6091
arguments point to the hard register numbers used for condition codes.
6092
When there is only one such register, as is true on most systems, the
6093
integer pointed to by @var{p2} should be set to
6094
@code{INVALID_REGNUM}.
6095
 
6096
The default version of this hook returns false.
6097
@end deftypefn
6098
 
6099
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {enum machine_mode} TARGET_CC_MODES_COMPATIBLE (enum machine_mode @var{m1}, enum machine_mode @var{m2})
6100
On targets which use multiple condition code modes in class
6101
@code{MODE_CC}, it is sometimes the case that a comparison can be
6102
validly done in more than one mode.  On such a system, define this
6103
target hook to take two mode arguments and to return a mode in which
6104
both comparisons may be validly done.  If there is no such mode,
6105
return @code{VOIDmode}.
6106
 
6107
The default version of this hook checks whether the modes are the
6108
same.  If they are, it returns that mode.  If they are different, it
6109
returns @code{VOIDmode}.
6110
@end deftypefn
6111
 
6112
@node Cond Exec Macros
6113
@subsection Macros to control conditional execution
6114
@findex conditional execution
6115
@findex predication
6116
 
6117
There is one macro that may need to be defined for targets
6118
supporting conditional execution, independent of how they
6119
represent conditional branches.
6120
 
6121
@defmac REVERSE_CONDEXEC_PREDICATES_P (@var{op1}, @var{op2})
6122
A C expression that returns true if the conditional execution predicate
6123
@var{op1}, a comparison operation, is the inverse of @var{op2} and vice
6124
versa.  Define this to return 0 if the target has conditional execution
6125
predicates that cannot be reversed safely.  There is no need to validate
6126
that the arguments of op1 and op2 are the same, this is done separately.
6127
If no expansion is specified, this macro is defined as follows:
6128
 
6129
@smallexample
6130
#define REVERSE_CONDEXEC_PREDICATES_P (x, y) \
6131
   (GET_CODE ((x)) == reversed_comparison_code ((y), NULL))
6132
@end smallexample
6133
@end defmac
6134
 
6135
@node Costs
6136
@section Describing Relative Costs of Operations
6137
@cindex costs of instructions
6138
@cindex relative costs
6139
@cindex speed of instructions
6140
 
6141
These macros let you describe the relative speed of various operations
6142
on the target machine.
6143
 
6144
@defmac REGISTER_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{from}, @var{to})
6145
A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} from a
6146
register in class @var{from} to one in class @var{to}.  The classes are
6147
expressed using the enumeration values such as @code{GENERAL_REGS}.  A
6148
value of 2 is the default; other values are interpreted relative to
6149
that.
6150
 
6151
It is not required that the cost always equal 2 when @var{from} is the
6152
same as @var{to}; on some machines it is expensive to move between
6153
registers if they are not general registers.
6154
 
6155
If reload sees an insn consisting of a single @code{set} between two
6156
hard registers, and if @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their
6157
classes returns a value of 2, reload does not check to ensure that the
6158
constraints of the insn are met.  Setting a cost of other than 2 will
6159
allow reload to verify that the constraints are met.  You should do this
6160
if the @samp{mov@var{m}} pattern's constraints do not allow such copying.
6161
 
6162
These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
6163
@code{TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST} instead.
6164
@end defmac
6165
 
6166
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST (enum machine_mode @var{mode}, reg_class_t @var{from}, reg_class_t @var{to})
6167
This target hook should return the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode}
6168
from a register in class @var{from} to one in class @var{to}.  The classes
6169
are expressed using the enumeration values such as @code{GENERAL_REGS}.
6170
A value of 2 is the default; other values are interpreted relative to
6171
that.
6172
 
6173
It is not required that the cost always equal 2 when @var{from} is the
6174
same as @var{to}; on some machines it is expensive to move between
6175
registers if they are not general registers.
6176
 
6177
If reload sees an insn consisting of a single @code{set} between two
6178
hard registers, and if @code{TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their
6179
classes returns a value of 2, reload does not check to ensure that the
6180
constraints of the insn are met.  Setting a cost of other than 2 will
6181
allow reload to verify that the constraints are met.  You should do this
6182
if the @samp{mov@var{m}} pattern's constraints do not allow such copying.
6183
 
6184
The default version of this function returns 2.
6185
@end deftypefn
6186
 
6187
@defmac MEMORY_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{class}, @var{in})
6188
A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} between a
6189
register of class @var{class} and memory; @var{in} is zero if the value
6190
is to be written to memory, nonzero if it is to be read in.  This cost
6191
is relative to those in @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST}.  If moving between
6192
registers and memory is more expensive than between two registers, you
6193
should define this macro to express the relative cost.
6194
 
6195
If you do not define this macro, GCC uses a default cost of 4 plus
6196
the cost of copying via a secondary reload register, if one is
6197
needed.  If your machine requires a secondary reload register to copy
6198
between memory and a register of @var{class} but the reload mechanism is
6199
more complex than copying via an intermediate, define this macro to
6200
reflect the actual cost of the move.
6201
 
6202
GCC defines the function @code{memory_move_secondary_cost} if
6203
secondary reloads are needed.  It computes the costs due to copying via
6204
a secondary register.  If your machine copies from memory using a
6205
secondary register in the conventional way but the default base value of
6206
4 is not correct for your machine, define this macro to add some other
6207
value to the result of that function.  The arguments to that function
6208
are the same as to this macro.
6209
 
6210
These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
6211
@code{TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST} instead.
6212
@end defmac
6213
 
6214
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST (enum machine_mode @var{mode}, reg_class_t @var{rclass}, bool @var{in})
6215
This target hook should return the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode}
6216
between a register of class @var{rclass} and memory; @var{in} is @code{false}
6217
if the value is to be written to memory, @code{true} if it is to be read in.
6218
This cost is relative to those in @code{TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST}.
6219
If moving between registers and memory is more expensive than between two
6220
registers, you should add this target hook to express the relative cost.
6221
 
6222
If you do not add this target hook, GCC uses a default cost of 4 plus
6223
the cost of copying via a secondary reload register, if one is
6224
needed.  If your machine requires a secondary reload register to copy
6225
between memory and a register of @var{rclass} but the reload mechanism is
6226
more complex than copying via an intermediate, use this target hook to
6227
reflect the actual cost of the move.
6228
 
6229
GCC defines the function @code{memory_move_secondary_cost} if
6230
secondary reloads are needed.  It computes the costs due to copying via
6231
a secondary register.  If your machine copies from memory using a
6232
secondary register in the conventional way but the default base value of
6233
4 is not correct for your machine, use this target hook to add some other
6234
value to the result of that function.  The arguments to that function
6235
are the same as to this target hook.
6236
@end deftypefn
6237
 
6238
@defmac BRANCH_COST (@var{speed_p}, @var{predictable_p})
6239
A C expression for the cost of a branch instruction.  A value of 1 is
6240
the default; other values are interpreted relative to that. Parameter
6241
@var{speed_p} is true when the branch in question should be optimized
6242
for speed.  When it is false, @code{BRANCH_COST} should return a value
6243
optimal for code size rather than performance.  @var{predictable_p} is
6244
true for well-predicted branches. On many architectures the
6245
@code{BRANCH_COST} can be reduced then.
6246
@end defmac
6247
 
6248
Here are additional macros which do not specify precise relative costs,
6249
but only that certain actions are more expensive than GCC would
6250
ordinarily expect.
6251
 
6252
@defmac SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
6253
Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if accessing less
6254
than a word of memory (i.e.@: a @code{char} or a @code{short}) is no
6255
faster than accessing a word of memory, i.e., if such access
6256
require more than one instruction or if there is no difference in cost
6257
between byte and (aligned) word loads.
6258
 
6259
When this macro is not defined, the compiler will access a field by
6260
finding the smallest containing object; when it is defined, a fullword
6261
load will be used if alignment permits.  Unless bytes accesses are
6262
faster than word accesses, using word accesses is preferable since it
6263
may eliminate subsequent memory access if subsequent accesses occur to
6264
other fields in the same word of the structure, but to different bytes.
6265
@end defmac
6266
 
6267
@defmac SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (@var{mode}, @var{alignment})
6268
Define this macro to be the value 1 if memory accesses described by the
6269
@var{mode} and @var{alignment} parameters have a cost many times greater
6270
than aligned accesses, for example if they are emulated in a trap
6271
handler.
6272
 
6273
When this macro is nonzero, the compiler will act as if
6274
@code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} were nonzero when generating code for block
6275
moves.  This can cause significantly more instructions to be produced.
6276
Therefore, do not set this macro nonzero if unaligned accesses only add a
6277
cycle or two to the time for a memory access.
6278
 
6279
If the value of this macro is always zero, it need not be defined.  If
6280
this macro is defined, it should produce a nonzero value when
6281
@code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} is nonzero.
6282
@end defmac
6283
 
6284
@defmac MOVE_RATIO (@var{speed})
6285
The threshold of number of scalar memory-to-memory move insns, @emph{below}
6286
which a sequence of insns should be generated instead of a
6287
string move insn or a library call.  Increasing the value will always
6288
make code faster, but eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
6289
 
6290
Note that on machines where the corresponding move insn is a
6291
@code{define_expand} that emits a sequence of insns, this macro counts
6292
the number of such sequences.
6293
 
6294
The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
6295
optimized for speed rather than size.
6296
 
6297
If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
6298
@end defmac
6299
 
6300
@defmac MOVE_BY_PIECES_P (@var{size}, @var{alignment})
6301
A C expression used to determine whether @code{move_by_pieces} will be used to
6302
copy a chunk of memory, or whether some other block move mechanism
6303
will be used.  Defaults to 1 if @code{move_by_pieces_ninsns} returns less
6304
than @code{MOVE_RATIO}.
6305
@end defmac
6306
 
6307
@defmac MOVE_MAX_PIECES
6308
A C expression used by @code{move_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
6309
a load or store used to copy memory is.  Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX}.
6310
@end defmac
6311
 
6312
@defmac CLEAR_RATIO (@var{speed})
6313
The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
6314
of insns should be generated to clear memory instead of a string clear insn
6315
or a library call.  Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
6316
eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
6317
 
6318
The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
6319
optimized for speed rather than size.
6320
 
6321
If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
6322
@end defmac
6323
 
6324
@defmac CLEAR_BY_PIECES_P (@var{size}, @var{alignment})
6325
A C expression used to determine whether @code{clear_by_pieces} will be used
6326
to clear a chunk of memory, or whether some other block clear mechanism
6327
will be used.  Defaults to 1 if @code{move_by_pieces_ninsns} returns less
6328
than @code{CLEAR_RATIO}.
6329
@end defmac
6330
 
6331
@defmac SET_RATIO (@var{speed})
6332
The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
6333
of insns should be generated to set memory to a constant value, instead of
6334
a block set insn or a library call.
6335
Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
6336
eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
6337
 
6338
The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
6339
optimized for speed rather than size.
6340
 
6341
If you don't define this, it defaults to the value of @code{MOVE_RATIO}.
6342
@end defmac
6343
 
6344
@defmac SET_BY_PIECES_P (@var{size}, @var{alignment})
6345
A C expression used to determine whether @code{store_by_pieces} will be
6346
used to set a chunk of memory to a constant value, or whether some
6347
other mechanism will be used.  Used by @code{__builtin_memset} when
6348
storing values other than constant zero.
6349
Defaults to 1 if @code{move_by_pieces_ninsns} returns less
6350
than @code{SET_RATIO}.
6351
@end defmac
6352
 
6353
@defmac STORE_BY_PIECES_P (@var{size}, @var{alignment})
6354
A C expression used to determine whether @code{store_by_pieces} will be
6355
used to set a chunk of memory to a constant string value, or whether some
6356
other mechanism will be used.  Used by @code{__builtin_strcpy} when
6357
called with a constant source string.
6358
Defaults to 1 if @code{move_by_pieces_ninsns} returns less
6359
than @code{MOVE_RATIO}.
6360
@end defmac
6361
 
6362
@defmac USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
6363
A C expression used to determine whether a load postincrement is a good
6364
thing to use for a given mode.  Defaults to the value of
6365
@code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
6366
@end defmac
6367
 
6368
@defmac USE_LOAD_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
6369
A C expression used to determine whether a load postdecrement is a good
6370
thing to use for a given mode.  Defaults to the value of
6371
@code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
6372
@end defmac
6373
 
6374
@defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
6375
A C expression used to determine whether a load preincrement is a good
6376
thing to use for a given mode.  Defaults to the value of
6377
@code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
6378
@end defmac
6379
 
6380
@defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
6381
A C expression used to determine whether a load predecrement is a good
6382
thing to use for a given mode.  Defaults to the value of
6383
@code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
6384
@end defmac
6385
 
6386
@defmac USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
6387
A C expression used to determine whether a store postincrement is a good
6388
thing to use for a given mode.  Defaults to the value of
6389
@code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
6390
@end defmac
6391
 
6392
@defmac USE_STORE_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
6393
A C expression used to determine whether a store postdecrement is a good
6394
thing to use for a given mode.  Defaults to the value of
6395
@code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
6396
@end defmac
6397
 
6398
@defmac USE_STORE_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
6399
This macro is used to determine whether a store preincrement is a good
6400
thing to use for a given mode.  Defaults to the value of
6401
@code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
6402
@end defmac
6403
 
6404
@defmac USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
6405
This macro is used to determine whether a store predecrement is a good
6406
thing to use for a given mode.  Defaults to the value of
6407
@code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
6408
@end defmac
6409
 
6410
@defmac NO_FUNCTION_CSE
6411
Define this macro if it is as good or better to call a constant
6412
function address than to call an address kept in a register.
6413
@end defmac
6414
 
6415
@defmac RANGE_TEST_NON_SHORT_CIRCUIT
6416
Define this macro if a non-short-circuit operation produced by
6417
@samp{fold_range_test ()} is optimal.  This macro defaults to true if
6418
@code{BRANCH_COST} is greater than or equal to the value 2.
6419
@end defmac
6420
 
6421
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_RTX_COSTS (rtx @var{x}, int @var{code}, int @var{outer_code}, int @var{opno}, int *@var{total}, bool @var{speed})
6422
This target hook describes the relative costs of RTL expressions.
6423
 
6424
The cost may depend on the precise form of the expression, which is
6425
available for examination in @var{x}, and the fact that @var{x} appears
6426
as operand @var{opno} of an expression with rtx code @var{outer_code}.
6427
That is, the hook can assume that there is some rtx @var{y} such
6428
that @samp{GET_CODE (@var{y}) == @var{outer_code}} and such that
6429
either (a) @samp{XEXP (@var{y}, @var{opno}) == @var{x}} or
6430
(b) @samp{XVEC (@var{y}, @var{opno})} contains @var{x}.
6431
 
6432
@var{code} is @var{x}'s expression code---redundant, since it can be
6433
obtained with @code{GET_CODE (@var{x})}.
6434
 
6435
In implementing this hook, you can use the construct
6436
@code{COSTS_N_INSNS (@var{n})} to specify a cost equal to @var{n} fast
6437
instructions.
6438
 
6439
On entry to the hook, @code{*@var{total}} contains a default estimate
6440
for the cost of the expression.  The hook should modify this value as
6441
necessary.  Traditionally, the default costs are @code{COSTS_N_INSNS (5)}
6442
for multiplications, @code{COSTS_N_INSNS (7)} for division and modulus
6443
operations, and @code{COSTS_N_INSNS (1)} for all other operations.
6444
 
6445
When optimizing for code size, i.e.@: when @code{speed} is
6446
false, this target hook should be used to estimate the relative
6447
size cost of an expression, again relative to @code{COSTS_N_INSNS}.
6448
 
6449
The hook returns true when all subexpressions of @var{x} have been
6450
processed, and false when @code{rtx_cost} should recurse.
6451
@end deftypefn
6452
 
6453
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_ADDRESS_COST (rtx @var{address}, bool @var{speed})
6454
This hook computes the cost of an addressing mode that contains
6455
@var{address}.  If not defined, the cost is computed from
6456
the @var{address} expression and the @code{TARGET_RTX_COST} hook.
6457
 
6458
For most CISC machines, the default cost is a good approximation of the
6459
true cost of the addressing mode.  However, on RISC machines, all
6460
instructions normally have the same length and execution time.  Hence
6461
all addresses will have equal costs.
6462
 
6463
In cases where more than one form of an address is known, the form with
6464
the lowest cost will be used.  If multiple forms have the same, lowest,
6465
cost, the one that is the most complex will be used.
6466
 
6467
For example, suppose an address that is equal to the sum of a register
6468
and a constant is used twice in the same basic block.  When this macro
6469
is not defined, the address will be computed in a register and memory
6470
references will be indirect through that register.  On machines where
6471
the cost of the addressing mode containing the sum is no higher than
6472
that of a simple indirect reference, this will produce an additional
6473
instruction and possibly require an additional register.  Proper
6474
specification of this macro eliminates this overhead for such machines.
6475
 
6476
This hook is never called with an invalid address.
6477
 
6478
On machines where an address involving more than one register is as
6479
cheap as an address computation involving only one register, defining
6480
@code{TARGET_ADDRESS_COST} to reflect this can cause two registers to
6481
be live over a region of code where only one would have been if
6482
@code{TARGET_ADDRESS_COST} were not defined in that manner.  This effect
6483
should be considered in the definition of this macro.  Equivalent costs
6484
should probably only be given to addresses with different numbers of
6485
registers on machines with lots of registers.
6486
@end deftypefn
6487
 
6488
@node Scheduling
6489
@section Adjusting the Instruction Scheduler
6490
 
6491
The instruction scheduler may need a fair amount of machine-specific
6492
adjustment in order to produce good code.  GCC provides several target
6493
hooks for this purpose.  It is usually enough to define just a few of
6494
them: try the first ones in this list first.
6495
 
6496
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_SCHED_ISSUE_RATE (void)
6497
This hook returns the maximum number of instructions that can ever
6498
issue at the same time on the target machine.  The default is one.
6499
Although the insn scheduler can define itself the possibility of issue
6500
an insn on the same cycle, the value can serve as an additional
6501
constraint to issue insns on the same simulated processor cycle (see
6502
hooks @samp{TARGET_SCHED_REORDER} and @samp{TARGET_SCHED_REORDER2}).
6503
This value must be constant over the entire compilation.  If you need
6504
it to vary depending on what the instructions are, you must use
6505
@samp{TARGET_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE}.
6506
@end deftypefn
6507
 
6508
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE (FILE *@var{file}, int @var{verbose}, rtx @var{insn}, int @var{more})
6509
This hook is executed by the scheduler after it has scheduled an insn
6510
from the ready list.  It should return the number of insns which can
6511
still be issued in the current cycle.  The default is
6512
@samp{@w{@var{more} - 1}} for insns other than @code{CLOBBER} and
6513
@code{USE}, which normally are not counted against the issue rate.
6514
You should define this hook if some insns take more machine resources
6515
than others, so that fewer insns can follow them in the same cycle.
6516
@var{file} is either a null pointer, or a stdio stream to write any
6517
debug output to.  @var{verbose} is the verbose level provided by
6518
@option{-fsched-verbose-@var{n}}.  @var{insn} is the instruction that
6519
was scheduled.
6520
@end deftypefn
6521
 
6522
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST (rtx @var{insn}, rtx @var{link}, rtx @var{dep_insn}, int @var{cost})
6523
This function corrects the value of @var{cost} based on the
6524
relationship between @var{insn} and @var{dep_insn} through the
6525
dependence @var{link}.  It should return the new value.  The default
6526
is to make no adjustment to @var{cost}.  This can be used for example
6527
to specify to the scheduler using the traditional pipeline description
6528
that an output- or anti-dependence does not incur the same cost as a
6529
data-dependence.  If the scheduler using the automaton based pipeline
6530
description, the cost of anti-dependence is zero and the cost of
6531
output-dependence is maximum of one and the difference of latency
6532
times of the first and the second insns.  If these values are not
6533
acceptable, you could use the hook to modify them too.  See also
6534
@pxref{Processor pipeline description}.
6535
@end deftypefn
6536
 
6537
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_PRIORITY (rtx @var{insn}, int @var{priority})
6538
This hook adjusts the integer scheduling priority @var{priority} of
6539
@var{insn}.  It should return the new priority.  Increase the priority to
6540
execute @var{insn} earlier, reduce the priority to execute @var{insn}
6541
later.  Do not define this hook if you do not need to adjust the
6542
scheduling priorities of insns.
6543
@end deftypefn
6544
 
6545
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_SCHED_REORDER (FILE *@var{file}, int @var{verbose}, rtx *@var{ready}, int *@var{n_readyp}, int @var{clock})
6546
This hook is executed by the scheduler after it has scheduled the ready
6547
list, to allow the machine description to reorder it (for example to
6548
combine two small instructions together on @samp{VLIW} machines).
6549
@var{file} is either a null pointer, or a stdio stream to write any
6550
debug output to.  @var{verbose} is the verbose level provided by
6551
@option{-fsched-verbose-@var{n}}.  @var{ready} is a pointer to the ready
6552
list of instructions that are ready to be scheduled.  @var{n_readyp} is
6553
a pointer to the number of elements in the ready list.  The scheduler
6554
reads the ready list in reverse order, starting with
6555
@var{ready}[@var{*n_readyp} @minus{} 1] and going to @var{ready}[0].  @var{clock}
6556
is the timer tick of the scheduler.  You may modify the ready list and
6557
the number of ready insns.  The return value is the number of insns that
6558
can issue this cycle; normally this is just @code{issue_rate}.  See also
6559
@samp{TARGET_SCHED_REORDER2}.
6560
@end deftypefn
6561
 
6562
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_SCHED_REORDER2 (FILE *@var{file}, int @var{verbose}, rtx *@var{ready}, int *@var{n_readyp}, int @var{clock})
6563
Like @samp{TARGET_SCHED_REORDER}, but called at a different time.  That
6564
function is called whenever the scheduler starts a new cycle.  This one
6565
is called once per iteration over a cycle, immediately after
6566
@samp{TARGET_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE}; it can reorder the ready list and
6567
return the number of insns to be scheduled in the same cycle.  Defining
6568
this hook can be useful if there are frequent situations where
6569
scheduling one insn causes other insns to become ready in the same
6570
cycle.  These other insns can then be taken into account properly.
6571
@end deftypefn
6572
 
6573
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_SCHED_DEPENDENCIES_EVALUATION_HOOK (rtx @var{head}, rtx @var{tail})
6574
This hook is called after evaluation forward dependencies of insns in
6575
chain given by two parameter values (@var{head} and @var{tail}
6576
correspondingly) but before insns scheduling of the insn chain.  For
6577
example, it can be used for better insn classification if it requires
6578
analysis of dependencies.  This hook can use backward and forward
6579
dependencies of the insn scheduler because they are already
6580
calculated.
6581
@end deftypefn
6582
 
6583
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_SCHED_INIT (FILE *@var{file}, int @var{verbose}, int @var{max_ready})
6584
This hook is executed by the scheduler at the beginning of each block of
6585
instructions that are to be scheduled.  @var{file} is either a null
6586
pointer, or a stdio stream to write any debug output to.  @var{verbose}
6587
is the verbose level provided by @option{-fsched-verbose-@var{n}}.
6588
@var{max_ready} is the maximum number of insns in the current scheduling
6589
region that can be live at the same time.  This can be used to allocate
6590
scratch space if it is needed, e.g.@: by @samp{TARGET_SCHED_REORDER}.
6591
@end deftypefn
6592
 
6593
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_SCHED_FINISH (FILE *@var{file}, int @var{verbose})
6594
This hook is executed by the scheduler at the end of each block of
6595
instructions that are to be scheduled.  It can be used to perform
6596
cleanup of any actions done by the other scheduling hooks.  @var{file}
6597
is either a null pointer, or a stdio stream to write any debug output
6598
to.  @var{verbose} is the verbose level provided by
6599
@option{-fsched-verbose-@var{n}}.
6600
@end deftypefn
6601
 
6602
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_SCHED_INIT_GLOBAL (FILE *@var{file}, int @var{verbose}, int @var{old_max_uid})
6603
This hook is executed by the scheduler after function level initializations.
6604
@var{file} is either a null pointer, or a stdio stream to write any debug output to.
6605
@var{verbose} is the verbose level provided by @option{-fsched-verbose-@var{n}}.
6606
@var{old_max_uid} is the maximum insn uid when scheduling begins.
6607
@end deftypefn
6608
 
6609
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_SCHED_FINISH_GLOBAL (FILE *@var{file}, int @var{verbose})
6610
This is the cleanup hook corresponding to @code{TARGET_SCHED_INIT_GLOBAL}.
6611
@var{file} is either a null pointer, or a stdio stream to write any debug output to.
6612
@var{verbose} is the verbose level provided by @option{-fsched-verbose-@var{n}}.
6613
@end deftypefn
6614
 
6615
@deftypefn {Target Hook} rtx TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN (void)
6616
The hook returns an RTL insn.  The automaton state used in the
6617
pipeline hazard recognizer is changed as if the insn were scheduled
6618
when the new simulated processor cycle starts.  Usage of the hook may
6619
simplify the automaton pipeline description for some @acronym{VLIW}
6620
processors.  If the hook is defined, it is used only for the automaton
6621
based pipeline description.  The default is not to change the state
6622
when the new simulated processor cycle starts.
6623
@end deftypefn
6624
 
6625
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN (void)
6626
The hook can be used to initialize data used by the previous hook.
6627
@end deftypefn
6628
 
6629
@deftypefn {Target Hook} rtx TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN (void)
6630
The hook is analogous to @samp{TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN} but used
6631
to changed the state as if the insn were scheduled when the new
6632
simulated processor cycle finishes.
6633
@end deftypefn
6634
 
6635
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN (void)
6636
The hook is analogous to @samp{TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN} but
6637
used to initialize data used by the previous hook.
6638
@end deftypefn
6639
 
6640
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_ADVANCE_CYCLE (void)
6641
The hook to notify target that the current simulated cycle is about to finish.
6642
The hook is analogous to @samp{TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN} but used
6643
to change the state in more complicated situations - e.g., when advancing
6644
state on a single insn is not enough.
6645
@end deftypefn
6646
 
6647
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_ADVANCE_CYCLE (void)
6648
The hook to notify target that new simulated cycle has just started.
6649
The hook is analogous to @samp{TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN} but used
6650
to change the state in more complicated situations - e.g., when advancing
6651
state on a single insn is not enough.
6652
@end deftypefn
6653
 
6654
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD (void)
6655
This hook controls better choosing an insn from the ready insn queue
6656
for the @acronym{DFA}-based insn scheduler.  Usually the scheduler
6657
chooses the first insn from the queue.  If the hook returns a positive
6658
value, an additional scheduler code tries all permutations of
6659
@samp{TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD ()}
6660
subsequent ready insns to choose an insn whose issue will result in
6661
maximal number of issued insns on the same cycle.  For the
6662
@acronym{VLIW} processor, the code could actually solve the problem of
6663
packing simple insns into the @acronym{VLIW} insn.  Of course, if the
6664
rules of @acronym{VLIW} packing are described in the automaton.
6665
 
6666
This code also could be used for superscalar @acronym{RISC}
6667
processors.  Let us consider a superscalar @acronym{RISC} processor
6668
with 3 pipelines.  Some insns can be executed in pipelines @var{A} or
6669
@var{B}, some insns can be executed only in pipelines @var{B} or
6670
@var{C}, and one insn can be executed in pipeline @var{B}.  The
6671
processor may issue the 1st insn into @var{A} and the 2nd one into
6672
@var{B}.  In this case, the 3rd insn will wait for freeing @var{B}
6673
until the next cycle.  If the scheduler issues the 3rd insn the first,
6674
the processor could issue all 3 insns per cycle.
6675
 
6676
Actually this code demonstrates advantages of the automaton based
6677
pipeline hazard recognizer.  We try quickly and easy many insn
6678
schedules to choose the best one.
6679
 
6680
The default is no multipass scheduling.
6681
@end deftypefn
6682
 
6683
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD_GUARD (rtx @var{insn})
6684
 
6685
This hook controls what insns from the ready insn queue will be
6686
considered for the multipass insn scheduling.  If the hook returns
6687
zero for @var{insn}, the insn will be not chosen to
6688
be issued.
6689
 
6690
The default is that any ready insns can be chosen to be issued.
6691
@end deftypefn
6692
 
6693
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BEGIN (void *@var{data}, char *@var{ready_try}, int @var{n_ready}, bool @var{first_cycle_insn_p})
6694
This hook prepares the target backend for a new round of multipass
6695
scheduling.
6696
@end deftypefn
6697
 
6698
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_ISSUE (void *@var{data}, char *@var{ready_try}, int @var{n_ready}, rtx @var{insn}, const void *@var{prev_data})
6699
This hook is called when multipass scheduling evaluates instruction INSN.
6700
@end deftypefn
6701
 
6702
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BACKTRACK (const void *@var{data}, char *@var{ready_try}, int @var{n_ready})
6703
This is called when multipass scheduling backtracks from evaluation of
6704
an instruction.
6705
@end deftypefn
6706
 
6707
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_END (const void *@var{data})
6708
This hook notifies the target about the result of the concluded current
6709
round of multipass scheduling.
6710
@end deftypefn
6711
 
6712
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_INIT (void *@var{data})
6713
This hook initializes target-specific data used in multipass scheduling.
6714
@end deftypefn
6715
 
6716
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_FINI (void *@var{data})
6717
This hook finalizes target-specific data used in multipass scheduling.
6718
@end deftypefn
6719
 
6720
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_SCHED_DFA_NEW_CYCLE (FILE *@var{dump}, int @var{verbose}, rtx @var{insn}, int @var{last_clock}, int @var{clock}, int *@var{sort_p})
6721
This hook is called by the insn scheduler before issuing @var{insn}
6722
on cycle @var{clock}.  If the hook returns nonzero,
6723
@var{insn} is not issued on this processor cycle.  Instead,
6724
the processor cycle is advanced.  If *@var{sort_p}
6725
is zero, the insn ready queue is not sorted on the new cycle
6726
start as usually.  @var{dump} and @var{verbose} specify the file and
6727
verbosity level to use for debugging output.
6728
@var{last_clock} and @var{clock} are, respectively, the
6729
processor cycle on which the previous insn has been issued,
6730
and the current processor cycle.
6731
@end deftypefn
6732
 
6733
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_SCHED_IS_COSTLY_DEPENDENCE (struct _dep *@var{_dep}, int @var{cost}, int @var{distance})
6734
This hook is used to define which dependences are considered costly by
6735
the target, so costly that it is not advisable to schedule the insns that
6736
are involved in the dependence too close to one another.  The parameters
6737
to this hook are as follows:  The first parameter @var{_dep} is the dependence
6738
being evaluated.  The second parameter @var{cost} is the cost of the
6739
dependence as estimated by the scheduler, and the third
6740
parameter @var{distance} is the distance in cycles between the two insns.
6741
The hook returns @code{true} if considering the distance between the two
6742
insns the dependence between them is considered costly by the target,
6743
and @code{false} otherwise.
6744
 
6745
Defining this hook can be useful in multiple-issue out-of-order machines,
6746
where (a) it's practically hopeless to predict the actual data/resource
6747
delays, however: (b) there's a better chance to predict the actual grouping
6748
that will be formed, and (c) correctly emulating the grouping can be very
6749
important.  In such targets one may want to allow issuing dependent insns
6750
closer to one another---i.e., closer than the dependence distance;  however,
6751
not in cases of ``costly dependences'', which this hooks allows to define.
6752
@end deftypefn
6753
 
6754
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_SCHED_H_I_D_EXTENDED (void)
6755
This hook is called by the insn scheduler after emitting a new instruction to
6756
the instruction stream.  The hook notifies a target backend to extend its
6757
per instruction data structures.
6758
@end deftypefn
6759
 
6760
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {void *} TARGET_SCHED_ALLOC_SCHED_CONTEXT (void)
6761
Return a pointer to a store large enough to hold target scheduling context.
6762
@end deftypefn
6763
 
6764
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_SCHED_INIT_SCHED_CONTEXT (void *@var{tc}, bool @var{clean_p})
6765
Initialize store pointed to by @var{tc} to hold target scheduling context.
6766
It @var{clean_p} is true then initialize @var{tc} as if scheduler is at the
6767
beginning of the block.  Otherwise, copy the current context into @var{tc}.
6768
@end deftypefn
6769
 
6770
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_CONTEXT (void *@var{tc})
6771
Copy target scheduling context pointed to by @var{tc} to the current context.
6772
@end deftypefn
6773
 
6774
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_SCHED_CLEAR_SCHED_CONTEXT (void *@var{tc})
6775
Deallocate internal data in target scheduling context pointed to by @var{tc}.
6776
@end deftypefn
6777
 
6778
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_SCHED_FREE_SCHED_CONTEXT (void *@var{tc})
6779
Deallocate a store for target scheduling context pointed to by @var{tc}.
6780
@end deftypefn
6781
 
6782
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_SCHED_SPECULATE_INSN (rtx @var{insn}, int @var{request}, rtx *@var{new_pat})
6783
This hook is called by the insn scheduler when @var{insn} has only
6784
speculative dependencies and therefore can be scheduled speculatively.
6785
The hook is used to check if the pattern of @var{insn} has a speculative
6786
version and, in case of successful check, to generate that speculative
6787
pattern.  The hook should return 1, if the instruction has a speculative form,
6788
or @minus{}1, if it doesn't.  @var{request} describes the type of requested
6789
speculation.  If the return value equals 1 then @var{new_pat} is assigned
6790
the generated speculative pattern.
6791
@end deftypefn
6792
 
6793
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_SCHED_NEEDS_BLOCK_P (int @var{dep_status})
6794
This hook is called by the insn scheduler during generation of recovery code
6795
for @var{insn}.  It should return @code{true}, if the corresponding check
6796
instruction should branch to recovery code, or @code{false} otherwise.
6797
@end deftypefn
6798
 
6799
@deftypefn {Target Hook} rtx TARGET_SCHED_GEN_SPEC_CHECK (rtx @var{insn}, rtx @var{label}, int @var{mutate_p})
6800
This hook is called by the insn scheduler to generate a pattern for recovery
6801
check instruction.  If @var{mutate_p} is zero, then @var{insn} is a
6802
speculative instruction for which the check should be generated.
6803
@var{label} is either a label of a basic block, where recovery code should
6804
be emitted, or a null pointer, when requested check doesn't branch to
6805
recovery code (a simple check).  If @var{mutate_p} is nonzero, then
6806
a pattern for a branchy check corresponding to a simple check denoted by
6807
@var{insn} should be generated.  In this case @var{label} can't be null.
6808
@end deftypefn
6809
 
6810
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD_GUARD_SPEC (const_rtx @var{insn})
6811
This hook is used as a workaround for
6812
@samp{TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD_GUARD} not being
6813
called on the first instruction of the ready list.  The hook is used to
6814
discard speculative instructions that stand first in the ready list from
6815
being scheduled on the current cycle.  If the hook returns @code{false},
6816
@var{insn} will not be chosen to be issued.
6817
For non-speculative instructions,
6818
the hook should always return @code{true}.  For example, in the ia64 backend
6819
the hook is used to cancel data speculative insns when the ALAT table
6820
is nearly full.
6821
@end deftypefn
6822
 
6823
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_FLAGS (struct spec_info_def *@var{spec_info})
6824
This hook is used by the insn scheduler to find out what features should be
6825
enabled/used.
6826
The structure *@var{spec_info} should be filled in by the target.
6827
The structure describes speculation types that can be used in the scheduler.
6828
@end deftypefn
6829
 
6830
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_SCHED_SMS_RES_MII (struct ddg *@var{g})
6831
This hook is called by the swing modulo scheduler to calculate a
6832
resource-based lower bound which is based on the resources available in
6833
the machine and the resources required by each instruction.  The target
6834
backend can use @var{g} to calculate such bound.  A very simple lower
6835
bound will be used in case this hook is not implemented: the total number
6836
of instructions divided by the issue rate.
6837
@end deftypefn
6838
 
6839
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH (rtx @var{insn}, int @var{x})
6840
This hook is called by Haifa Scheduler.  It returns true if dispatch scheduling
6841
is supported in hardware and the condition specified in the parameter is true.
6842
@end deftypefn
6843
 
6844
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH_DO (rtx @var{insn}, int @var{x})
6845
This hook is called by Haifa Scheduler.  It performs the operation specified
6846
in its second parameter.
6847
@end deftypefn
6848
 
6849
@deftypevr {Target Hook} bool TARGET_SCHED_EXPOSED_PIPELINE
6850
True if the processor has an exposed pipeline, which means that not just
6851
the order of instructions is important for correctness when scheduling, but
6852
also the latencies of operations.
6853
@end deftypevr
6854
 
6855
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_SCHED_REASSOCIATION_WIDTH (unsigned int @var{opc}, enum machine_mode @var{mode})
6856
This hook is called by tree reassociator to determine a level of
6857
parallelism required in output calculations chain.
6858
@end deftypefn
6859
 
6860
@node Sections
6861
@section Dividing the Output into Sections (Texts, Data, @dots{})
6862
@c the above section title is WAY too long.  maybe cut the part between
6863
@c the (...)?  --mew 10feb93
6864
 
6865
An object file is divided into sections containing different types of
6866
data.  In the most common case, there are three sections: the @dfn{text
6867
section}, which holds instructions and read-only data; the @dfn{data
6868
section}, which holds initialized writable data; and the @dfn{bss
6869
section}, which holds uninitialized data.  Some systems have other kinds
6870
of sections.
6871
 
6872
@file{varasm.c} provides several well-known sections, such as
6873
@code{text_section}, @code{data_section} and @code{bss_section}.
6874
The normal way of controlling a @code{@var{foo}_section} variable
6875
is to define the associated @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macro,
6876
as described below.  The macros are only read once, when @file{varasm.c}
6877
initializes itself, so their values must be run-time constants.
6878
They may however depend on command-line flags.
6879
 
6880
@emph{Note:} Some run-time files, such @file{crtstuff.c}, also make
6881
use of the @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macros, and expect them
6882
to be string literals.
6883
 
6884
Some assemblers require a different string to be written every time a
6885
section is selected.  If your assembler falls into this category, you
6886
should define the @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS} hook and use
6887
@code{get_unnamed_section} to set up the sections.
6888
 
6889
You must always create a @code{text_section}, either by defining
6890
@code{TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or by initializing @code{text_section}
6891
in @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS}.  The same is true of
6892
@code{data_section} and @code{DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP}.  If you do not
6893
create a distinct @code{readonly_data_section}, the default is to
6894
reuse @code{text_section}.
6895
 
6896
All the other @file{varasm.c} sections are optional, and are null
6897
if the target does not provide them.
6898
 
6899
@defmac TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
6900
A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
6901
assembler operation that should precede instructions and read-only data.
6902
Normally @code{"\t.text"} is right.
6903
@end defmac
6904
 
6905
@defmac HOT_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
6906
If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing most
6907
frequently executed functions of the program.  If not defined, GCC will provide
6908
a default definition if the target supports named sections.
6909
@end defmac
6910
 
6911
@defmac UNLIKELY_EXECUTED_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
6912
If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing unlikely
6913
executed functions in the program.
6914
@end defmac
6915
 
6916
@defmac DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
6917
A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
6918
assembler operation to identify the following data as writable initialized
6919
data.  Normally @code{"\t.data"} is right.
6920
@end defmac
6921
 
6922
@defmac SDATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
6923
If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
6924
containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
6925
initialized, writable small data.
6926
@end defmac
6927
 
6928
@defmac READONLY_DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
6929
A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
6930
assembler operation to identify the following data as read-only initialized
6931
data.
6932
@end defmac
6933
 
6934
@defmac BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
6935
If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
6936
containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
6937
uninitialized global data.  If not defined, and
6938
@code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} not defined,
6939
uninitialized global data will be output in the data section if
6940
@option{-fno-common} is passed, otherwise @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} will be
6941
used.
6942
@end defmac
6943
 
6944
@defmac SBSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
6945
If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
6946
containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
6947
uninitialized, writable small data.
6948
@end defmac
6949
 
6950
@defmac TLS_COMMON_ASM_OP
6951
If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
6952
assembler operation to identify the following data as thread-local
6953
common data.  The default is @code{".tls_common"}.
6954
@end defmac
6955
 
6956
@defmac TLS_SECTION_ASM_FLAG
6957
If defined, a C expression whose value is a character constant
6958
containing the flag used to mark a section as a TLS section.  The
6959
default is @code{'T'}.
6960
@end defmac
6961
 
6962
@defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
6963
If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
6964
containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
6965
initialization code.  If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
6966
not exist.  This section has no corresponding @code{init_section}
6967
variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
6968
@end defmac
6969
 
6970
@defmac FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP
6971
If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
6972
containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
6973
finalization code.  If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
6974
not exist.  This section has no corresponding @code{fini_section}
6975
variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
6976
@end defmac
6977
 
6978
@defmac INIT_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
6979
If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
6980
containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
6981
part of the @code{.init_array} (or equivalent) section.  If not
6982
defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist.  Do not define
6983
both this macro and @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
6984
@end defmac
6985
 
6986
@defmac FINI_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
6987
If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
6988
containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
6989
part of the @code{.fini_array} (or equivalent) section.  If not
6990
defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist.  Do not define
6991
both this macro and @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
6992
@end defmac
6993
 
6994
@defmac CRT_CALL_STATIC_FUNCTION (@var{section_op}, @var{function})
6995
If defined, an ASM statement that switches to a different section
6996
via @var{section_op}, calls @var{function}, and switches back to
6997
the text section.  This is used in @file{crtstuff.c} if
6998
@code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP} to calls
6999
to initialization and finalization functions from the init and fini
7000
sections.  By default, this macro uses a simple function call.  Some
7001
ports need hand-crafted assembly code to avoid dependencies on
7002
registers initialized in the function prologue or to ensure that
7003
constant pools don't end up too far way in the text section.
7004
@end defmac
7005
 
7006
@defmac TARGET_LIBGCC_SDATA_SECTION
7007
If defined, a string which names the section into which small
7008
variables defined in crtstuff and libgcc should go.  This is useful
7009
when the target has options for optimizing access to small data, and
7010
you want the crtstuff and libgcc routines to be conservative in what
7011
they expect of your application yet liberal in what your application
7012
expects.  For example, for targets with a @code{.sdata} section (like
7013
MIPS), you could compile crtstuff with @code{-G 0} so that it doesn't
7014
require small data support from your application, but use this macro
7015
to put small data into @code{.sdata} so that your application can
7016
access these variables whether it uses small data or not.
7017
@end defmac
7018
 
7019
@defmac FORCE_CODE_SECTION_ALIGN
7020
If defined, an ASM statement that aligns a code section to some
7021
arbitrary boundary.  This is used to force all fragments of the
7022
@code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections to have to same alignment
7023
and thus prevent the linker from having to add any padding.
7024
@end defmac
7025
 
7026
@defmac JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
7027
Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if jump
7028
tables (for @code{tablejump} insns) should be output in the text
7029
section, along with the assembler instructions.  Otherwise, the
7030
readonly data section is used.
7031
 
7032
This macro is irrelevant if there is no separate readonly data section.
7033
@end defmac
7034
 
7035
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS (void)
7036
Define this hook if you need to do something special to set up the
7037
@file{varasm.c} sections, or if your target has some special sections
7038
of its own that you need to create.
7039
 
7040
GCC calls this hook after processing the command line, but before writing
7041
any assembly code, and before calling any of the section-returning hooks
7042
described below.
7043
@end deftypefn
7044
 
7045
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_ASM_RELOC_RW_MASK (void)
7046
Return a mask describing how relocations should be treated when
7047
selecting sections.  Bit 1 should be set if global relocations
7048
should be placed in a read-write section; bit 0 should be set if
7049
local relocations should be placed in a read-write section.
7050
 
7051
The default version of this function returns 3 when @option{-fpic}
7052
is in effect, and 0 otherwise.  The hook is typically redefined
7053
when the target cannot support (some kinds of) dynamic relocations
7054
in read-only sections even in executables.
7055
@end deftypefn
7056
 
7057
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {section *} TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION (tree @var{exp}, int @var{reloc}, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT @var{align})
7058
Return the section into which @var{exp} should be placed.  You can
7059
assume that @var{exp} is either a @code{VAR_DECL} node or a constant of
7060
some sort.  @var{reloc} indicates whether the initial value of @var{exp}
7061
requires link-time relocations.  Bit 0 is set when variable contains
7062
local relocations only, while bit 1 is set for global relocations.
7063
@var{align} is the constant alignment in bits.
7064
 
7065
The default version of this function takes care of putting read-only
7066
variables in @code{readonly_data_section}.
7067
 
7068
See also @var{USE_SELECT_SECTION_FOR_FUNCTIONS}.
7069
@end deftypefn
7070
 
7071
@defmac USE_SELECT_SECTION_FOR_FUNCTIONS
7072
Define this macro if you wish TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION to be called
7073
for @code{FUNCTION_DECL}s as well as for variables and constants.
7074
 
7075
In the case of a @code{FUNCTION_DECL}, @var{reloc} will be zero if the
7076
function has been determined to be likely to be called, and nonzero if
7077
it is unlikely to be called.
7078
@end defmac
7079
 
7080
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_UNIQUE_SECTION (tree @var{decl}, int @var{reloc})
7081
Build up a unique section name, expressed as a @code{STRING_CST} node,
7082
and assign it to @samp{DECL_SECTION_NAME (@var{decl})}.
7083
As with @code{TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION}, @var{reloc} indicates whether
7084
the initial value of @var{exp} requires link-time relocations.
7085
 
7086
The default version of this function appends the symbol name to the
7087
ELF section name that would normally be used for the symbol.  For
7088
example, the function @code{foo} would be placed in @code{.text.foo}.
7089
Whatever the actual target object format, this is often good enough.
7090
@end deftypefn
7091
 
7092
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {section *} TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_RODATA_SECTION (tree @var{decl})
7093
Return the readonly data section associated with
7094
@samp{DECL_SECTION_NAME (@var{decl})}.
7095
The default version of this function selects @code{.gnu.linkonce.r.name} if
7096
the function's section is @code{.gnu.linkonce.t.name}, @code{.rodata.name}
7097
if function is in @code{.text.name}, and the normal readonly-data section
7098
otherwise.
7099
@end deftypefn
7100
 
7101
@deftypevr {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_ASM_MERGEABLE_RODATA_PREFIX
7102
Usually, the compiler uses the prefix @code{".rodata"} to construct
7103
section names for mergeable constant data.  Define this macro to override
7104
the string if a different section name should be used.
7105
@end deftypevr
7106
 
7107
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {section *} TARGET_ASM_TM_CLONE_TABLE_SECTION (void)
7108
Return the section that should be used for transactional memory clone  tables.
7109
@end deftypefn
7110
 
7111
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {section *} TARGET_ASM_SELECT_RTX_SECTION (enum machine_mode @var{mode}, rtx @var{x}, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT @var{align})
7112
Return the section into which a constant @var{x}, of mode @var{mode},
7113
should be placed.  You can assume that @var{x} is some kind of
7114
constant in RTL@.  The argument @var{mode} is redundant except in the
7115
case of a @code{const_int} rtx.  @var{align} is the constant alignment
7116
in bits.
7117
 
7118
The default version of this function takes care of putting symbolic
7119
constants in @code{flag_pic} mode in @code{data_section} and everything
7120
else in @code{readonly_data_section}.
7121
@end deftypefn
7122
 
7123
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_MANGLE_DECL_ASSEMBLER_NAME (tree @var{decl}, tree @var{id})
7124
Define this hook if you need to postprocess the assembler name generated
7125
by target-independent code.  The @var{id} provided to this hook will be
7126
the computed name (e.g., the macro @code{DECL_NAME} of the @var{decl} in C,
7127
or the mangled name of the @var{decl} in C++).  The return value of the
7128
hook is an @code{IDENTIFIER_NODE} for the appropriate mangled name on
7129
your target system.  The default implementation of this hook just
7130
returns the @var{id} provided.
7131
@end deftypefn
7132
 
7133
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO (tree @var{decl}, rtx @var{rtl}, int @var{new_decl_p})
7134
Define this hook if references to a symbol or a constant must be
7135
treated differently depending on something about the variable or
7136
function named by the symbol (such as what section it is in).
7137
 
7138
The hook is executed immediately after rtl has been created for
7139
@var{decl}, which may be a variable or function declaration or
7140
an entry in the constant pool.  In either case, @var{rtl} is the
7141
rtl in question.  Do @emph{not} use @code{DECL_RTL (@var{decl})}
7142
in this hook; that field may not have been initialized yet.
7143
 
7144
In the case of a constant, it is safe to assume that the rtl is
7145
a @code{mem} whose address is a @code{symbol_ref}.  Most decls
7146
will also have this form, but that is not guaranteed.  Global
7147
register variables, for instance, will have a @code{reg} for their
7148
rtl.  (Normally the right thing to do with such unusual rtl is
7149
leave it alone.)
7150
 
7151
The @var{new_decl_p} argument will be true if this is the first time
7152
that @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} has been invoked on this decl.  It will
7153
be false for subsequent invocations, which will happen for duplicate
7154
declarations.  Whether or not anything must be done for the duplicate
7155
declaration depends on whether the hook examines @code{DECL_ATTRIBUTES}.
7156
@var{new_decl_p} is always true when the hook is called for a constant.
7157
 
7158
@cindex @code{SYMBOL_REF_FLAG}, in @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO}
7159
The usual thing for this hook to do is to record flags in the
7160
@code{symbol_ref}, using @code{SYMBOL_REF_FLAG} or @code{SYMBOL_REF_FLAGS}.
7161
Historically, the name string was modified if it was necessary to
7162
encode more than one bit of information, but this practice is now
7163
discouraged; use @code{SYMBOL_REF_FLAGS}.
7164
 
7165
The default definition of this hook, @code{default_encode_section_info}
7166
in @file{varasm.c}, sets a number of commonly-useful bits in
7167
@code{SYMBOL_REF_FLAGS}.  Check whether the default does what you need
7168
before overriding it.
7169
@end deftypefn
7170
 
7171
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_STRIP_NAME_ENCODING (const char *@var{name})
7172
Decode @var{name} and return the real name part, sans
7173
the characters that @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO}
7174
may have added.
7175
@end deftypefn
7176
 
7177
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_IN_SMALL_DATA_P (const_tree @var{exp})
7178
Returns true if @var{exp} should be placed into a ``small data'' section.
7179
The default version of this hook always returns false.
7180
@end deftypefn
7181
 
7182
@deftypevr {Target Hook} bool TARGET_HAVE_SRODATA_SECTION
7183
Contains the value true if the target places read-only
7184
``small data'' into a separate section.  The default value is false.
7185
@end deftypevr
7186
 
7187
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE (void)
7188
It returns true if target wants profile code emitted before prologue.
7189
 
7190
The default version of this hook use the target macro
7191
@code{PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE}.
7192
@end deftypefn
7193
 
7194
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_BINDS_LOCAL_P (const_tree @var{exp})
7195
Returns true if @var{exp} names an object for which name resolution
7196
rules must resolve to the current ``module'' (dynamic shared library
7197
or executable image).
7198
 
7199
The default version of this hook implements the name resolution rules
7200
for ELF, which has a looser model of global name binding than other
7201
currently supported object file formats.
7202
@end deftypefn
7203
 
7204
@deftypevr {Target Hook} bool TARGET_HAVE_TLS
7205
Contains the value true if the target supports thread-local storage.
7206
The default value is false.
7207
@end deftypevr
7208
 
7209
 
7210
@node PIC
7211
@section Position Independent Code
7212
@cindex position independent code
7213
@cindex PIC
7214
 
7215
This section describes macros that help implement generation of position
7216
independent code.  Simply defining these macros is not enough to
7217
generate valid PIC; you must also add support to the hook
7218
@code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} and to the macro
7219
@code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}, as well as @code{LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS}.  You
7220
must modify the definition of @samp{movsi} to do something appropriate
7221
when the source operand contains a symbolic address.  You may also
7222
need to alter the handling of switch statements so that they use
7223
relative addresses.
7224
@c i rearranged the order of the macros above to try to force one of
7225
@c them to the next line, to eliminate an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
7226
 
7227
@defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
7228
The register number of the register used to address a table of static
7229
data addresses in memory.  In some cases this register is defined by a
7230
processor's ``application binary interface'' (ABI)@.  When this macro
7231
is defined, RTL is generated for this register once, as with the stack
7232
pointer and frame pointer registers.  If this macro is not defined, it
7233
is up to the machine-dependent files to allocate such a register (if
7234
necessary).  Note that this register must be fixed when in use (e.g.@:
7235
when @code{flag_pic} is true).
7236
@end defmac
7237
 
7238
@defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
7239
A C expression that is nonzero if the register defined by
7240
@code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is clobbered by calls.  If not defined,
7241
the default is zero.  Do not define
7242
this macro if @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is not defined.
7243
@end defmac
7244
 
7245
@defmac LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (@var{x})
7246
A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate immediate
7247
operand on the target machine when generating position independent code.
7248
You can assume that @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not
7249
check this.  You can also assume @var{flag_pic} is true, so you need not
7250
check it either.  You need not define this macro if all constants
7251
(including @code{SYMBOL_REF}) can be immediate operands when generating
7252
position independent code.
7253
@end defmac
7254
 
7255
@node Assembler Format
7256
@section Defining the Output Assembler Language
7257
 
7258
This section describes macros whose principal purpose is to describe how
7259
to write instructions in assembler language---rather than what the
7260
instructions do.
7261
 
7262
@menu
7263
* File Framework::       Structural information for the assembler file.
7264
* Data Output::          Output of constants (numbers, strings, addresses).
7265
* Uninitialized Data::   Output of uninitialized variables.
7266
* Label Output::         Output and generation of labels.
7267
* Initialization::       General principles of initialization
7268
                         and termination routines.
7269
* Macros for Initialization::
7270
                         Specific macros that control the handling of
7271
                         initialization and termination routines.
7272
* Instruction Output::   Output of actual instructions.
7273
* Dispatch Tables::      Output of jump tables.
7274
* Exception Region Output:: Output of exception region code.
7275
* Alignment Output::     Pseudo ops for alignment and skipping data.
7276
@end menu
7277
 
7278
@node File Framework
7279
@subsection The Overall Framework of an Assembler File
7280
@cindex assembler format
7281
@cindex output of assembler code
7282
 
7283
@c prevent bad page break with this line
7284
This describes the overall framework of an assembly file.
7285
 
7286
@findex default_file_start
7287
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_FILE_START (void)
7288
Output to @code{asm_out_file} any text which the assembler expects to
7289
find at the beginning of a file.  The default behavior is controlled
7290
by two flags, documented below.  Unless your target's assembler is
7291
quite unusual, if you override the default, you should call
7292
@code{default_file_start} at some point in your target hook.  This
7293
lets other target files rely on these variables.
7294
@end deftypefn
7295
 
7296
@deftypevr {Target Hook} bool TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_APP_OFF
7297
If this flag is true, the text of the macro @code{ASM_APP_OFF} will be
7298
printed as the very first line in the assembly file, unless
7299
@option{-fverbose-asm} is in effect.  (If that macro has been defined
7300
to the empty string, this variable has no effect.)  With the normal
7301
definition of @code{ASM_APP_OFF}, the effect is to notify the GNU
7302
assembler that it need not bother stripping comments or extra
7303
whitespace from its input.  This allows it to work a bit faster.
7304
 
7305
The default is false.  You should not set it to true unless you have
7306
verified that your port does not generate any extra whitespace or
7307
comments that will cause GAS to issue errors in NO_APP mode.
7308
@end deftypevr
7309
 
7310
@deftypevr {Target Hook} bool TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_FILE_DIRECTIVE
7311
If this flag is true, @code{output_file_directive} will be called
7312
for the primary source file, immediately after printing
7313
@code{ASM_APP_OFF} (if that is enabled).  Most ELF assemblers expect
7314
this to be done.  The default is false.
7315
@end deftypevr
7316
 
7317
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_FILE_END (void)
7318
Output to @code{asm_out_file} any text which the assembler expects
7319
to find at the end of a file.  The default is to output nothing.
7320
@end deftypefn
7321
 
7322
@deftypefun void file_end_indicate_exec_stack ()
7323
Some systems use a common convention, the @samp{.note.GNU-stack}
7324
special section, to indicate whether or not an object file relies on
7325
the stack being executable.  If your system uses this convention, you
7326
should define @code{TARGET_ASM_FILE_END} to this function.  If you
7327
need to do other things in that hook, have your hook function call
7328
this function.
7329
@end deftypefun
7330
 
7331
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_LTO_START (void)
7332
Output to @code{asm_out_file} any text which the assembler expects
7333
to find at the start of an LTO section.  The default is to output
7334
nothing.
7335
@end deftypefn
7336
 
7337
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_LTO_END (void)
7338
Output to @code{asm_out_file} any text which the assembler expects
7339
to find at the end of an LTO section.  The default is to output
7340
nothing.
7341
@end deftypefn
7342
 
7343
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_CODE_END (void)
7344
Output to @code{asm_out_file} any text which is needed before emitting
7345
unwind info and debug info at the end of a file.  Some targets emit
7346
here PIC setup thunks that cannot be emitted at the end of file,
7347
because they couldn't have unwind info then.  The default is to output
7348
nothing.
7349
@end deftypefn
7350
 
7351
@defmac ASM_COMMENT_START
7352
A C string constant describing how to begin a comment in the target
7353
assembler language.  The compiler assumes that the comment will end at
7354
the end of the line.
7355
@end defmac
7356
 
7357
@defmac ASM_APP_ON
7358
A C string constant for text to be output before each @code{asm}
7359
statement or group of consecutive ones.  Normally this is
7360
@code{"#APP"}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
7361
assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it must check the lines
7362
that follow for all valid assembler constructs.
7363
@end defmac
7364
 
7365
@defmac ASM_APP_OFF
7366
A C string constant for text to be output after each @code{asm}
7367
statement or group of consecutive ones.  Normally this is
7368
@code{"#NO_APP"}, which tells the GNU assembler to resume making the
7369
time-saving assumptions that are valid for ordinary compiler output.
7370
@end defmac
7371
 
7372
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
7373
A C statement to output COFF information or DWARF debugging information
7374
which indicates that filename @var{name} is the current source file to
7375
the stdio stream @var{stream}.
7376
 
7377
This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
7378
for the file format in use is appropriate.
7379
@end defmac
7380
 
7381
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (FILE *@var{file}, const char *@var{name})
7382
Output COFF information or DWARF debugging information which indicates that filename @var{name} is the current source file to the stdio stream @var{file}.
7383
 
7384
 This target hook need not be defined if the standard form of output for the file format in use is appropriate.
7385
@end deftypefn
7386
 
7387
@defmac OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING (@var{stream}, @var{string})
7388
A C statement to output the string @var{string} to the stdio stream
7389
@var{stream}.  If you do not call the function @code{output_quoted_string}
7390
in your config files, GCC will only call it to output filenames to
7391
the assembler source.  So you can use it to canonicalize the format
7392
of the filename using this macro.
7393
@end defmac
7394
 
7395
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT (@var{stream}, @var{string})
7396
A C statement to output something to the assembler file to handle a
7397
@samp{#ident} directive containing the text @var{string}.  If this
7398
macro is not defined, nothing is output for a @samp{#ident} directive.
7399
@end defmac
7400
 
7401
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION (const char *@var{name}, unsigned int @var{flags}, tree @var{decl})
7402
Output assembly directives to switch to section @var{name}.  The section
7403
should have attributes as specified by @var{flags}, which is a bit mask
7404
of the @code{SECTION_*} flags defined in @file{output.h}.  If @var{decl}
7405
is non-NULL, it is the @code{VAR_DECL} or @code{FUNCTION_DECL} with which
7406
this section is associated.
7407
@end deftypefn
7408
 
7409
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {section *} TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SECTION (tree @var{decl}, enum node_frequency @var{freq}, bool @var{startup}, bool @var{exit})
7410
Return preferred text (sub)section for function @var{decl}.
7411
Main purpose of this function is to separate cold, normal and hot
7412
functions. @var{startup} is true when function is known to be used only
7413
at startup (from static constructors or it is @code{main()}).
7414
@var{exit} is true when function is known to be used only at exit
7415
(from static destructors).
7416
Return NULL if function should go to default text section.
7417
@end deftypefn
7418
 
7419
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SWITCHED_TEXT_SECTIONS (FILE *@var{file}, tree @var{decl}, bool @var{new_is_cold})
7420
Used by the target to emit any assembler directives or additional  labels needed when a function is partitioned between different  sections.  Output should be written to @var{file}.  The function  decl is available as @var{decl} and the new section is `cold' if  @var{new_is_cold} is @code{true}.
7421
@end deftypefn
7422
 
7423
@deftypevr {Common Target Hook} bool TARGET_HAVE_NAMED_SECTIONS
7424
This flag is true if the target supports @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION}.
7425
It must not be modified by command-line option processing.
7426
@end deftypevr
7427
 
7428
@anchor{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}
7429
@deftypevr {Target Hook} bool TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS
7430
This flag is true if we can create zeroed data by switching to a BSS
7431
section and then using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP} to allocate the space.
7432
This is true on most ELF targets.
7433
@end deftypevr
7434
 
7435
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {unsigned int} TARGET_SECTION_TYPE_FLAGS (tree @var{decl}, const char *@var{name}, int @var{reloc})
7436
Choose a set of section attributes for use by @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION}
7437
based on a variable or function decl, a section name, and whether or not the
7438
declaration's initializer may contain runtime relocations.  @var{decl} may be
7439
null, in which case read-write data should be assumed.
7440
 
7441
The default version of this function handles choosing code vs data,
7442
read-only vs read-write data, and @code{flag_pic}.  You should only
7443
need to override this if your target has special flags that might be
7444
set via @code{__attribute__}.
7445
@end deftypefn
7446
 
7447
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES (print_switch_type @var{type}, const char *@var{text})
7448
Provides the target with the ability to record the gcc command line
7449
switches that have been passed to the compiler, and options that are
7450
enabled.  The @var{type} argument specifies what is being recorded.
7451
It can take the following values:
7452
 
7453
@table @gcctabopt
7454
@item SWITCH_TYPE_PASSED
7455
@var{text} is a command line switch that has been set by the user.
7456
 
7457
@item SWITCH_TYPE_ENABLED
7458
@var{text} is an option which has been enabled.  This might be as a
7459
direct result of a command line switch, or because it is enabled by
7460
default or because it has been enabled as a side effect of a different
7461
command line switch.  For example, the @option{-O2} switch enables
7462
various different individual optimization passes.
7463
 
7464
@item SWITCH_TYPE_DESCRIPTIVE
7465
@var{text} is either NULL or some descriptive text which should be
7466
ignored.  If @var{text} is NULL then it is being used to warn the
7467
target hook that either recording is starting or ending.  The first
7468
time @var{type} is SWITCH_TYPE_DESCRIPTIVE and @var{text} is NULL, the
7469
warning is for start up and the second time the warning is for
7470
wind down.  This feature is to allow the target hook to make any
7471
necessary preparations before it starts to record switches and to
7472
perform any necessary tidying up after it has finished recording
7473
switches.
7474
 
7475
@item SWITCH_TYPE_LINE_START
7476
This option can be ignored by this target hook.
7477
 
7478
@item  SWITCH_TYPE_LINE_END
7479
This option can be ignored by this target hook.
7480
@end table
7481
 
7482
The hook's return value must be zero.  Other return values may be
7483
supported in the future.
7484
 
7485
By default this hook is set to NULL, but an example implementation is
7486
provided for ELF based targets.  Called @var{elf_record_gcc_switches},
7487
it records the switches as ASCII text inside a new, string mergeable
7488
section in the assembler output file.  The name of the new section is
7489
provided by the @code{TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES_SECTION} target
7490
hook.
7491
@end deftypefn
7492
 
7493
@deftypevr {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES_SECTION
7494
This is the name of the section that will be created by the example
7495
ELF implementation of the @code{TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES} target
7496
hook.
7497
@end deftypevr
7498
 
7499
@need 2000
7500
@node Data Output
7501
@subsection Output of Data
7502
 
7503
 
7504
@deftypevr {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_ASM_BYTE_OP
7505
@deftypevrx {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_HI_OP
7506
@deftypevrx {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_SI_OP
7507
@deftypevrx {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_DI_OP
7508
@deftypevrx {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_TI_OP
7509
@deftypevrx {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_HI_OP
7510
@deftypevrx {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_SI_OP
7511
@deftypevrx {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_DI_OP
7512
@deftypevrx {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_TI_OP
7513
These hooks specify assembly directives for creating certain kinds
7514
of integer object.  The @code{TARGET_ASM_BYTE_OP} directive creates a
7515
byte-sized object, the @code{TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_HI_OP} one creates an
7516
aligned two-byte object, and so on.  Any of the hooks may be
7517
@code{NULL}, indicating that no suitable directive is available.
7518
 
7519
The compiler will print these strings at the start of a new line,
7520
followed immediately by the object's initial value.  In most cases,
7521
the string should contain a tab, a pseudo-op, and then another tab.
7522
@end deftypevr
7523
 
7524
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_ASM_INTEGER (rtx @var{x}, unsigned int @var{size}, int @var{aligned_p})
7525
The @code{assemble_integer} function uses this hook to output an
7526
integer object.  @var{x} is the object's value, @var{size} is its size
7527
in bytes and @var{aligned_p} indicates whether it is aligned.  The
7528
function should return @code{true} if it was able to output the
7529
object.  If it returns false, @code{assemble_integer} will try to
7530
split the object into smaller parts.
7531
 
7532
The default implementation of this hook will use the
7533
@code{TARGET_ASM_BYTE_OP} family of strings, returning @code{false}
7534
when the relevant string is @code{NULL}.
7535
@end deftypefn
7536
 
7537
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_CONST_EXTRA (FILE *@var{file}, rtx @var{x})
7538
A target hook to recognize @var{rtx} patterns that @code{output_addr_const}
7539
can't deal with, and output assembly code to @var{file} corresponding to
7540
the pattern @var{x}.  This may be used to allow machine-dependent
7541
@code{UNSPEC}s to appear within constants.
7542
 
7543
If target hook fails to recognize a pattern, it must return @code{false},
7544
so that a standard error message is printed.  If it prints an error message
7545
itself, by calling, for example, @code{output_operand_lossage}, it may just
7546
return @code{true}.
7547
@end deftypefn
7548
 
7549
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII (@var{stream}, @var{ptr}, @var{len})
7550
A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
7551
instruction to assemble a string constant containing the @var{len}
7552
bytes at @var{ptr}.  @var{ptr} will be a C expression of type
7553
@code{char *} and @var{len} a C expression of type @code{int}.
7554
 
7555
If the assembler has a @code{.ascii} pseudo-op as found in the
7556
Berkeley Unix assembler, do not define the macro
7557
@code{ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII}.
7558
@end defmac
7559
 
7560
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FDESC (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{n})
7561
A C statement to output word @var{n} of a function descriptor for
7562
@var{decl}.  This must be defined if @code{TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS}
7563
is defined, and is otherwise unused.
7564
@end defmac
7565
 
7566
@defmac CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
7567
You may define this macro as a C expression.  You should define the
7568
expression to have a nonzero value if GCC should output the constant
7569
pool for a function before the code for the function, or a zero value if
7570
GCC should output the constant pool after the function.  If you do
7571
not define this macro, the usual case, GCC will output the constant
7572
pool before the function.
7573
@end defmac
7574
 
7575
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE (@var{file}, @var{funname}, @var{fundecl}, @var{size})
7576
A C statement to output assembler commands to define the start of the
7577
constant pool for a function.  @var{funname} is a string giving
7578
the name of the function.  Should the return type of the function
7579
be required, it can be obtained via @var{fundecl}.  @var{size}
7580
is the size, in bytes, of the constant pool that will be written
7581
immediately after this call.
7582
 
7583
If no constant-pool prefix is required, the usual case, this macro need
7584
not be defined.
7585
@end defmac
7586
 
7587
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY (@var{file}, @var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{align}, @var{labelno}, @var{jumpto})
7588
A C statement (with or without semicolon) to output a constant in the
7589
constant pool, if it needs special treatment.  (This macro need not do
7590
anything for RTL expressions that can be output normally.)
7591
 
7592
The argument @var{file} is the standard I/O stream to output the
7593
assembler code on.  @var{x} is the RTL expression for the constant to
7594
output, and @var{mode} is the machine mode (in case @var{x} is a
7595
@samp{const_int}).  @var{align} is the required alignment for the value
7596
@var{x}; you should output an assembler directive to force this much
7597
alignment.
7598
 
7599
The argument @var{labelno} is a number to use in an internal label for
7600
the address of this pool entry.  The definition of this macro is
7601
responsible for outputting the label definition at the proper place.
7602
Here is how to do this:
7603
 
7604
@smallexample
7605
@code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} (@var{file}, "LC", @var{labelno});
7606
@end smallexample
7607
 
7608
When you output a pool entry specially, you should end with a
7609
@code{goto} to the label @var{jumpto}.  This will prevent the same pool
7610
entry from being output a second time in the usual manner.
7611
 
7612
You need not define this macro if it would do nothing.
7613
@end defmac
7614
 
7615
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
7616
A C statement to output assembler commands to at the end of the constant
7617
pool for a function.  @var{funname} is a string giving the name of the
7618
function.  Should the return type of the function be required, you can
7619
obtain it via @var{fundecl}.  @var{size} is the size, in bytes, of the
7620
constant pool that GCC wrote immediately before this call.
7621
 
7622
If no constant-pool epilogue is required, the usual case, you need not
7623
define this macro.
7624
@end defmac
7625
 
7626
@defmac IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR (@var{C}, @var{STR})
7627
Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if @var{C} is
7628
used as a logical line separator by the assembler.  @var{STR} points
7629
to the position in the string where @var{C} was found; this can be used if
7630
a line separator uses multiple characters.
7631
 
7632
If you do not define this macro, the default is that only
7633
the character @samp{;} is treated as a logical line separator.
7634
@end defmac
7635
 
7636
@deftypevr {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_ASM_OPEN_PAREN
7637
@deftypevrx {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_ASM_CLOSE_PAREN
7638
These target hooks are C string constants, describing the syntax in the
7639
assembler for grouping arithmetic expressions.  If not overridden, they
7640
default to normal parentheses, which is correct for most assemblers.
7641
@end deftypevr
7642
 
7643
These macros are provided by @file{real.h} for writing the definitions
7644
of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE} and the like:
7645
 
7646
@defmac REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
7647
@defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
7648
@defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
7649
@defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32 (@var{x}, @var{l})
7650
@defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL64 (@var{x}, @var{l})
7651
@defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL128 (@var{x}, @var{l})
7652
These translate @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to the
7653
target's floating point representation, and store its bit pattern in
7654
the variable @var{l}.  For @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE} and
7655
@code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32}, this variable should be a
7656
simple @code{long int}.  For the others, it should be an array of
7657
@code{long int}.  The number of elements in this array is determined
7658
by the size of the desired target floating point data type: 32 bits of
7659
it go in each @code{long int} array element.  Each array element holds
7660
32 bits of the result, even if @code{long int} is wider than 32 bits
7661
on the host machine.
7662
 
7663
The array element values are designed so that you can print them out
7664
using @code{fprintf} in the order they should appear in the target
7665
machine's memory.
7666
@end defmac
7667
 
7668
@node Uninitialized Data
7669
@subsection Output of Uninitialized Variables
7670
 
7671
Each of the macros in this section is used to do the whole job of
7672
outputting a single uninitialized variable.
7673
 
7674
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
7675
A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
7676
@var{stream} the assembler definition of a common-label named
7677
@var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes.  The variable @var{rounded}
7678
is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.  It is
7679
possible that @var{size} may be zero, for instance if a struct with no
7680
other member than a zero-length array is defined.  In this case, the
7681
backend must output a symbol definition that allocates at least one
7682
byte, both so that the address of the resulting object does not compare
7683
equal to any other, and because some object formats cannot even express
7684
the concept of a zero-sized common symbol, as that is how they represent
7685
an ordinary undefined external.
7686
 
7687
Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
7688
output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
7689
assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
7690
 
7691
This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
7692
common global variables are output.
7693
@end defmac
7694
 
7695
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
7696
Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} except takes the required alignment as a
7697
separate, explicit argument.  If you define this macro, it is used in
7698
place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, and gives you more flexibility in
7699
handling the required alignment of the variable.  The alignment is specified
7700
as the number of bits.
7701
@end defmac
7702
 
7703
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
7704
Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} except that @var{decl} of the
7705
variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
7706
is no corresponding variable.  If you define this macro, GCC will use it
7707
in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} and
7708
@code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON}.  Define this macro when you need to see
7709
the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
7710
@end defmac
7711
 
7712
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
7713
A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
7714
@var{stream} the assembler definition of uninitialized global @var{decl} named
7715
@var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes.  The variable @var{alignment}
7716
is the alignment specified as the number of bits.
7717
 
7718
Try to use function @code{asm_output_aligned_bss} defined in file
7719
@file{varasm.c} when defining this macro.  If unable, use the expression
7720
@code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name itself;
7721
before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax for defining
7722
the name, and a newline.
7723
 
7724
There are two ways of handling global BSS@.  One is to define this macro.
7725
The other is to have @code{TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION} return a
7726
switchable BSS section (@pxref{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}).
7727
You do not need to do both.
7728
 
7729
Some languages do not have @code{common} data, and require a
7730
non-common form of global BSS in order to handle uninitialized globals
7731
efficiently.  C++ is one example of this.  However, if the target does
7732
not support global BSS, the front end may choose to make globals
7733
common in order to save space in the object file.
7734
@end defmac
7735
 
7736
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
7737
A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
7738
@var{stream} the assembler definition of a local-common-label named
7739
@var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes.  The variable @var{rounded}
7740
is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
7741
 
7742
Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
7743
output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
7744
assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
7745
 
7746
This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
7747
static variables are output.
7748
@end defmac
7749
 
7750
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
7751
Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL} except takes the required alignment as a
7752
separate, explicit argument.  If you define this macro, it is used in
7753
place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, and gives you more flexibility in
7754
handling the required alignment of the variable.  The alignment is specified
7755
as the number of bits.
7756
@end defmac
7757
 
7758
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
7759
Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL} except that @var{decl} of the
7760
variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
7761
is no corresponding variable.  If you define this macro, GCC will use it
7762
in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DECL} and
7763
@code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL}.  Define this macro when you need to see
7764
the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
7765
@end defmac
7766
 
7767
@node Label Output
7768
@subsection Output and Generation of Labels
7769
 
7770
@c prevent bad page break with this line
7771
This is about outputting labels.
7772
 
7773
@findex assemble_name
7774
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
7775
A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
7776
@var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name}.
7777
Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
7778
output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
7779
assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.  A default
7780
definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
7781
@end defmac
7782
 
7783
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
7784
A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
7785
@var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name} of
7786
a function.
7787
Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
7788
output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
7789
assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.  A default
7790
definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
7791
 
7792
If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
7793
usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
7794
@end defmac
7795
 
7796
@findex assemble_name_raw
7797
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
7798
Identical to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}, except that @var{name} is known
7799
to refer to a compiler-generated label.  The default definition uses
7800
@code{assemble_name_raw}, which is like @code{assemble_name} except
7801
that it is more efficient.
7802
@end defmac
7803
 
7804
@defmac SIZE_ASM_OP
7805
A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
7806
size of a symbol, without any arguments.  On systems that use ELF, the
7807
default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.size\t"}; on other
7808
systems, the default is not to define this macro.
7809
 
7810
Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definitions
7811
of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE}
7812
for your system.  If you need your own custom definitions of those
7813
macros, or if you do not need explicit symbol sizes at all, do not
7814
define this macro.
7815
@end defmac
7816
 
7817
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size})
7818
A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
7819
@var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the size of the
7820
symbol @var{name} is @var{size}.  @var{size} is a @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}.
7821
If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
7822
provided.
7823
@end defmac
7824
 
7825
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name})
7826
A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
7827
@var{stream} a directive telling the assembler to calculate the size of
7828
the symbol @var{name} by subtracting its address from the current
7829
address.
7830
 
7831
If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
7832
provided.  The default assumes that the assembler recognizes a special
7833
@samp{.} symbol as referring to the current address, and can calculate
7834
the difference between this and another symbol.  If your assembler does
7835
not recognize @samp{.} or cannot do calculations with it, you will need
7836
to redefine @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} to use some other technique.
7837
@end defmac
7838
 
7839
@defmac TYPE_ASM_OP
7840
A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
7841
type of a symbol, without any arguments.  On systems that use ELF, the
7842
default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.type\t"}; on other
7843
systems, the default is not to define this macro.
7844
 
7845
Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
7846
@code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system.  If you need your own
7847
custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
7848
types at all, do not define this macro.
7849
@end defmac
7850
 
7851
@defmac TYPE_OPERAND_FMT
7852
A C string which specifies (using @code{printf} syntax) the format of
7853
the second operand to @code{TYPE_ASM_OP}.  On systems that use ELF, the
7854
default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"@@%s"}; on other systems,
7855
the default is not to define this macro.
7856
 
7857
Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
7858
@code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system.  If you need your own
7859
custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
7860
types at all, do not define this macro.
7861
@end defmac
7862
 
7863
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{type})
7864
A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
7865
@var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the type of the
7866
symbol @var{name} is @var{type}.  @var{type} is a C string; currently,
7867
that string is always either @samp{"function"} or @samp{"object"}, but
7868
you should not count on this.
7869
 
7870
If you define @code{TYPE_ASM_OP} and @code{TYPE_OPERAND_FMT}, a default
7871
definition of this macro is provided.
7872
@end defmac
7873
 
7874
@defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
7875
A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
7876
@var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
7877
function which is being defined.  This macro is responsible for
7878
outputting the label definition (perhaps using
7879
@code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}).  The argument @var{decl} is the
7880
@code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
7881
 
7882
If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
7883
usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}).
7884
 
7885
You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition
7886
of this macro.
7887
@end defmac
7888
 
7889
@defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
7890
A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
7891
@var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a function
7892
which is being defined.  The argument @var{name} is the name of the
7893
function.  The argument @var{decl} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node
7894
representing the function.
7895
 
7896
If this macro is not defined, then the function size is not defined.
7897
 
7898
You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition
7899
of this macro.
7900
@end defmac
7901
 
7902
@defmac ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
7903
A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
7904
@var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of an
7905
initialized variable which is being defined.  This macro must output the
7906
label definition (perhaps using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).  The argument
7907
@var{decl} is the @code{VAR_DECL} tree node representing the variable.
7908
 
7909
If this macro is not defined, then the variable name is defined in the
7910
usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
7911
 
7912
You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
7913
@code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition of this macro.
7914
@end defmac
7915
 
7916
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_DECLARE_CONSTANT_NAME (FILE *@var{file}, const char *@var{name}, const_tree @var{expr}, HOST_WIDE_INT @var{size})
7917
A target hook to output to the stdio stream @var{file} any text necessary
7918
for declaring the name @var{name} of a constant which is being defined.  This
7919
target hook is responsible for outputting the label definition (perhaps using
7920
@code{assemble_label}).  The argument @var{exp} is the value of the constant,
7921
and @var{size} is the size of the constant in bytes.  The @var{name}
7922
will be an internal label.
7923
 
7924
The default version of this target hook, define the @var{name} in the
7925
usual manner as a label (by means of @code{assemble_label}).
7926
 
7927
You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} in this target hook.
7928
@end deftypefn
7929
 
7930
@defmac ASM_DECLARE_REGISTER_GLOBAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{regno}, @var{name})
7931
A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
7932
@var{stream} any text necessary for claiming a register @var{regno}
7933
for a global variable @var{decl} with name @var{name}.
7934
 
7935
If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
7936
nothing.
7937
@end defmac
7938
 
7939
@defmac ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{toplevel}, @var{atend})
7940
A C statement (sans semicolon) to finish up declaring a variable name
7941
once the compiler has processed its initializer fully and thus has had a
7942
chance to determine the size of an array when controlled by an
7943
initializer.  This is used on systems where it's necessary to declare
7944
something about the size of the object.
7945
 
7946
If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
7947
nothing.
7948
 
7949
You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
7950
@code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition of this macro.
7951
@end defmac
7952
 
7953
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL (FILE *@var{stream}, const char *@var{name})
7954
This target hook is a function to output to the stdio stream
7955
@var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} global;
7956
that is, available for reference from other files.
7957
 
7958
The default implementation relies on a proper definition of
7959
@code{GLOBAL_ASM_OP}.
7960
@end deftypefn
7961
 
7962
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_DECL_NAME (FILE *@var{stream}, tree @var{decl})
7963
This target hook is a function to output to the stdio stream
7964
@var{stream} some commands that will make the name associated with @var{decl}
7965
global; that is, available for reference from other files.
7966
 
7967
The default implementation uses the TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL target hook.
7968
@end deftypefn
7969
 
7970
@defmac ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
7971
A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
7972
@var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} weak;
7973
that is, available for reference from other files but only used if
7974
no other definition is available.  Use the expression
7975
@code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
7976
itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
7977
for making that name weak, and a newline.
7978
 
7979
If you don't define this macro or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}, GCC will not
7980
support weak symbols and you should not define the @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK}
7981
macro.
7982
@end defmac
7983
 
7984
@defmac ASM_WEAKEN_DECL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
7985
Combines (and replaces) the function of @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} and
7986
@code{ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS}, allowing access to the associated function
7987
or variable decl.  If @var{value} is not @code{NULL}, this C statement
7988
should output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code which
7989
defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
7990
@var{value}.  If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it should output commands
7991
to make @var{name} weak.
7992
@end defmac
7993
 
7994
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAKREF (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
7995
Outputs a directive that enables @var{name} to be used to refer to
7996
symbol @var{value} with weak-symbol semantics.  @code{decl} is the
7997
declaration of @code{name}.
7998
@end defmac
7999
 
8000
@defmac SUPPORTS_WEAK
8001
A preprocessor constant expression which evaluates to true if the target
8002
supports weak symbols.
8003
 
8004
If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
8005
definition.  If either @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}
8006
is defined, the default definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}.
8007
@end defmac
8008
 
8009
@defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WEAK
8010
A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports weak symbols.
8011
 
8012
If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
8013
definition.  The default definition is @samp{(SUPPORTS_WEAK)}.  Define
8014
this macro if you want to control weak symbol support with a compiler
8015
flag such as @option{-melf}.
8016
@end defmac
8017
 
8018
@defmac MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY (@var{decl})
8019
A C statement (sans semicolon) to mark @var{decl} to be emitted as a
8020
public symbol such that extra copies in multiple translation units will
8021
be discarded by the linker.  Define this macro if your object file
8022
format provides support for this concept, such as the @samp{COMDAT}
8023
section flags in the Microsoft Windows PE/COFF format, and this support
8024
requires changes to @var{decl}, such as putting it in a separate section.
8025
@end defmac
8026
 
8027
@defmac SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
8028
A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports one-only
8029
semantics.
8030
 
8031
If you don't define this macro, @file{varasm.c} provides a default
8032
definition.  If @code{MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY} is defined, the default
8033
definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}.  Define this macro if
8034
you want to control one-only symbol support with a compiler flag, or if
8035
setting the @code{DECL_ONE_ONLY} flag is enough to mark a declaration to
8036
be emitted as one-only.
8037
@end defmac
8038
 
8039
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_ASSEMBLE_VISIBILITY (tree @var{decl}, int @var{visibility})
8040
This target hook is a function to output to @var{asm_out_file} some
8041
commands that will make the symbol(s) associated with @var{decl} have
8042
hidden, protected or internal visibility as specified by @var{visibility}.
8043
@end deftypefn
8044
 
8045
@defmac TARGET_WEAK_NOT_IN_ARCHIVE_TOC
8046
A C expression that evaluates to true if the target's linker expects
8047
that weak symbols do not appear in a static archive's table of contents.
8048
The default is @code{0}.
8049
 
8050
Leaving weak symbols out of an archive's table of contents means that,
8051
if a symbol will only have a definition in one translation unit and
8052
will have undefined references from other translation units, that
8053
symbol should not be weak.  Defining this macro to be nonzero will
8054
thus have the effect that certain symbols that would normally be weak
8055
(explicit template instantiations, and vtables for polymorphic classes
8056
with noninline key methods) will instead be nonweak.
8057
 
8058
The C++ ABI requires this macro to be zero.  Define this macro for
8059
targets where full C++ ABI compliance is impossible and where linker
8060
restrictions require weak symbols to be left out of a static archive's
8061
table of contents.
8062
@end defmac
8063
 
8064
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name})
8065
A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
8066
@var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name of an external
8067
symbol named @var{name} which is referenced in this compilation but
8068
not defined.  The value of @var{decl} is the tree node for the
8069
declaration.
8070
 
8071
This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
8072
The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
8073
@end defmac
8074
 
8075
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL (rtx @var{symref})
8076
This target hook is a function to output to @var{asm_out_file} an assembler
8077
pseudo-op to declare a library function name external.  The name of the
8078
library function is given by @var{symref}, which is a @code{symbol_ref}.
8079
@end deftypefn
8080
 
8081
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_MARK_DECL_PRESERVED (const char *@var{symbol})
8082
This target hook is a function to output to @var{asm_out_file} an assembler
8083
directive to annotate @var{symbol} as used.  The Darwin target uses the
8084
.no_dead_code_strip directive.
8085
@end deftypefn
8086
 
8087
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF (@var{stream}, @var{name})
8088
A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
8089
@var{stream} a reference in assembler syntax to a label named
8090
@var{name}.  This should add @samp{_} to the front of the name, if that
8091
is customary on your operating system, as it is in most Berkeley Unix
8092
systems.  This macro is used in @code{assemble_name}.
8093
@end defmac
8094
 
8095
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_MANGLE_ASSEMBLER_NAME (const char *@var{name})
8096
Given a symbol @var{name}, perform same mangling as @code{varasm.c}'s @code{assemble_name}, but in memory rather than to a file stream, returning result as an @code{IDENTIFIER_NODE}.  Required for correct LTO symtabs.  The default implementation calls the @code{TARGET_STRIP_NAME_ENCODING} hook and then prepends the @code{USER_LABEL_PREFIX}, if any.
8097
@end deftypefn
8098
 
8099
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SYMBOL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{sym})
8100
A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to
8101
@code{SYMBOL_REF} @var{sym}.  If not defined, @code{assemble_name}
8102
will be used to output the name of the symbol.  This macro may be used
8103
to modify the way a symbol is referenced depending on information
8104
encoded by @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO}.
8105
@end defmac
8106
 
8107
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{buf})
8108
A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to @var{buf}, the
8109
result of @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL}.  If not defined,
8110
@code{assemble_name} will be used to output the name of the symbol.
8111
This macro is not used by @code{output_asm_label}, or the @code{%l}
8112
specifier that calls it; the intention is that this macro should be set
8113
when it is necessary to output a label differently when its address is
8114
being taken.
8115
@end defmac
8116
 
8117
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_INTERNAL_LABEL (FILE *@var{stream}, const char *@var{prefix}, unsigned long @var{labelno})
8118
A function to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} a label whose
8119
name is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{labelno}.
8120
 
8121
It is absolutely essential that these labels be distinct from the labels
8122
used for user-level functions and variables.  Otherwise, certain programs
8123
will have name conflicts with internal labels.
8124
 
8125
It is desirable to exclude internal labels from the symbol table of the
8126
object file.  Most assemblers have a naming convention for labels that
8127
should be excluded; on many systems, the letter @samp{L} at the
8128
beginning of a label has this effect.  You should find out what
8129
convention your system uses, and follow it.
8130
 
8131
The default version of this function utilizes @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL}.
8132
@end deftypefn
8133
 
8134
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEBUG_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
8135
A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} a debug info
8136
label whose name is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number
8137
@var{num}.  This is useful for VLIW targets, where debug info labels
8138
may need to be treated differently than branch target labels.  On some
8139
systems, branch target labels must be at the beginning of instruction
8140
bundles, but debug info labels can occur in the middle of instruction
8141
bundles.
8142
 
8143
If this macro is not defined, then @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} will be
8144
used.
8145
@end defmac
8146
 
8147
@defmac ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{string}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
8148
A C statement to store into the string @var{string} a label whose name
8149
is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
8150
 
8151
This string, when output subsequently by @code{assemble_name}, should
8152
produce the output that @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} would produce
8153
with the same @var{prefix} and @var{num}.
8154
 
8155
If the string begins with @samp{*}, then @code{assemble_name} will
8156
output the rest of the string unchanged.  It is often convenient for
8157
@code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} to use @samp{*} in this way.  If the
8158
string doesn't start with @samp{*}, then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} gets
8159
to output the string, and may change it.  (Of course,
8160
@code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} is also part of your machine description, so
8161
you should know what it does on your machine.)
8162
@end defmac
8163
 
8164
@defmac ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME (@var{outvar}, @var{name}, @var{number})
8165
A C expression to assign to @var{outvar} (which is a variable of type
8166
@code{char *}) a newly allocated string made from the string
8167
@var{name} and the number @var{number}, with some suitable punctuation
8168
added.  Use @code{alloca} to get space for the string.
8169
 
8170
The string will be used as an argument to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to
8171
produce an assembler label for an internal static variable whose name is
8172
@var{name}.  Therefore, the string must be such as to result in valid
8173
assembler code.  The argument @var{number} is different each time this
8174
macro is executed; it prevents conflicts between similarly-named
8175
internal static variables in different scopes.
8176
 
8177
Ideally this string should not be a valid C identifier, to prevent any
8178
conflict with the user's own symbols.  Most assemblers allow periods
8179
or percent signs in assembler symbols; putting at least one of these
8180
between the name and the number will suffice.
8181
 
8182
If this macro is not defined, a default definition will be provided
8183
which is correct for most systems.
8184
@end defmac
8185
 
8186
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
8187
A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
8188
which defines (equates) the symbol @var{name} to have the value @var{value}.
8189
 
8190
@findex SET_ASM_OP
8191
If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
8192
correct for most systems.
8193
@end defmac
8194
 
8195
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS (@var{stream}, @var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
8196
A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
8197
which defines (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name}
8198
to have the value of the tree node @var{decl_of_value}.  This macro will
8199
be used in preference to @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} if it is defined and if
8200
the tree nodes are available.
8201
 
8202
@findex SET_ASM_OP
8203
If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
8204
correct for most systems.
8205
@end defmac
8206
 
8207
@defmac TARGET_DEFERRED_OUTPUT_DEFS (@var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
8208
A C statement that evaluates to true if the assembler code which defines
8209
(equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name} to have the value
8210
of the tree node @var{decl_of_value} should be emitted near the end of the
8211
current compilation unit.  The default is to not defer output of defines.
8212
This macro affects defines output by @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} and
8213
@samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS}.
8214
@end defmac
8215
 
8216
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
8217
A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
8218
which defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
8219
@var{value}.  If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it defines @var{name} as
8220
an undefined weak symbol.
8221
 
8222
Define this macro if the target only supports weak aliases; define
8223
@code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} instead if possible.
8224
@end defmac
8225
 
8226
@defmac OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL (@var{buf}, @var{is_inst}, @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name}, @var{sel_name})
8227
Define this macro to override the default assembler names used for
8228
Objective-C methods.
8229
 
8230
The default name is a unique method number followed by the name of the
8231
class (e.g.@: @samp{_1_Foo}).  For methods in categories, the name of
8232
the category is also included in the assembler name (e.g.@:
8233
@samp{_1_Foo_Bar}).
8234
 
8235
These names are safe on most systems, but make debugging difficult since
8236
the method's selector is not present in the name.  Therefore, particular
8237
systems define other ways of computing names.
8238
 
8239
@var{buf} is an expression of type @code{char *} which gives you a
8240
buffer in which to store the name; its length is as long as
8241
@var{class_name}, @var{cat_name} and @var{sel_name} put together, plus
8242
50 characters extra.
8243
 
8244
The argument @var{is_inst} specifies whether the method is an instance
8245
method or a class method; @var{class_name} is the name of the class;
8246
@var{cat_name} is the name of the category (or @code{NULL} if the method is not
8247
in a category); and @var{sel_name} is the name of the selector.
8248
 
8249
On systems where the assembler can handle quoted names, you can use this
8250
macro to provide more human-readable names.
8251
@end defmac
8252
 
8253
@defmac ASM_DECLARE_CLASS_REFERENCE (@var{stream}, @var{name})
8254
A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
8255
@var{stream} commands to declare that the label @var{name} is an
8256
Objective-C class reference.  This is only needed for targets whose
8257
linkers have special support for NeXT-style runtimes.
8258
@end defmac
8259
 
8260
@defmac ASM_DECLARE_UNRESOLVED_REFERENCE (@var{stream}, @var{name})
8261
A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
8262
@var{stream} commands to declare that the label @var{name} is an
8263
unresolved Objective-C class reference.  This is only needed for targets
8264
whose linkers have special support for NeXT-style runtimes.
8265
@end defmac
8266
 
8267
@node Initialization
8268
@subsection How Initialization Functions Are Handled
8269
@cindex initialization routines
8270
@cindex termination routines
8271
@cindex constructors, output of
8272
@cindex destructors, output of
8273
 
8274
The compiled code for certain languages includes @dfn{constructors}
8275
(also called @dfn{initialization routines})---functions to initialize
8276
data in the program when the program is started.  These functions need
8277
to be called before the program is ``started''---that is to say, before
8278
@code{main} is called.
8279
 
8280
Compiling some languages generates @dfn{destructors} (also called
8281
@dfn{termination routines}) that should be called when the program
8282
terminates.
8283
 
8284
To make the initialization and termination functions work, the compiler
8285
must output something in the assembler code to cause those functions to
8286
be called at the appropriate time.  When you port the compiler to a new
8287
system, you need to specify how to do this.
8288
 
8289
There are two major ways that GCC currently supports the execution of
8290
initialization and termination functions.  Each way has two variants.
8291
Much of the structure is common to all four variations.
8292
 
8293
@findex __CTOR_LIST__
8294
@findex __DTOR_LIST__
8295
The linker must build two lists of these functions---a list of
8296
initialization functions, called @code{__CTOR_LIST__}, and a list of
8297
termination functions, called @code{__DTOR_LIST__}.
8298
 
8299
Each list always begins with an ignored function pointer (which may hold
8300
0, @minus{}1, or a count of the function pointers after it, depending on
8301
the environment).  This is followed by a series of zero or more function
8302
pointers to constructors (or destructors), followed by a function
8303
pointer containing zero.
8304
 
8305
Depending on the operating system and its executable file format, either
8306
@file{crtstuff.c} or @file{libgcc2.c} traverses these lists at startup
8307
time and exit time.  Constructors are called in reverse order of the
8308
list; destructors in forward order.
8309
 
8310
The best way to handle static constructors works only for object file
8311
formats which provide arbitrarily-named sections.  A section is set
8312
aside for a list of constructors, and another for a list of destructors.
8313
Traditionally these are called @samp{.ctors} and @samp{.dtors}.  Each
8314
object file that defines an initialization function also puts a word in
8315
the constructor section to point to that function.  The linker
8316
accumulates all these words into one contiguous @samp{.ctors} section.
8317
Termination functions are handled similarly.
8318
 
8319
This method will be chosen as the default by @file{target-def.h} if
8320
@code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION} is defined.  A target that does not
8321
support arbitrary sections, but does support special designated
8322
constructor and destructor sections may define @code{CTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP}
8323
and @code{DTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP} to achieve the same effect.
8324
 
8325
When arbitrary sections are available, there are two variants, depending
8326
upon how the code in @file{crtstuff.c} is called.  On systems that
8327
support a @dfn{.init} section which is executed at program startup,
8328
parts of @file{crtstuff.c} are compiled into that section.  The
8329
program is linked by the @command{gcc} driver like this:
8330
 
8331
@smallexample
8332
ld -o @var{output_file} crti.o crtbegin.o @dots{} -lgcc crtend.o crtn.o
8333
@end smallexample
8334
 
8335
The prologue of a function (@code{__init}) appears in the @code{.init}
8336
section of @file{crti.o}; the epilogue appears in @file{crtn.o}.  Likewise
8337
for the function @code{__fini} in the @dfn{.fini} section.  Normally these
8338
files are provided by the operating system or by the GNU C library, but
8339
are provided by GCC for a few targets.
8340
 
8341
The objects @file{crtbegin.o} and @file{crtend.o} are (for most targets)
8342
compiled from @file{crtstuff.c}.  They contain, among other things, code
8343
fragments within the @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections that branch
8344
to routines in the @code{.text} section.  The linker will pull all parts
8345
of a section together, which results in a complete @code{__init} function
8346
that invokes the routines we need at startup.
8347
 
8348
To use this variant, you must define the @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}
8349
macro properly.
8350
 
8351
If no init section is available, when GCC compiles any function called
8352
@code{main} (or more accurately, any function designated as a program
8353
entry point by the language front end calling @code{expand_main_function}),
8354
it inserts a procedure call to @code{__main} as the first executable code
8355
after the function prologue.  The @code{__main} function is defined
8356
in @file{libgcc2.c} and runs the global constructors.
8357
 
8358
In file formats that don't support arbitrary sections, there are again
8359
two variants.  In the simplest variant, the GNU linker (GNU @code{ld})
8360
and an `a.out' format must be used.  In this case,
8361
@code{TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR} is defined to produce a @code{.stabs}
8362
entry of type @samp{N_SETT}, referencing the name @code{__CTOR_LIST__},
8363
and with the address of the void function containing the initialization
8364
code as its value.  The GNU linker recognizes this as a request to add
8365
the value to a @dfn{set}; the values are accumulated, and are eventually
8366
placed in the executable as a vector in the format described above, with
8367
a leading (ignored) count and a trailing zero element.
8368
@code{TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR} is handled similarly.  Since no init
8369
section is available, the absence of @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} causes
8370
the compilation of @code{main} to call @code{__main} as above, starting
8371
the initialization process.
8372
 
8373
The last variant uses neither arbitrary sections nor the GNU linker.
8374
This is preferable when you want to do dynamic linking and when using
8375
file formats which the GNU linker does not support, such as `ECOFF'@.  In
8376
this case, @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is false, initialization and
8377
termination functions are recognized simply by their names.  This requires
8378
an extra program in the linkage step, called @command{collect2}.  This program
8379
pretends to be the linker, for use with GCC; it does its job by running
8380
the ordinary linker, but also arranges to include the vectors of
8381
initialization and termination functions.  These functions are called
8382
via @code{__main} as described above.  In order to use this method,
8383
@code{use_collect2} must be defined in the target in @file{config.gcc}.
8384
 
8385
@ifinfo
8386
The following section describes the specific macros that control and
8387
customize the handling of initialization and termination functions.
8388
@end ifinfo
8389
 
8390
@node Macros for Initialization
8391
@subsection Macros Controlling Initialization Routines
8392
 
8393
Here are the macros that control how the compiler handles initialization
8394
and termination functions:
8395
 
8396
@defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
8397
If defined, a C string constant, including spacing, for the assembler
8398
operation to identify the following data as initialization code.  If not
8399
defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist.  When you are
8400
using special sections for initialization and termination functions, this
8401
macro also controls how @file{crtstuff.c} and @file{libgcc2.c} arrange to
8402
run the initialization functions.
8403
@end defmac
8404
 
8405
@defmac HAS_INIT_SECTION
8406
If defined, @code{main} will not call @code{__main} as described above.
8407
This macro should be defined for systems that control start-up code
8408
on a symbol-by-symbol basis, such as OSF/1, and should not
8409
be defined explicitly for systems that support @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
8410
@end defmac
8411
 
8412
@defmac LD_INIT_SWITCH
8413
If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
8414
the following symbol is an initialization routine.
8415
@end defmac
8416
 
8417
@defmac LD_FINI_SWITCH
8418
If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
8419
the following symbol is a finalization routine.
8420
@end defmac
8421
 
8422
@defmac COLLECT_SHARED_INIT_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
8423
If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
8424
automatically called when a shared library is loaded.  The function
8425
should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments.  If not defined, and
8426
the object format requires an explicit initialization function, then a
8427
function called @code{_GLOBAL__DI} will be generated.
8428
 
8429
This function and the following one are used by collect2 when linking a
8430
shared library that needs constructors or destructors, or has DWARF2
8431
exception tables embedded in the code.
8432
@end defmac
8433
 
8434
@defmac COLLECT_SHARED_FINI_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
8435
If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
8436
automatically called when a shared library is unloaded.  The function
8437
should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments.  If not defined, and
8438
the object format requires an explicit finalization function, then a
8439
function called @code{_GLOBAL__DD} will be generated.
8440
@end defmac
8441
 
8442
@defmac INVOKE__main
8443
If defined, @code{main} will call @code{__main} despite the presence of
8444
@code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.  This macro should be defined for systems
8445
where the init section is not actually run automatically, but is still
8446
useful for collecting the lists of constructors and destructors.
8447
@end defmac
8448
 
8449
@defmac SUPPORTS_INIT_PRIORITY
8450
If nonzero, the C++ @code{init_priority} attribute is supported and the
8451
compiler should emit instructions to control the order of initialization
8452
of objects.  If zero, the compiler will issue an error message upon
8453
encountering an @code{init_priority} attribute.
8454
@end defmac
8455
 
8456
@deftypevr {Target Hook} bool TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS
8457
This value is true if the target supports some ``native'' method of
8458
collecting constructors and destructors to be run at startup and exit.
8459
It is false if we must use @command{collect2}.
8460
@end deftypevr
8461
 
8462
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR (rtx @var{symbol}, int @var{priority})
8463
If defined, a function that outputs assembler code to arrange to call
8464
the function referenced by @var{symbol} at initialization time.
8465
 
8466
Assume that @var{symbol} is a @code{SYMBOL_REF} for a function taking
8467
no arguments and with no return value.  If the target supports initialization
8468
priorities, @var{priority} is a value between 0 and @code{MAX_INIT_PRIORITY};
8469
otherwise it must be @code{DEFAULT_INIT_PRIORITY}.
8470
 
8471
If this macro is not defined by the target, a suitable default will
8472
be chosen if (1) the target supports arbitrary section names, (2) the
8473
target defines @code{CTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP}, or (3) @code{USE_COLLECT2}
8474
is not defined.
8475
@end deftypefn
8476
 
8477
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR (rtx @var{symbol}, int @var{priority})
8478
This is like @code{TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR} but used for termination
8479
functions rather than initialization functions.
8480
@end deftypefn
8481
 
8482
If @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is true, the initialization routine
8483
generated for the generated object file will have static linkage.
8484
 
8485
If your system uses @command{collect2} as the means of processing
8486
constructors, then that program normally uses @command{nm} to scan
8487
an object file for constructor functions to be called.
8488
 
8489
On certain kinds of systems, you can define this macro to make
8490
@command{collect2} work faster (and, in some cases, make it work at all):
8491
 
8492
@defmac OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
8493
Define this macro if the system uses COFF (Common Object File Format)
8494
object files, so that @command{collect2} can assume this format and scan
8495
object files directly for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
8496
 
8497
This macro is effective only in a native compiler; @command{collect2} as
8498
part of a cross compiler always uses @command{nm} for the target machine.
8499
@end defmac
8500
 
8501
@defmac REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
8502
Define this macro as a C string constant containing the file name to use
8503
to execute @command{nm}.  The default is to search the path normally for
8504
@command{nm}.
8505
@end defmac
8506
 
8507
@defmac NM_FLAGS
8508
@command{collect2} calls @command{nm} to scan object files for static
8509
constructors and destructors and LTO info.  By default, @option{-n} is
8510
passed.  Define @code{NM_FLAGS} to a C string constant if other options
8511
are needed to get the same output format as GNU @command{nm -n}
8512
produces.
8513
@end defmac
8514
 
8515
If your system supports shared libraries and has a program to list the
8516
dynamic dependencies of a given library or executable, you can define
8517
these macros to enable support for running initialization and
8518
termination functions in shared libraries:
8519
 
8520
@defmac LDD_SUFFIX
8521
Define this macro to a C string constant containing the name of the program
8522
which lists dynamic dependencies, like @command{ldd} under SunOS 4.
8523
@end defmac
8524
 
8525
@defmac PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT (@var{ptr})
8526
Define this macro to be C code that extracts filenames from the output
8527
of the program denoted by @code{LDD_SUFFIX}.  @var{ptr} is a variable
8528
of type @code{char *} that points to the beginning of a line of output
8529
from @code{LDD_SUFFIX}.  If the line lists a dynamic dependency, the
8530
code must advance @var{ptr} to the beginning of the filename on that
8531
line.  Otherwise, it must set @var{ptr} to @code{NULL}.
8532
@end defmac
8533
 
8534
@defmac SHLIB_SUFFIX
8535
Define this macro to a C string constant containing the default shared
8536
library extension of the target (e.g., @samp{".so"}).  @command{collect2}
8537
strips version information after this suffix when generating global
8538
constructor and destructor names.  This define is only needed on targets
8539
that use @command{collect2} to process constructors and destructors.
8540
@end defmac
8541
 
8542
@node Instruction Output
8543
@subsection Output of Assembler Instructions
8544
 
8545
@c prevent bad page break with this line
8546
This describes assembler instruction output.
8547
 
8548
@defmac REGISTER_NAMES
8549
A C initializer containing the assembler's names for the machine
8550
registers, each one as a C string constant.  This is what translates
8551
register numbers in the compiler into assembler language.
8552
@end defmac
8553
 
8554
@defmac ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
8555
If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a name
8556
and a register number.  This macro defines additional names for hard
8557
registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in declarations to refer
8558
to registers using alternate names.
8559
@end defmac
8560
 
8561
@defmac OVERLAPPING_REGISTER_NAMES
8562
If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a
8563
name, a register number and a count of the number of consecutive
8564
machine registers the name overlaps.  This macro defines additional
8565
names for hard registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in
8566
declarations to refer to registers using alternate names.  Unlike
8567
@code{ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES}, this macro should be used when the
8568
register name implies multiple underlying registers.
8569
 
8570
This macro should be used when it is important that a clobber in an
8571
@code{asm} statement clobbers all the underlying values implied by the
8572
register name.  For example, on ARM, clobbering the double-precision
8573
VFP register ``d0'' implies clobbering both single-precision registers
8574
``s0'' and ``s1''.
8575
@end defmac
8576
 
8577
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE (@var{stream}, @var{ptr})
8578
Define this macro if you are using an unusual assembler that
8579
requires different names for the machine instructions.
8580
 
8581
The definition is a C statement or statements which output an
8582
assembler instruction opcode to the stdio stream @var{stream}.  The
8583
macro-operand @var{ptr} is a variable of type @code{char *} which
8584
points to the opcode name in its ``internal'' form---the form that is
8585
written in the machine description.  The definition should output the
8586
opcode name to @var{stream}, performing any translation you desire, and
8587
increment the variable @var{ptr} to point at the end of the opcode
8588
so that it will not be output twice.
8589
 
8590
In fact, your macro definition may process less than the entire opcode
8591
name, or more than the opcode name; but if you want to process text
8592
that includes @samp{%}-sequences to substitute operands, you must take
8593
care of the substitution yourself.  Just be sure to increment
8594
@var{ptr} over whatever text should not be output normally.
8595
 
8596
@findex recog_data.operand
8597
If you need to look at the operand values, they can be found as the
8598
elements of @code{recog_data.operand}.
8599
 
8600
If the macro definition does nothing, the instruction is output
8601
in the usual way.
8602
@end defmac
8603
 
8604
@defmac FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN (@var{insn}, @var{opvec}, @var{noperands})
8605
If defined, a C statement to be executed just prior to the output of
8606
assembler code for @var{insn}, to modify the extracted operands so
8607
they will be output differently.
8608
 
8609
Here the argument @var{opvec} is the vector containing the operands
8610
extracted from @var{insn}, and @var{noperands} is the number of
8611
elements of the vector which contain meaningful data for this insn.
8612
The contents of this vector are what will be used to convert the insn
8613
template into assembler code, so you can change the assembler output
8614
by changing the contents of the vector.
8615
 
8616
This macro is useful when various assembler syntaxes share a single
8617
file of instruction patterns; by defining this macro differently, you
8618
can cause a large class of instructions to be output differently (such
8619
as with rearranged operands).  Naturally, variations in assembler
8620
syntax affecting individual insn patterns ought to be handled by
8621
writing conditional output routines in those patterns.
8622
 
8623
If this macro is not defined, it is equivalent to a null statement.
8624
@end defmac
8625
 
8626
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_FINAL_POSTSCAN_INSN (FILE *@var{file}, rtx @var{insn}, rtx *@var{opvec}, int @var{noperands})
8627
If defined, this target hook is a function which is executed just after the
8628
output of assembler code for @var{insn}, to change the mode of the assembler
8629
if necessary.
8630
 
8631
Here the argument @var{opvec} is the vector containing the operands
8632
extracted from @var{insn}, and @var{noperands} is the number of
8633
elements of the vector which contain meaningful data for this insn.
8634
The contents of this vector are what was used to convert the insn
8635
template into assembler code, so you can change the assembler mode
8636
by checking the contents of the vector.
8637
@end deftypefn
8638
 
8639
@defmac PRINT_OPERAND (@var{stream}, @var{x}, @var{code})
8640
A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
8641
assembler syntax for an instruction operand @var{x}.  @var{x} is an
8642
RTL expression.
8643
 
8644
@var{code} is a value that can be used to specify one of several ways
8645
of printing the operand.  It is used when identical operands must be
8646
printed differently depending on the context.  @var{code} comes from
8647
the @samp{%} specification that was used to request printing of the
8648
operand.  If the specification was just @samp{%@var{digit}} then
8649
@var{code} is 0; if the specification was @samp{%@var{ltr}
8650
@var{digit}} then @var{code} is the ASCII code for @var{ltr}.
8651
 
8652
@findex reg_names
8653
If @var{x} is a register, this macro should print the register's name.
8654
The names can be found in an array @code{reg_names} whose type is
8655
@code{char *[]}.  @code{reg_names} is initialized from
8656
@code{REGISTER_NAMES}.
8657
 
8658
When the machine description has a specification @samp{%@var{punct}}
8659
(a @samp{%} followed by a punctuation character), this macro is called
8660
with a null pointer for @var{x} and the punctuation character for
8661
@var{code}.
8662
@end defmac
8663
 
8664
@defmac PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P (@var{code})
8665
A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{code} is a valid
8666
punctuation character for use in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro.  If
8667
@code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} is not defined, it means that no
8668
punctuation characters (except for the standard one, @samp{%}) are used
8669
in this way.
8670
@end defmac
8671
 
8672
@defmac PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS (@var{stream}, @var{x})
8673
A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
8674
assembler syntax for an instruction operand that is a memory reference
8675
whose address is @var{x}.  @var{x} is an RTL expression.
8676
 
8677
@cindex @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} usage
8678
On some machines, the syntax for a symbolic address depends on the
8679
section that the address refers to.  On these machines, define the hook
8680
@code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
8681
@code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here.  @xref{Assembler
8682
Format}.
8683
@end defmac
8684
 
8685
@findex dbr_sequence_length
8686
@defmac DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND (@var{file})
8687
A C statement, to be executed after all slot-filler instructions have
8688
been output.  If necessary, call @code{dbr_sequence_length} to
8689
determine the number of slots filled in a sequence (zero if not
8690
currently outputting a sequence), to decide how many no-ops to output,
8691
or whatever.
8692
 
8693
Don't define this macro if it has nothing to do, but it is helpful in
8694
reading assembly output if the extent of the delay sequence is made
8695
explicit (e.g.@: with white space).
8696
@end defmac
8697
 
8698
@findex final_sequence
8699
Note that output routines for instructions with delay slots must be
8700
prepared to deal with not being output as part of a sequence
8701
(i.e.@: when the scheduling pass is not run, or when no slot fillers could be
8702
found.)  The variable @code{final_sequence} is null when not
8703
processing a sequence, otherwise it contains the @code{sequence} rtx
8704
being output.
8705
 
8706
@findex asm_fprintf
8707
@defmac REGISTER_PREFIX
8708
@defmacx LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
8709
@defmacx USER_LABEL_PREFIX
8710
@defmacx IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
8711
If defined, C string expressions to be used for the @samp{%R}, @samp{%L},
8712
@samp{%U}, and @samp{%I} options of @code{asm_fprintf} (see
8713
@file{final.c}).  These are useful when a single @file{md} file must
8714
support multiple assembler formats.  In that case, the various @file{tm.h}
8715
files can define these macros differently.
8716
@end defmac
8717
 
8718
@defmac ASM_FPRINTF_EXTENSIONS (@var{file}, @var{argptr}, @var{format})
8719
If defined this macro should expand to a series of @code{case}
8720
statements which will be parsed inside the @code{switch} statement of
8721
the @code{asm_fprintf} function.  This allows targets to define extra
8722
printf formats which may useful when generating their assembler
8723
statements.  Note that uppercase letters are reserved for future
8724
generic extensions to asm_fprintf, and so are not available to target
8725
specific code.  The output file is given by the parameter @var{file}.
8726
The varargs input pointer is @var{argptr} and the rest of the format
8727
string, starting the character after the one that is being switched
8728
upon, is pointed to by @var{format}.
8729
@end defmac
8730
 
8731
@defmac ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
8732
If your target supports multiple dialects of assembler language (such as
8733
different opcodes), define this macro as a C expression that gives the
8734
numeric index of the assembler language dialect to use, with zero as the
8735
first variant.
8736
 
8737
If this macro is defined, you may use constructs of the form
8738
@smallexample
8739
@samp{@{option0|option1|option2@dots{}@}}
8740
@end smallexample
8741
@noindent
8742
in the output templates of patterns (@pxref{Output Template}) or in the
8743
first argument of @code{asm_fprintf}.  This construct outputs
8744
@samp{option0}, @samp{option1}, @samp{option2}, etc., if the value of
8745
@code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is zero, one, two, etc.  Any special characters
8746
within these strings retain their usual meaning.  If there are fewer
8747
alternatives within the braces than the value of
8748
@code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT}, the construct outputs nothing.
8749
 
8750
If you do not define this macro, the characters @samp{@{}, @samp{|} and
8751
@samp{@}} do not have any special meaning when used in templates or
8752
operands to @code{asm_fprintf}.
8753
 
8754
Define the macros @code{REGISTER_PREFIX}, @code{LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX},
8755
@code{USER_LABEL_PREFIX} and @code{IMMEDIATE_PREFIX} if you can express
8756
the variations in assembler language syntax with that mechanism.  Define
8757
@code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} and use the @samp{@{option0|option1@}} syntax
8758
if the syntax variant are larger and involve such things as different
8759
opcodes or operand order.
8760
@end defmac
8761
 
8762
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
8763
A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
8764
which will push hard register number @var{regno} onto the stack.
8765
The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
8766
profiling.
8767
@end defmac
8768
 
8769
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
8770
A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
8771
which will pop hard register number @var{regno} off of the stack.
8772
The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
8773
profiling.
8774
@end defmac
8775
 
8776
@node Dispatch Tables
8777
@subsection Output of Dispatch Tables
8778
 
8779
@c prevent bad page break with this line
8780
This concerns dispatch tables.
8781
 
8782
@cindex dispatch table
8783
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{body}, @var{value}, @var{rel})
8784
A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
8785
pseudo-instruction to generate a difference between two labels.
8786
@var{value} and @var{rel} are the numbers of two internal labels.  The
8787
definitions of these labels are output using
8788
@code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}, and they must be printed in the same
8789
way here.  For example,
8790
 
8791
@smallexample
8792
fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d-L%d\n",
8793
         @var{value}, @var{rel})
8794
@end smallexample
8795
 
8796
You must provide this macro on machines where the addresses in a
8797
dispatch table are relative to the table's own address.  If defined, GCC
8798
will also use this macro on all machines when producing PIC@.
8799
@var{body} is the body of the @code{ADDR_DIFF_VEC}; it is provided so that the
8800
mode and flags can be read.
8801
@end defmac
8802
 
8803
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
8804
This macro should be provided on machines where the addresses
8805
in a dispatch table are absolute.
8806
 
8807
The definition should be a C statement to output to the stdio stream
8808
@var{stream} an assembler pseudo-instruction to generate a reference to
8809
a label.  @var{value} is the number of an internal label whose
8810
definition is output using @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
8811
For example,
8812
 
8813
@smallexample
8814
fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d\n", @var{value})
8815
@end smallexample
8816
@end defmac
8817
 
8818
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num}, @var{table})
8819
Define this if the label before a jump-table needs to be output
8820
specially.  The first three arguments are the same as for
8821
@code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}; the fourth argument is the
8822
jump-table which follows (a @code{jump_insn} containing an
8823
@code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec}).
8824
 
8825
This feature is used on system V to output a @code{swbeg} statement
8826
for the table.
8827
 
8828
If this macro is not defined, these labels are output with
8829
@code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
8830
@end defmac
8831
 
8832
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END (@var{stream}, @var{num}, @var{table})
8833
Define this if something special must be output at the end of a
8834
jump-table.  The definition should be a C statement to be executed
8835
after the assembler code for the table is written.  It should write
8836
the appropriate code to stdio stream @var{stream}.  The argument
8837
@var{table} is the jump-table insn, and @var{num} is the label-number
8838
of the preceding label.
8839
 
8840
If this macro is not defined, nothing special is output at the end of
8841
the jump-table.
8842
@end defmac
8843
 
8844
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_EMIT_UNWIND_LABEL (FILE *@var{stream}, tree @var{decl}, int @var{for_eh}, int @var{empty})
8845
This target hook emits a label at the beginning of each FDE@.  It
8846
should be defined on targets where FDEs need special labels, and it
8847
should write the appropriate label, for the FDE associated with the
8848
function declaration @var{decl}, to the stdio stream @var{stream}.
8849
The third argument, @var{for_eh}, is a boolean: true if this is for an
8850
exception table.  The fourth argument, @var{empty}, is a boolean:
8851
true if this is a placeholder label for an omitted FDE@.
8852
 
8853
The default is that FDEs are not given nonlocal labels.
8854
@end deftypefn
8855
 
8856
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_TABLE_LABEL (FILE *@var{stream})
8857
This target hook emits a label at the beginning of the exception table.
8858
It should be defined on targets where it is desirable for the table
8859
to be broken up according to function.
8860
 
8861
The default is that no label is emitted.
8862
@end deftypefn
8863
 
8864
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_PERSONALITY (rtx @var{personality})
8865
If the target implements @code{TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT}, this hook may be used to emit a directive to install a personality hook into the unwind info.  This hook should not be used if dwarf2 unwind info is used.
8866
@end deftypefn
8867
 
8868
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT (FILE *@var{stream}, rtx @var{insn})
8869
This target hook emits assembly directives required to unwind the
8870
given instruction.  This is only used when @code{TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO}
8871
returns @code{UI_TARGET}.
8872
@end deftypefn
8873
 
8874
@deftypevr {Target Hook} bool TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT_BEFORE_INSN
8875
True if the @code{TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT} hook should be called before the assembly for @var{insn} has been emitted, false if the hook should be called afterward.
8876
@end deftypevr
8877
 
8878
@node Exception Region Output
8879
@subsection Assembler Commands for Exception Regions
8880
 
8881
@c prevent bad page break with this line
8882
 
8883
This describes commands marking the start and the end of an exception
8884
region.
8885
 
8886
@defmac EH_FRAME_SECTION_NAME
8887
If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing
8888
exception handling frame unwind information.  If not defined, GCC will
8889
provide a default definition if the target supports named sections.
8890
@file{crtstuff.c} uses this macro to switch to the appropriate section.
8891
 
8892
You should define this symbol if your target supports DWARF 2 frame
8893
unwind information and the default definition does not work.
8894
@end defmac
8895
 
8896
@defmac EH_FRAME_IN_DATA_SECTION
8897
If defined, DWARF 2 frame unwind information will be placed in the
8898
data section even though the target supports named sections.  This
8899
might be necessary, for instance, if the system linker does garbage
8900
collection and sections cannot be marked as not to be collected.
8901
 
8902
Do not define this macro unless @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION} is
8903
also defined.
8904
@end defmac
8905
 
8906
@defmac EH_TABLES_CAN_BE_READ_ONLY
8907
Define this macro to 1 if your target is such that no frame unwind
8908
information encoding used with non-PIC code will ever require a
8909
runtime relocation, but the linker may not support merging read-only
8910
and read-write sections into a single read-write section.
8911
@end defmac
8912
 
8913
@defmac MASK_RETURN_ADDR
8914
An rtx used to mask the return address found via @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX}, so
8915
that it does not contain any extraneous set bits in it.
8916
@end defmac
8917
 
8918
@defmac DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
8919
Define this macro to 0 if your target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
8920
information, but it does not yet work with exception handling.
8921
Otherwise, if your target supports this information (if it defines
8922
@code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either @code{UNALIGNED_INT_ASM_OP}
8923
or @code{OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF}), GCC will provide a default definition of 1.
8924
@end defmac
8925
 
8926
@deftypefn {Common Target Hook} {enum unwind_info_type} TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO (struct gcc_options *@var{opts})
8927
This hook defines the mechanism that will be used for exception handling
8928
by the target.  If the target has ABI specified unwind tables, the hook
8929
should return @code{UI_TARGET}.  If the target is to use the
8930
@code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling scheme, the hook
8931
should return @code{UI_SJLJ}.  If the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
8932
information, the hook should return @code{UI_DWARF2}.
8933
 
8934
A target may, if exceptions are disabled, choose to return @code{UI_NONE}.
8935
This may end up simplifying other parts of target-specific code.  The
8936
default implementation of this hook never returns @code{UI_NONE}.
8937
 
8938
Note that the value returned by this hook should be constant.  It should
8939
not depend on anything except the command-line switches described by
8940
@var{opts}.  In particular, the
8941
setting @code{UI_SJLJ} must be fixed at compiler start-up as C pre-processor
8942
macros and builtin functions related to exception handling are set up
8943
depending on this setting.
8944
 
8945
The default implementation of the hook first honors the
8946
@option{--enable-sjlj-exceptions} configure option, then
8947
@code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO}, and finally defaults to @code{UI_SJLJ}.  If
8948
@code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO} depends on command-line options, the target
8949
must define this hook so that @var{opts} is used correctly.
8950
@end deftypefn
8951
 
8952
@deftypevr {Common Target Hook} bool TARGET_UNWIND_TABLES_DEFAULT
8953
This variable should be set to @code{true} if the target ABI requires unwinding
8954
tables even when exceptions are not used.  It must not be modified by
8955
command-line option processing.
8956
@end deftypevr
8957
 
8958
@defmac DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP
8959
Define this macro to 1 if the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based scheme
8960
should use the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp} functions from the C library
8961
instead of the @code{__builtin_setjmp}/@code{__builtin_longjmp} machinery.
8962
@end defmac
8963
 
8964
@defmac DWARF_CIE_DATA_ALIGNMENT
8965
This macro need only be defined if the target might save registers in the
8966
function prologue at an offset to the stack pointer that is not aligned to
8967
@code{UNITS_PER_WORD}.  The definition should be the negative minimum
8968
alignment if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is defined, and the positive
8969
minimum alignment otherwise.  @xref{SDB and DWARF}.  Only applicable if
8970
the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind information.
8971
@end defmac
8972
 
8973
@deftypevr {Target Hook} bool TARGET_TERMINATE_DW2_EH_FRAME_INFO
8974
Contains the value true if the target should add a zero word onto the
8975
end of a Dwarf-2 frame info section when used for exception handling.
8976
Default value is false if @code{EH_FRAME_SECTION_NAME} is defined, and
8977
true otherwise.
8978
@end deftypevr
8979
 
8980
@deftypefn {Target Hook} rtx TARGET_DWARF_REGISTER_SPAN (rtx @var{reg})
8981
Given a register, this hook should return a parallel of registers to
8982
represent where to find the register pieces.  Define this hook if the
8983
register and its mode are represented in Dwarf in non-contiguous
8984
locations, or if the register should be represented in more than one
8985
register in Dwarf.  Otherwise, this hook should return @code{NULL_RTX}.
8986
If not defined, the default is to return @code{NULL_RTX}.
8987
@end deftypefn
8988
 
8989
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_INIT_DWARF_REG_SIZES_EXTRA (tree @var{address})
8990
If some registers are represented in Dwarf-2 unwind information in
8991
multiple pieces, define this hook to fill in information about the
8992
sizes of those pieces in the table used by the unwinder at runtime.
8993
It will be called by @code{expand_builtin_init_dwarf_reg_sizes} after
8994
filling in a single size corresponding to each hard register;
8995
@var{address} is the address of the table.
8996
@end deftypefn
8997
 
8998
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_ASM_TTYPE (rtx @var{sym})
8999
This hook is used to output a reference from a frame unwinding table to
9000
the type_info object identified by @var{sym}.  It should return @code{true}
9001
if the reference was output.  Returning @code{false} will cause the
9002
reference to be output using the normal Dwarf2 routines.
9003
@end deftypefn
9004
 
9005
@deftypevr {Target Hook} bool TARGET_ARM_EABI_UNWINDER
9006
This flag should be set to @code{true} on targets that use an ARM EABI
9007
based unwinding library, and @code{false} on other targets.  This effects
9008
the format of unwinding tables, and how the unwinder in entered after
9009
running a cleanup.  The default is @code{false}.
9010
@end deftypevr
9011
 
9012
@node Alignment Output
9013
@subsection Assembler Commands for Alignment
9014
 
9015
@c prevent bad page break with this line
9016
This describes commands for alignment.
9017
 
9018
@defmac JUMP_ALIGN (@var{label})
9019
The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which is
9020
a common destination of jumps and has no fallthru incoming edge.
9021
 
9022
This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
9023
to be done at such a time.  Most machine descriptions do not currently
9024
define the macro.
9025
 
9026
Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
9027
to set the variable @var{align_jumps} in the target's
9028
@code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}.  Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
9029
selection in @var{align_jumps} in a @code{JUMP_ALIGN} implementation.
9030
@end defmac
9031
 
9032
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_ASM_JUMP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP (rtx @var{label})
9033
The maximum number of bytes to skip before @var{label} when applying
9034
@code{JUMP_ALIGN}.  This works only if
9035
@code{ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN} is defined.
9036
@end deftypefn
9037
 
9038
@defmac LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER (@var{label})
9039
The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
9040
a @code{BARRIER}.
9041
 
9042
This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
9043
to be done at such a time.  Most machine descriptions do not currently
9044
define the macro.
9045
@end defmac
9046
 
9047
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_ASM_LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER_MAX_SKIP (rtx @var{label})
9048
The maximum number of bytes to skip before @var{label} when applying
9049
@code{LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER}.  This works only if
9050
@code{ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN} is defined.
9051
@end deftypefn
9052
 
9053
@defmac LOOP_ALIGN (@var{label})
9054
The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
9055
a @code{NOTE_INSN_LOOP_BEG} note.
9056
 
9057
This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
9058
to be done at such a time.  Most machine descriptions do not currently
9059
define the macro.
9060
 
9061
Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
9062
to set the variable @code{align_loops} in the target's
9063
@code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}.  Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
9064
selection in @code{align_loops} in a @code{LOOP_ALIGN} implementation.
9065
@end defmac
9066
 
9067
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_ASM_LOOP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP (rtx @var{label})
9068
The maximum number of bytes to skip when applying @code{LOOP_ALIGN} to
9069
@var{label}.  This works only if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN} is
9070
defined.
9071
@end deftypefn
9072
 
9073
@defmac LABEL_ALIGN (@var{label})
9074
The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}.
9075
If @code{LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER} / @code{LOOP_ALIGN} specify a different alignment,
9076
the maximum of the specified values is used.
9077
 
9078
Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
9079
to set the variable @code{align_labels} in the target's
9080
@code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}.  Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
9081
selection in @code{align_labels} in a @code{LABEL_ALIGN} implementation.
9082
@end defmac
9083
 
9084
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_ASM_LABEL_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP (rtx @var{label})
9085
The maximum number of bytes to skip when applying @code{LABEL_ALIGN}
9086
to @var{label}.  This works only if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN}
9087
is defined.
9088
@end deftypefn
9089
 
9090
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP (@var{stream}, @var{nbytes})
9091
A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
9092
instruction to advance the location counter by @var{nbytes} bytes.
9093
Those bytes should be zero when loaded.  @var{nbytes} will be a C
9094
expression of type @code{unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT}.
9095
@end defmac
9096
 
9097
@defmac ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
9098
Define this macro if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP} should not be used in the
9099
text section because it fails to put zeros in the bytes that are skipped.
9100
This is true on many Unix systems, where the pseudo--op to skip bytes
9101
produces no-op instructions rather than zeros when used in the text
9102
section.
9103
@end defmac
9104
 
9105
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power})
9106
A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
9107
command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
9108
@var{power} bytes.  @var{power} will be a C expression of type @code{int}.
9109
@end defmac
9110
 
9111
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN_WITH_NOP (@var{stream}, @var{power})
9112
Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN}, except that the ``nop'' instruction is used
9113
for padding, if necessary.
9114
@end defmac
9115
 
9116
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power}, @var{max_skip})
9117
A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
9118
command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
9119
@var{power} bytes, but only if @var{max_skip} or fewer bytes are needed to
9120
satisfy the alignment request.  @var{power} and @var{max_skip} will be
9121
a C expression of type @code{int}.
9122
@end defmac
9123
 
9124
@need 3000
9125
@node Debugging Info
9126
@section Controlling Debugging Information Format
9127
 
9128
@c prevent bad page break with this line
9129
This describes how to specify debugging information.
9130
 
9131
@menu
9132
* All Debuggers::      Macros that affect all debugging formats uniformly.
9133
* DBX Options::        Macros enabling specific options in DBX format.
9134
* DBX Hooks::          Hook macros for varying DBX format.
9135
* File Names and DBX:: Macros controlling output of file names in DBX format.
9136
* SDB and DWARF::      Macros for SDB (COFF) and DWARF formats.
9137
* VMS Debug::          Macros for VMS debug format.
9138
@end menu
9139
 
9140
@node All Debuggers
9141
@subsection Macros Affecting All Debugging Formats
9142
 
9143
@c prevent bad page break with this line
9144
These macros affect all debugging formats.
9145
 
9146
@defmac DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})
9147
A C expression that returns the DBX register number for the compiler
9148
register number @var{regno}.  In the default macro provided, the value
9149
of this expression will be @var{regno} itself.  But sometimes there are
9150
some registers that the compiler knows about and DBX does not, or vice
9151
versa.  In such cases, some register may need to have one number in the
9152
compiler and another for DBX@.
9153
 
9154
If two registers have consecutive numbers inside GCC, and they can be
9155
used as a pair to hold a multiword value, then they @emph{must} have
9156
consecutive numbers after renumbering with @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER}.
9157
Otherwise, debuggers will be unable to access such a pair, because they
9158
expect register pairs to be consecutive in their own numbering scheme.
9159
 
9160
If you find yourself defining @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER} in way that
9161
does not preserve register pairs, then what you must do instead is
9162
redefine the actual register numbering scheme.
9163
@end defmac
9164
 
9165
@defmac DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET (@var{x})
9166
A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an automatic
9167
variable having address @var{x} (an RTL expression).  The default
9168
computation assumes that @var{x} is based on the frame-pointer and
9169
gives the offset from the frame-pointer.  This is required for targets
9170
that produce debugging output for DBX or COFF-style debugging output
9171
for SDB and allow the frame-pointer to be eliminated when the
9172
@option{-g} options is used.
9173
@end defmac
9174
 
9175
@defmac DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET (@var{offset}, @var{x})
9176
A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an argument
9177
having address @var{x} (an RTL expression).  The nominal offset is
9178
@var{offset}.
9179
@end defmac
9180
 
9181
@defmac PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
9182
A C expression that returns the type of debugging output GCC should
9183
produce when the user specifies just @option{-g}.  Define
9184
this if you have arranged for GCC to support more than one format of
9185
debugging output.  Currently, the allowable values are @code{DBX_DEBUG},
9186
@code{SDB_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF2_DEBUG},
9187
@code{XCOFF_DEBUG}, @code{VMS_DEBUG}, and @code{VMS_AND_DWARF2_DEBUG}.
9188
 
9189
When the user specifies @option{-ggdb}, GCC normally also uses the
9190
value of this macro to select the debugging output format, but with two
9191
exceptions.  If @code{DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO} is defined, GCC uses the
9192
value @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}.  Otherwise, if @code{DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO} is
9193
defined, GCC uses @code{DBX_DEBUG}.
9194
 
9195
The value of this macro only affects the default debugging output; the
9196
user can always get a specific type of output by using @option{-gstabs},
9197
@option{-gcoff}, @option{-gdwarf-2}, @option{-gxcoff}, or @option{-gvms}.
9198
@end defmac
9199
 
9200
@node DBX Options
9201
@subsection Specific Options for DBX Output
9202
 
9203
@c prevent bad page break with this line
9204
These are specific options for DBX output.
9205
 
9206
@defmac DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
9207
Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for DBX
9208
in response to the @option{-g} option.
9209
@end defmac
9210
 
9211
@defmac XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
9212
Define this macro if GCC should produce XCOFF format debugging output
9213
in response to the @option{-g} option.  This is a variant of DBX format.
9214
@end defmac
9215
 
9216
@defmac DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
9217
Define this macro to control whether GCC should by default generate
9218
GDB's extended version of DBX debugging information (assuming DBX-format
9219
debugging information is enabled at all).  If you don't define the
9220
macro, the default is 1: always generate the extended information
9221
if there is any occasion to.
9222
@end defmac
9223
 
9224
@defmac DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
9225
Define this macro if all @code{.stabs} commands should be output while
9226
in the text section.
9227
@end defmac
9228
 
9229
@defmac ASM_STABS_OP
9230
A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
9231
use instead of @code{"\t.stabs\t"} to define an ordinary debugging symbol.
9232
If you don't define this macro, @code{"\t.stabs\t"} is used.  This macro
9233
applies only to DBX debugging information format.
9234
@end defmac
9235
 
9236
@defmac ASM_STABD_OP
9237
A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
9238
use instead of @code{"\t.stabd\t"} to define a debugging symbol whose
9239
value is the current location.  If you don't define this macro,
9240
@code{"\t.stabd\t"} is used.  This macro applies only to DBX debugging
9241
information format.
9242
@end defmac
9243
 
9244
@defmac ASM_STABN_OP
9245
A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
9246
use instead of @code{"\t.stabn\t"} to define a debugging symbol with no
9247
name.  If you don't define this macro, @code{"\t.stabn\t"} is used.  This
9248
macro applies only to DBX debugging information format.
9249
@end defmac
9250
 
9251
@defmac DBX_NO_XREFS
9252
Define this macro if DBX on your system does not support the construct
9253
@samp{xs@var{tagname}}.  On some systems, this construct is used to
9254
describe a forward reference to a structure named @var{tagname}.
9255
On other systems, this construct is not supported at all.
9256
@end defmac
9257
 
9258
@defmac DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
9259
A symbol name in DBX-format debugging information is normally
9260
continued (split into two separate @code{.stabs} directives) when it
9261
exceeds a certain length (by default, 80 characters).  On some
9262
operating systems, DBX requires this splitting; on others, splitting
9263
must not be done.  You can inhibit splitting by defining this macro
9264
with the value zero.  You can override the default splitting-length by
9265
defining this macro as an expression for the length you desire.
9266
@end defmac
9267
 
9268
@defmac DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
9269
Normally continuation is indicated by adding a @samp{\} character to
9270
the end of a @code{.stabs} string when a continuation follows.  To use
9271
a different character instead, define this macro as a character
9272
constant for the character you want to use.  Do not define this macro
9273
if backslash is correct for your system.
9274
@end defmac
9275
 
9276
@defmac DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
9277
Define this macro if it is necessary to go to the data section before
9278
outputting the @samp{.stabs} pseudo-op for a non-global static
9279
variable.
9280
@end defmac
9281
 
9282
@defmac DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
9283
The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
9284
for a typedef.  The default is @code{N_LSYM}.
9285
@end defmac
9286
 
9287
@defmac DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
9288
The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
9289
for a static variable located in the text section.  DBX format does not
9290
provide any ``right'' way to do this.  The default is @code{N_FUN}.
9291
@end defmac
9292
 
9293
@defmac DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
9294
The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
9295
for a parameter passed in registers.  DBX format does not provide any
9296
``right'' way to do this.  The default is @code{N_RSYM}.
9297
@end defmac
9298
 
9299
@defmac DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
9300
The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a parameter
9301
passed in registers.  DBX format does not customarily provide any way to
9302
do this.  The default is @code{'P'}.
9303
@end defmac
9304
 
9305
@defmac DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
9306
Define this macro if the DBX information for a function and its
9307
arguments should precede the assembler code for the function.  Normally,
9308
in DBX format, the debugging information entirely follows the assembler
9309
code.
9310
@end defmac
9311
 
9312
@defmac DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
9313
Define this macro, with value 1, if the value of a symbol describing
9314
the scope of a block (@code{N_LBRAC} or @code{N_RBRAC}) should be
9315
relative to the start of the enclosing function.  Normally, GCC uses
9316
an absolute address.
9317
@end defmac
9318
 
9319
@defmac DBX_LINES_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
9320
Define this macro, with value 1, if the value of a symbol indicating
9321
the current line number (@code{N_SLINE}) should be relative to the
9322
start of the enclosing function.  Normally, GCC uses an absolute address.
9323
@end defmac
9324
 
9325
@defmac DBX_USE_BINCL
9326
Define this macro if GCC should generate @code{N_BINCL} and
9327
@code{N_EINCL} stabs for included header files, as on Sun systems.  This
9328
macro also directs GCC to output a type number as a pair of a file
9329
number and a type number within the file.  Normally, GCC does not
9330
generate @code{N_BINCL} or @code{N_EINCL} stabs, and it outputs a single
9331
number for a type number.
9332
@end defmac
9333
 
9334
@node DBX Hooks
9335
@subsection Open-Ended Hooks for DBX Format
9336
 
9337
@c prevent bad page break with this line
9338
These are hooks for DBX format.
9339
 
9340
@defmac DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC (@var{stream}, @var{name})
9341
Define this macro to say how to output to @var{stream} the debugging
9342
information for the start of a scope level for variable names.  The
9343
argument @var{name} is the name of an assembler symbol (for use with
9344
@code{assemble_name}) whose value is the address where the scope begins.
9345
@end defmac
9346
 
9347
@defmac DBX_OUTPUT_RBRAC (@var{stream}, @var{name})
9348
Like @code{DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC}, but for the end of a scope level.
9349
@end defmac
9350
 
9351
@defmac DBX_OUTPUT_NFUN (@var{stream}, @var{lscope_label}, @var{decl})
9352
Define this macro if the target machine requires special handling to
9353
output an @code{N_FUN} entry for the function @var{decl}.
9354
@end defmac
9355
 
9356
@defmac DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line}, @var{counter})
9357
A C statement to output DBX debugging information before code for line
9358
number @var{line} of the current source file to the stdio stream
9359
@var{stream}.  @var{counter} is the number of time the macro was
9360
invoked, including the current invocation; it is intended to generate
9361
unique labels in the assembly output.
9362
 
9363
This macro should not be defined if the default output is correct, or
9364
if it can be made correct by defining @code{DBX_LINES_FUNCTION_RELATIVE}.
9365
@end defmac
9366
 
9367
@defmac NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
9368
Some stabs encapsulation formats (in particular ECOFF), cannot handle the
9369
@code{.stabs "",N_FUN,,0,0,Lscope-function-1} gdb dbx extension construct.
9370
On those machines, define this macro to turn this feature off without
9371
disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
9372
@end defmac
9373
 
9374
@defmac NO_DBX_BNSYM_ENSYM
9375
Some assemblers cannot handle the @code{.stabd BNSYM/ENSYM,0,0} gdb dbx
9376
extension construct.  On those machines, define this macro to turn this
9377
feature off without disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
9378
@end defmac
9379
 
9380
@node File Names and DBX
9381
@subsection File Names in DBX Format
9382
 
9383
@c prevent bad page break with this line
9384
This describes file names in DBX format.
9385
 
9386
@defmac DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
9387
A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
9388
@var{stream}, which indicates that file @var{name} is the main source
9389
file---the file specified as the input file for compilation.
9390
This macro is called only once, at the beginning of compilation.
9391
 
9392
This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
9393
for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
9394
 
9395
It may be necessary to refer to a label equal to the beginning of the
9396
text section.  You can use @samp{assemble_name (stream, ltext_label_name)}
9397
to do so.  If you do this, you must also set the variable
9398
@var{used_ltext_label_name} to @code{true}.
9399
@end defmac
9400
 
9401
@defmac NO_DBX_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY
9402
Define this macro, with value 1, if GCC should not emit an indication
9403
of the current directory for compilation and current source language at
9404
the beginning of the file.
9405
@end defmac
9406
 
9407
@defmac NO_DBX_GCC_MARKER
9408
Define this macro, with value 1, if GCC should not emit an indication
9409
that this object file was compiled by GCC@.  The default is to emit
9410
an @code{N_OPT} stab at the beginning of every source file, with
9411
@samp{gcc2_compiled.} for the string and value 0.
9412
@end defmac
9413
 
9414
@defmac DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END (@var{stream}, @var{name})
9415
A C statement to output DBX debugging information at the end of
9416
compilation of the main source file @var{name}.  Output should be
9417
written to the stdio stream @var{stream}.
9418
 
9419
If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output at the end
9420
of compilation, which is correct for most machines.
9421
@end defmac
9422
 
9423
@defmac DBX_OUTPUT_NULL_N_SO_AT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END
9424
Define this macro @emph{instead of} defining
9425
@code{DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END}, if what needs to be output at
9426
the end of compilation is an @code{N_SO} stab with an empty string,
9427
whose value is the highest absolute text address in the file.
9428
@end defmac
9429
 
9430
@need 2000
9431
@node SDB and DWARF
9432
@subsection Macros for SDB and DWARF Output
9433
 
9434
@c prevent bad page break with this line
9435
Here are macros for SDB and DWARF output.
9436
 
9437
@defmac SDB_DEBUGGING_INFO
9438
Define this macro if GCC should produce COFF-style debugging output
9439
for SDB in response to the @option{-g} option.
9440
@end defmac
9441
 
9442
@defmac DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
9443
Define this macro if GCC should produce dwarf version 2 format
9444
debugging output in response to the @option{-g} option.
9445
 
9446
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_DWARF_CALLING_CONVENTION (const_tree @var{function})
9447
Define this to enable the dwarf attribute @code{DW_AT_calling_convention} to
9448
be emitted for each function.  Instead of an integer return the enum
9449
value for the @code{DW_CC_} tag.
9450
@end deftypefn
9451
 
9452
To support optional call frame debugging information, you must also
9453
define @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either set
9454
@code{RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P} on the prologue insns if you use RTL for the
9455
prologue, or call @code{dwarf2out_def_cfa} and @code{dwarf2out_reg_save}
9456
as appropriate from @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} if you don't.
9457
@end defmac
9458
 
9459
@defmac DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
9460
Define this macro to a nonzero value if GCC should always output
9461
Dwarf 2 frame information.  If @code{TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO}
9462
(@pxref{Exception Region Output}) returns @code{UI_DWARF2}, and
9463
exceptions are enabled, GCC will output this information not matter
9464
how you define @code{DWARF2_FRAME_INFO}.
9465
@end defmac
9466
 
9467
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {enum unwind_info_type} TARGET_DEBUG_UNWIND_INFO (void)
9468
This hook defines the mechanism that will be used for describing frame
9469
unwind information to the debugger.  Normally the hook will return
9470
@code{UI_DWARF2} if DWARF 2 debug information is enabled, and
9471
return @code{UI_NONE} otherwise.
9472
 
9473
A target may return @code{UI_DWARF2} even when DWARF 2 debug information
9474
is disabled in order to always output DWARF 2 frame information.
9475
 
9476
A target may return @code{UI_TARGET} if it has ABI specified unwind tables.
9477
This will suppress generation of the normal debug frame unwind information.
9478
@end deftypefn
9479
 
9480
@defmac DWARF2_ASM_LINE_DEBUG_INFO
9481
Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the assembler can generate Dwarf 2
9482
line debug info sections.  This will result in much more compact line number
9483
tables, and hence is desirable if it works.
9484
@end defmac
9485
 
9486
@deftypevr {Target Hook} bool TARGET_WANT_DEBUG_PUB_SECTIONS
9487
True if the @code{.debug_pubtypes} and @code{.debug_pubnames} sections should be emitted.  These sections are not used on most platforms, and in particular GDB does not use them.
9488
@end deftypevr
9489
 
9490
@deftypevr {Target Hook} bool TARGET_DELAY_SCHED2
9491
True if sched2 is not to be run at its normal place.  This usually means it will be run as part of machine-specific reorg.
9492
@end deftypevr
9493
 
9494
@deftypevr {Target Hook} bool TARGET_DELAY_VARTRACK
9495
True if vartrack is not to be run at its normal place.  This usually means it will be run as part of machine-specific reorg.
9496
@end deftypevr
9497
 
9498
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
9499
A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
9500
@var{lab1} minus @var{lab2}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
9501
@end defmac
9502
 
9503
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_VMS_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
9504
A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
9505
between the two given labels in system defined units, e.g. instruction
9506
slots on IA64 VMS, using an integer of the given size.
9507
@end defmac
9508
 
9509
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_OFFSET (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label}, @var{section})
9510
A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a
9511
section-relative reference to the given @var{label}, using an integer of the
9512
given @var{size}.  The label is known to be defined in the given @var{section}.
9513
@end defmac
9514
 
9515
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_PCREL (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label})
9516
A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a self-relative
9517
reference to the given @var{label}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
9518
@end defmac
9519
 
9520
@defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_TABLE_REF (@var{label})
9521
A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a reference to
9522
the DWARF table identifier @var{label} from the current section.  This
9523
is used on some systems to avoid garbage collecting a DWARF table which
9524
is referenced by a function.
9525
@end defmac
9526
 
9527
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DTPREL (FILE *@var{file}, int @var{size}, rtx @var{x})
9528
If defined, this target hook is a function which outputs a DTP-relative
9529
reference to the given TLS symbol of the specified size.
9530
@end deftypefn
9531
 
9532
@defmac PUT_SDB_@dots{}
9533
Define these macros to override the assembler syntax for the special
9534
SDB assembler directives.  See @file{sdbout.c} for a list of these
9535
macros and their arguments.  If the standard syntax is used, you need
9536
not define them yourself.
9537
@end defmac
9538
 
9539
@defmac SDB_DELIM
9540
Some assemblers do not support a semicolon as a delimiter, even between
9541
SDB assembler directives.  In that case, define this macro to be the
9542
delimiter to use (usually @samp{\n}).  It is not necessary to define
9543
a new set of @code{PUT_SDB_@var{op}} macros if this is the only change
9544
required.
9545
@end defmac
9546
 
9547
@defmac SDB_ALLOW_UNKNOWN_REFERENCES
9548
Define this macro to allow references to unknown structure,
9549
union, or enumeration tags to be emitted.  Standard COFF does not
9550
allow handling of unknown references, MIPS ECOFF has support for
9551
it.
9552
@end defmac
9553
 
9554
@defmac SDB_ALLOW_FORWARD_REFERENCES
9555
Define this macro to allow references to structure, union, or
9556
enumeration tags that have not yet been seen to be handled.  Some
9557
assemblers choke if forward tags are used, while some require it.
9558
@end defmac
9559
 
9560
@defmac SDB_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line})
9561
A C statement to output SDB debugging information before code for line
9562
number @var{line} of the current source file to the stdio stream
9563
@var{stream}.  The default is to emit an @code{.ln} directive.
9564
@end defmac
9565
 
9566
@need 2000
9567
@node VMS Debug
9568
@subsection Macros for VMS Debug Format
9569
 
9570
@c prevent bad page break with this line
9571
Here are macros for VMS debug format.
9572
 
9573
@defmac VMS_DEBUGGING_INFO
9574
Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for VMS
9575
in response to the @option{-g} option.  The default behavior for VMS
9576
is to generate minimal debug info for a traceback in the absence of
9577
@option{-g} unless explicitly overridden with @option{-g0}.  This
9578
behavior is controlled by @code{TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION} and
9579
@code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}.
9580
@end defmac
9581
 
9582
@node Floating Point
9583
@section Cross Compilation and Floating Point
9584
@cindex cross compilation and floating point
9585
@cindex floating point and cross compilation
9586
 
9587
While all modern machines use twos-complement representation for integers,
9588
there are a variety of representations for floating point numbers.  This
9589
means that in a cross-compiler the representation of floating point numbers
9590
in the compiled program may be different from that used in the machine
9591
doing the compilation.
9592
 
9593
Because different representation systems may offer different amounts of
9594
range and precision, all floating point constants must be represented in
9595
the target machine's format.  Therefore, the cross compiler cannot
9596
safely use the host machine's floating point arithmetic; it must emulate
9597
the target's arithmetic.  To ensure consistency, GCC always uses
9598
emulation to work with floating point values, even when the host and
9599
target floating point formats are identical.
9600
 
9601
The following macros are provided by @file{real.h} for the compiler to
9602
use.  All parts of the compiler which generate or optimize
9603
floating-point calculations must use these macros.  They may evaluate
9604
their operands more than once, so operands must not have side effects.
9605
 
9606
@defmac REAL_VALUE_TYPE
9607
The C data type to be used to hold a floating point value in the target
9608
machine's format.  Typically this is a @code{struct} containing an
9609
array of @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}, but all code should treat it as an opaque
9610
quantity.
9611
@end defmac
9612
 
9613
@deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x}, REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{y})
9614
Compares for equality the two values, @var{x} and @var{y}.  If the target
9615
floating point format supports negative zeroes and/or NaNs,
9616
@samp{REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (-0.0, 0.0)} is true, and
9617
@samp{REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (NaN, NaN)} is false.
9618
@end deftypefn
9619
 
9620
@deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUES_LESS (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x}, REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{y})
9621
Tests whether @var{x} is less than @var{y}.
9622
@end deftypefn
9623
 
9624
@deftypefn Macro HOST_WIDE_INT REAL_VALUE_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
9625
Truncates @var{x} to a signed integer, rounding toward zero.
9626
@end deftypefn
9627
 
9628
@deftypefn Macro {unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT} REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
9629
Truncates @var{x} to an unsigned integer, rounding toward zero.  If
9630
@var{x} is negative, returns zero.
9631
@end deftypefn
9632
 
9633
@deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ATOF (const char *@var{string}, enum machine_mode @var{mode})
9634
Converts @var{string} into a floating point number in the target machine's
9635
representation for mode @var{mode}.  This routine can handle both
9636
decimal and hexadecimal floating point constants, using the syntax
9637
defined by the C language for both.
9638
@end deftypefn
9639
 
9640
@deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
9641
Returns 1 if @var{x} is negative (including negative zero), 0 otherwise.
9642
@end deftypefn
9643
 
9644
@deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISINF (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
9645
Determines whether @var{x} represents infinity (positive or negative).
9646
@end deftypefn
9647
 
9648
@deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISNAN (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
9649
Determines whether @var{x} represents a ``NaN'' (not-a-number).
9650
@end deftypefn
9651
 
9652
@deftypefn Macro void REAL_ARITHMETIC (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{output}, enum tree_code @var{code}, REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x}, REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{y})
9653
Calculates an arithmetic operation on the two floating point values
9654
@var{x} and @var{y}, storing the result in @var{output} (which must be a
9655
variable).
9656
 
9657
The operation to be performed is specified by @var{code}.  Only the
9658
following codes are supported: @code{PLUS_EXPR}, @code{MINUS_EXPR},
9659
@code{MULT_EXPR}, @code{RDIV_EXPR}, @code{MAX_EXPR}, @code{MIN_EXPR}.
9660
 
9661
If @code{REAL_ARITHMETIC} is asked to evaluate division by zero and the
9662
target's floating point format cannot represent infinity, it will call
9663
@code{abort}.  Callers should check for this situation first, using
9664
@code{MODE_HAS_INFINITIES}.  @xref{Storage Layout}.
9665
@end deftypefn
9666
 
9667
@deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
9668
Returns the negative of the floating point value @var{x}.
9669
@end deftypefn
9670
 
9671
@deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ABS (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
9672
Returns the absolute value of @var{x}.
9673
@end deftypefn
9674
 
9675
@deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{mode}, enum machine_mode @var{x})
9676
Truncates the floating point value @var{x} to fit in @var{mode}.  The
9677
return value is still a full-size @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, but it has an
9678
appropriate bit pattern to be output as a floating constant whose
9679
precision accords with mode @var{mode}.
9680
@end deftypefn
9681
 
9682
@deftypefn Macro void REAL_VALUE_TO_INT (HOST_WIDE_INT @var{low}, HOST_WIDE_INT @var{high}, REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
9683
Converts a floating point value @var{x} into a double-precision integer
9684
which is then stored into @var{low} and @var{high}.  If the value is not
9685
integral, it is truncated.
9686
@end deftypefn
9687
 
9688
@deftypefn Macro void REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x}, HOST_WIDE_INT @var{low}, HOST_WIDE_INT @var{high}, enum machine_mode @var{mode})
9689
Converts a double-precision integer found in @var{low} and @var{high},
9690
into a floating point value which is then stored into @var{x}.  The
9691
value is truncated to fit in mode @var{mode}.
9692
@end deftypefn
9693
 
9694
@node Mode Switching
9695
@section Mode Switching Instructions
9696
@cindex mode switching
9697
The following macros control mode switching optimizations:
9698
 
9699
@defmac OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING (@var{entity})
9700
Define this macro if the port needs extra instructions inserted for mode
9701
switching in an optimizing compilation.
9702
 
9703
For an example, the SH4 can perform both single and double precision
9704
floating point operations, but to perform a single precision operation,
9705
the FPSCR PR bit has to be cleared, while for a double precision
9706
operation, this bit has to be set.  Changing the PR bit requires a general
9707
purpose register as a scratch register, hence these FPSCR sets have to
9708
be inserted before reload, i.e.@: you can't put this into instruction emitting
9709
or @code{TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG}.
9710
 
9711
You can have multiple entities that are mode-switched, and select at run time
9712
which entities actually need it.  @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING} should
9713
return nonzero for any @var{entity} that needs mode-switching.
9714
If you define this macro, you also have to define
9715
@code{NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING}, @code{MODE_NEEDED},
9716
@code{MODE_PRIORITY_TO_MODE} and @code{EMIT_MODE_SET}.
9717
@code{MODE_AFTER}, @code{MODE_ENTRY}, and @code{MODE_EXIT}
9718
are optional.
9719
@end defmac
9720
 
9721
@defmac NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING
9722
If you define @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING}, you have to define this as
9723
initializer for an array of integers.  Each initializer element
9724
N refers to an entity that needs mode switching, and specifies the number
9725
of different modes that might need to be set for this entity.
9726
The position of the initializer in the initializer---starting counting at
9727
zero---determines the integer that is used to refer to the mode-switched
9728
entity in question.
9729
In macros that take mode arguments / yield a mode result, modes are
9730
represented as numbers 0 @dots{} N @minus{} 1.  N is used to specify that no mode
9731
switch is needed / supplied.
9732
@end defmac
9733
 
9734
@defmac MODE_NEEDED (@var{entity}, @var{insn})
9735
@var{entity} is an integer specifying a mode-switched entity.  If
9736
@code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING} is defined, you must define this macro to
9737
return an integer value not larger than the corresponding element in
9738
@code{NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING}, to denote the mode that @var{entity} must
9739
be switched into prior to the execution of @var{insn}.
9740
@end defmac
9741
 
9742
@defmac MODE_AFTER (@var{mode}, @var{insn})
9743
If this macro is defined, it is evaluated for every @var{insn} during
9744
mode switching.  It determines the mode that an insn results in (if
9745
different from the incoming mode).
9746
@end defmac
9747
 
9748
@defmac MODE_ENTRY (@var{entity})
9749
If this macro is defined, it is evaluated for every @var{entity} that needs
9750
mode switching.  It should evaluate to an integer, which is a mode that
9751
@var{entity} is assumed to be switched to at function entry.  If @code{MODE_ENTRY}
9752
is defined then @code{MODE_EXIT} must be defined.
9753
@end defmac
9754
 
9755
@defmac MODE_EXIT (@var{entity})
9756
If this macro is defined, it is evaluated for every @var{entity} that needs
9757
mode switching.  It should evaluate to an integer, which is a mode that
9758
@var{entity} is assumed to be switched to at function exit.  If @code{MODE_EXIT}
9759
is defined then @code{MODE_ENTRY} must be defined.
9760
@end defmac
9761
 
9762
@defmac MODE_PRIORITY_TO_MODE (@var{entity}, @var{n})
9763
This macro specifies the order in which modes for @var{entity} are processed.
9764
 
9765
lowest.  The value of the macro should be an integer designating a mode
9766
for @var{entity}.  For any fixed @var{entity}, @code{mode_priority_to_mode}
9767
(@var{entity}, @var{n}) shall be a bijection in 0 @dots{}
9768
@code{num_modes_for_mode_switching[@var{entity}] - 1}.
9769
@end defmac
9770
 
9771
@defmac EMIT_MODE_SET (@var{entity}, @var{mode}, @var{hard_regs_live})
9772
Generate one or more insns to set @var{entity} to @var{mode}.
9773
@var{hard_reg_live} is the set of hard registers live at the point where
9774
the insn(s) are to be inserted.
9775
@end defmac
9776
 
9777
@node Target Attributes
9778
@section Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}
9779
@cindex target attributes
9780
@cindex machine attributes
9781
@cindex attributes, target-specific
9782
 
9783
Target-specific attributes may be defined for functions, data and types.
9784
These are described using the following target hooks; they also need to
9785
be documented in @file{extend.texi}.
9786
 
9787
@deftypevr {Target Hook} {const struct attribute_spec *} TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE
9788
If defined, this target hook points to an array of @samp{struct
9789
attribute_spec} (defined in @file{tree.h}) specifying the machine
9790
specific attributes for this target and some of the restrictions on the
9791
entities to which these attributes are applied and the arguments they
9792
take.
9793
@end deftypevr
9794
 
9795
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TAKES_IDENTIFIER_P (const_tree @var{name})
9796
If defined, this target hook is a function which returns true if the
9797
machine-specific attribute named @var{name} expects an identifier
9798
given as its first argument to be passed on as a plain identifier, not
9799
subjected to name lookup.  If this is not defined, the default is
9800
false for all machine-specific attributes.
9801
@end deftypefn
9802
 
9803
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (const_tree @var{type1}, const_tree @var{type2})
9804
If defined, this target hook is a function which returns zero if the attributes on
9805
@var{type1} and @var{type2} are incompatible, one if they are compatible,
9806
and two if they are nearly compatible (which causes a warning to be
9807
generated).  If this is not defined, machine-specific attributes are
9808
supposed always to be compatible.
9809
@end deftypefn
9810
 
9811
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (tree @var{type})
9812
If defined, this target hook is a function which assigns default attributes to
9813
the newly defined @var{type}.
9814
@end deftypefn
9815
 
9816
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_MERGE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (tree @var{type1}, tree @var{type2})
9817
Define this target hook if the merging of type attributes needs special
9818
handling.  If defined, the result is a list of the combined
9819
@code{TYPE_ATTRIBUTES} of @var{type1} and @var{type2}.  It is assumed
9820
that @code{comptypes} has already been called and returned 1.  This
9821
function may call @code{merge_attributes} to handle machine-independent
9822
merging.
9823
@end deftypefn
9824
 
9825
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_MERGE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES (tree @var{olddecl}, tree @var{newdecl})
9826
Define this target hook if the merging of decl attributes needs special
9827
handling.  If defined, the result is a list of the combined
9828
@code{DECL_ATTRIBUTES} of @var{olddecl} and @var{newdecl}.
9829
@var{newdecl} is a duplicate declaration of @var{olddecl}.  Examples of
9830
when this is needed are when one attribute overrides another, or when an
9831
attribute is nullified by a subsequent definition.  This function may
9832
call @code{merge_attributes} to handle machine-independent merging.
9833
 
9834
@findex TARGET_DLLIMPORT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
9835
If the only target-specific handling you require is @samp{dllimport}
9836
for Microsoft Windows targets, you should define the macro
9837
@code{TARGET_DLLIMPORT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES} to @code{1}.  The compiler
9838
will then define a function called
9839
@code{merge_dllimport_decl_attributes} which can then be defined as
9840
the expansion of @code{TARGET_MERGE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES}.  You can also
9841
add @code{handle_dll_attribute} in the attribute table for your port
9842
to perform initial processing of the @samp{dllimport} and
9843
@samp{dllexport} attributes.  This is done in @file{i386/cygwin.h} and
9844
@file{i386/i386.c}, for example.
9845
@end deftypefn
9846
 
9847
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_VALID_DLLIMPORT_ATTRIBUTE_P (const_tree @var{decl})
9848
@var{decl} is a variable or function with @code{__attribute__((dllimport))} specified.  Use this hook if the target needs to add extra validation checks to @code{handle_dll_attribute}.
9849
@end deftypefn
9850
 
9851
@defmac TARGET_DECLSPEC
9852
Define this macro to a nonzero value if you want to treat
9853
@code{__declspec(X)} as equivalent to @code{__attribute((X))}.  By
9854
default, this behavior is enabled only for targets that define
9855
@code{TARGET_DLLIMPORT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES}.  The current implementation
9856
of @code{__declspec} is via a built-in macro, but you should not rely
9857
on this implementation detail.
9858
@end defmac
9859
 
9860
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES (tree @var{node}, tree *@var{attr_ptr})
9861
Define this target hook if you want to be able to add attributes to a decl
9862
when it is being created.  This is normally useful for back ends which
9863
wish to implement a pragma by using the attributes which correspond to
9864
the pragma's effect.  The @var{node} argument is the decl which is being
9865
created.  The @var{attr_ptr} argument is a pointer to the attribute list
9866
for this decl.  The list itself should not be modified, since it may be
9867
shared with other decls, but attributes may be chained on the head of
9868
the list and @code{*@var{attr_ptr}} modified to point to the new
9869
attributes, or a copy of the list may be made if further changes are
9870
needed.
9871
@end deftypefn
9872
 
9873
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_FUNCTION_ATTRIBUTE_INLINABLE_P (const_tree @var{fndecl})
9874
@cindex inlining
9875
This target hook returns @code{true} if it is ok to inline @var{fndecl}
9876
into the current function, despite its having target-specific
9877
attributes, @code{false} otherwise.  By default, if a function has a
9878
target specific attribute attached to it, it will not be inlined.
9879
@end deftypefn
9880
 
9881
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_OPTION_VALID_ATTRIBUTE_P (tree @var{fndecl}, tree @var{name}, tree @var{args}, int @var{flags})
9882
This hook is called to parse the @code{attribute(option("..."))}, and
9883
it allows the function to set different target machine compile time
9884
options for the current function that might be different than the
9885
options specified on the command line.  The hook should return
9886
@code{true} if the options are valid.
9887
 
9888
The hook should set the @var{DECL_FUNCTION_SPECIFIC_TARGET} field in
9889
the function declaration to hold a pointer to a target specific
9890
@var{struct cl_target_option} structure.
9891
@end deftypefn
9892
 
9893
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_OPTION_SAVE (struct cl_target_option *@var{ptr})
9894
This hook is called to save any additional target specific information
9895
in the @var{struct cl_target_option} structure for function specific
9896
options.
9897
@xref{Option file format}.
9898
@end deftypefn
9899
 
9900
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_OPTION_RESTORE (struct cl_target_option *@var{ptr})
9901
This hook is called to restore any additional target specific
9902
information in the @var{struct cl_target_option} structure for
9903
function specific options.
9904
@end deftypefn
9905
 
9906
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_OPTION_PRINT (FILE *@var{file}, int @var{indent}, struct cl_target_option *@var{ptr})
9907
This hook is called to print any additional target specific
9908
information in the @var{struct cl_target_option} structure for
9909
function specific options.
9910
@end deftypefn
9911
 
9912
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_OPTION_PRAGMA_PARSE (tree @var{args}, tree @var{pop_target})
9913
This target hook parses the options for @code{#pragma GCC option} to
9914
set the machine specific options for functions that occur later in the
9915
input stream.  The options should be the same as handled by the
9916
@code{TARGET_OPTION_VALID_ATTRIBUTE_P} hook.
9917
@end deftypefn
9918
 
9919
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE (void)
9920
Sometimes certain combinations of command options do not make sense on
9921
a particular target machine.  You can override the hook
9922
@code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE} to take account of this.  This hooks is called
9923
once just after all the command options have been parsed.
9924
 
9925
Don't use this hook to turn on various extra optimizations for
9926
@option{-O}.  That is what @code{TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION} is for.
9927
 
9928
If you need to do something whenever the optimization level is
9929
changed via the optimize attribute or pragma, see
9930
@code{TARGET_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS_AFTER_CHANGE}
9931
@end deftypefn
9932
 
9933
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_CAN_INLINE_P (tree @var{caller}, tree @var{callee})
9934
This target hook returns @code{false} if the @var{caller} function
9935
cannot inline @var{callee}, based on target specific information.  By
9936
default, inlining is not allowed if the callee function has function
9937
specific target options and the caller does not use the same options.
9938
@end deftypefn
9939
 
9940
@node Emulated TLS
9941
@section Emulating TLS
9942
@cindex Emulated TLS
9943
 
9944
For targets whose psABI does not provide Thread Local Storage via
9945
specific relocations and instruction sequences, an emulation layer is
9946
used.  A set of target hooks allows this emulation layer to be
9947
configured for the requirements of a particular target.  For instance
9948
the psABI may in fact specify TLS support in terms of an emulation
9949
layer.
9950
 
9951
The emulation layer works by creating a control object for every TLS
9952
object.  To access the TLS object, a lookup function is provided
9953
which, when given the address of the control object, will return the
9954
address of the current thread's instance of the TLS object.
9955
 
9956
@deftypevr {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_EMUTLS_GET_ADDRESS
9957
Contains the name of the helper function that uses a TLS control
9958
object to locate a TLS instance.  The default causes libgcc's
9959
emulated TLS helper function to be used.
9960
@end deftypevr
9961
 
9962
@deftypevr {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_EMUTLS_REGISTER_COMMON
9963
Contains the name of the helper function that should be used at
9964
program startup to register TLS objects that are implicitly
9965
initialized to zero.  If this is @code{NULL}, all TLS objects will
9966
have explicit initializers.  The default causes libgcc's emulated TLS
9967
registration function to be used.
9968
@end deftypevr
9969
 
9970
@deftypevr {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_SECTION
9971
Contains the name of the section in which TLS control variables should
9972
be placed.  The default of @code{NULL} allows these to be placed in
9973
any section.
9974
@end deftypevr
9975
 
9976
@deftypevr {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_SECTION
9977
Contains the name of the section in which TLS initializers should be
9978
placed.  The default of @code{NULL} allows these to be placed in any
9979
section.
9980
@end deftypevr
9981
 
9982
@deftypevr {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_PREFIX
9983
Contains the prefix to be prepended to TLS control variable names.
9984
The default of @code{NULL} uses a target-specific prefix.
9985
@end deftypevr
9986
 
9987
@deftypevr {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_PREFIX
9988
Contains the prefix to be prepended to TLS initializer objects.  The
9989
default of @code{NULL} uses a target-specific prefix.
9990
@end deftypevr
9991
 
9992
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_FIELDS (tree @var{type}, tree *@var{name})
9993
Specifies a function that generates the FIELD_DECLs for a TLS control
9994
object type.  @var{type} is the RECORD_TYPE the fields are for and
9995
@var{name} should be filled with the structure tag, if the default of
9996
@code{__emutls_object} is unsuitable.  The default creates a type suitable
9997
for libgcc's emulated TLS function.
9998
@end deftypefn
9999
 
10000
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_INIT (tree @var{var}, tree @var{decl}, tree @var{tmpl_addr})
10001
Specifies a function that generates the CONSTRUCTOR to initialize a
10002
TLS control object.  @var{var} is the TLS control object, @var{decl}
10003
is the TLS object and @var{tmpl_addr} is the address of the
10004
initializer.  The default initializes libgcc's emulated TLS control object.
10005
@end deftypefn
10006
 
10007
@deftypevr {Target Hook} bool TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_ALIGN_FIXED
10008
Specifies whether the alignment of TLS control variable objects is
10009
fixed and should not be increased as some backends may do to optimize
10010
single objects.  The default is false.
10011
@end deftypevr
10012
 
10013
@deftypevr {Target Hook} bool TARGET_EMUTLS_DEBUG_FORM_TLS_ADDRESS
10014
Specifies whether a DWARF @code{DW_OP_form_tls_address} location descriptor
10015
may be used to describe emulated TLS control objects.
10016
@end deftypevr
10017
 
10018
@node MIPS Coprocessors
10019
@section Defining coprocessor specifics for MIPS targets.
10020
@cindex MIPS coprocessor-definition macros
10021
 
10022
The MIPS specification allows MIPS implementations to have as many as 4
10023
coprocessors, each with as many as 32 private registers.  GCC supports
10024
accessing these registers and transferring values between the registers
10025
and memory using asm-ized variables.  For example:
10026
 
10027
@smallexample
10028
  register unsigned int cp0count asm ("c0r1");
10029
  unsigned int d;
10030
 
10031
  d = cp0count + 3;
10032
@end smallexample
10033
 
10034
(``c0r1'' is the default name of register 1 in coprocessor 0; alternate
10035
names may be added as described below, or the default names may be
10036
overridden entirely in @code{SUBTARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}.)
10037
 
10038
Coprocessor registers are assumed to be epilogue-used; sets to them will
10039
be preserved even if it does not appear that the register is used again
10040
later in the function.
10041
 
10042
Another note: according to the MIPS spec, coprocessor 1 (if present) is
10043
the FPU@.  One accesses COP1 registers through standard mips
10044
floating-point support; they are not included in this mechanism.
10045
 
10046
There is one macro used in defining the MIPS coprocessor interface which
10047
you may want to override in subtargets; it is described below.
10048
 
10049
@defmac ALL_COP_ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
10050
A comma-separated list (with leading comma) of pairs describing the
10051
alternate names of coprocessor registers.  The format of each entry should be
10052
@smallexample
10053
@{ @var{alternatename}, @var{register_number}@}
10054
@end smallexample
10055
Default: empty.
10056
@end defmac
10057
 
10058
@node PCH Target
10059
@section Parameters for Precompiled Header Validity Checking
10060
@cindex parameters, precompiled headers
10061
 
10062
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {void *} TARGET_GET_PCH_VALIDITY (size_t *@var{sz})
10063
This hook returns a pointer to the data needed by
10064
@code{TARGET_PCH_VALID_P} and sets
10065
@samp{*@var{sz}} to the size of the data in bytes.
10066
@end deftypefn
10067
 
10068
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_PCH_VALID_P (const void *@var{data}, size_t @var{sz})
10069
This hook checks whether the options used to create a PCH file are
10070
compatible with the current settings.  It returns @code{NULL}
10071
if so and a suitable error message if not.  Error messages will
10072
be presented to the user and must be localized using @samp{_(@var{msg})}.
10073
 
10074
@var{data} is the data that was returned by @code{TARGET_GET_PCH_VALIDITY}
10075
when the PCH file was created and @var{sz} is the size of that data in bytes.
10076
It's safe to assume that the data was created by the same version of the
10077
compiler, so no format checking is needed.
10078
 
10079
The default definition of @code{default_pch_valid_p} should be
10080
suitable for most targets.
10081
@end deftypefn
10082
 
10083
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_CHECK_PCH_TARGET_FLAGS (int @var{pch_flags})
10084
If this hook is nonnull, the default implementation of
10085
@code{TARGET_PCH_VALID_P} will use it to check for compatible values
10086
of @code{target_flags}.  @var{pch_flags} specifies the value that
10087
@code{target_flags} had when the PCH file was created.  The return
10088
value is the same as for @code{TARGET_PCH_VALID_P}.
10089
@end deftypefn
10090
 
10091
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_PREPARE_PCH_SAVE (void)
10092
Called before writing out a PCH file.  If the target has some
10093
garbage-collected data that needs to be in a particular state on PCH loads,
10094
it can use this hook to enforce that state.  Very few targets need
10095
to do anything here.
10096
@end deftypefn
10097
 
10098
@node C++ ABI
10099
@section C++ ABI parameters
10100
@cindex parameters, c++ abi
10101
 
10102
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_CXX_GUARD_TYPE (void)
10103
Define this hook to override the integer type used for guard variables.
10104
These are used to implement one-time construction of static objects.  The
10105
default is long_long_integer_type_node.
10106
@end deftypefn
10107
 
10108
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_CXX_GUARD_MASK_BIT (void)
10109
This hook determines how guard variables are used.  It should return
10110
@code{false} (the default) if the first byte should be used.  A return value of
10111
@code{true} indicates that only the least significant bit should be used.
10112
@end deftypefn
10113
 
10114
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_CXX_GET_COOKIE_SIZE (tree @var{type})
10115
This hook returns the size of the cookie to use when allocating an array
10116
whose elements have the indicated @var{type}.  Assumes that it is already
10117
known that a cookie is needed.  The default is
10118
@code{max(sizeof (size_t), alignof(type))}, as defined in section 2.7 of the
10119
IA64/Generic C++ ABI@.
10120
@end deftypefn
10121
 
10122
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_CXX_COOKIE_HAS_SIZE (void)
10123
This hook should return @code{true} if the element size should be stored in
10124
array cookies.  The default is to return @code{false}.
10125
@end deftypefn
10126
 
10127
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_CXX_IMPORT_EXPORT_CLASS (tree @var{type}, int @var{import_export})
10128
If defined by a backend this hook allows the decision made to export
10129
class @var{type} to be overruled.  Upon entry @var{import_export}
10130
will contain 1 if the class is going to be exported, @minus{}1 if it is going
10131
to be imported and 0 otherwise.  This function should return the
10132
modified value and perform any other actions necessary to support the
10133
backend's targeted operating system.
10134
@end deftypefn
10135
 
10136
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_CXX_CDTOR_RETURNS_THIS (void)
10137
This hook should return @code{true} if constructors and destructors return
10138
the address of the object created/destroyed.  The default is to return
10139
@code{false}.
10140
@end deftypefn
10141
 
10142
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_CXX_KEY_METHOD_MAY_BE_INLINE (void)
10143
This hook returns true if the key method for a class (i.e., the method
10144
which, if defined in the current translation unit, causes the virtual
10145
table to be emitted) may be an inline function.  Under the standard
10146
Itanium C++ ABI the key method may be an inline function so long as
10147
the function is not declared inline in the class definition.  Under
10148
some variants of the ABI, an inline function can never be the key
10149
method.  The default is to return @code{true}.
10150
@end deftypefn
10151
 
10152
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_CXX_DETERMINE_CLASS_DATA_VISIBILITY (tree @var{decl})
10153
@var{decl} is a virtual table, virtual table table, typeinfo object, or other similar implicit class data object that will be emitted with external linkage in this translation unit.  No ELF visibility has been explicitly specified.  If the target needs to specify a visibility other than that of the containing class, use this hook to set @code{DECL_VISIBILITY} and @code{DECL_VISIBILITY_SPECIFIED}.
10154
@end deftypefn
10155
 
10156
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_CXX_CLASS_DATA_ALWAYS_COMDAT (void)
10157
This hook returns true (the default) if virtual tables and other
10158
similar implicit class data objects are always COMDAT if they have
10159
external linkage.  If this hook returns false, then class data for
10160
classes whose virtual table will be emitted in only one translation
10161
unit will not be COMDAT.
10162
@end deftypefn
10163
 
10164
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_CXX_LIBRARY_RTTI_COMDAT (void)
10165
This hook returns true (the default) if the RTTI information for
10166
the basic types which is defined in the C++ runtime should always
10167
be COMDAT, false if it should not be COMDAT.
10168
@end deftypefn
10169
 
10170
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_CXX_USE_AEABI_ATEXIT (void)
10171
This hook returns true if @code{__aeabi_atexit} (as defined by the ARM EABI)
10172
should be used to register static destructors when @option{-fuse-cxa-atexit}
10173
is in effect.  The default is to return false to use @code{__cxa_atexit}.
10174
@end deftypefn
10175
 
10176
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_CXX_USE_ATEXIT_FOR_CXA_ATEXIT (void)
10177
This hook returns true if the target @code{atexit} function can be used
10178
in the same manner as @code{__cxa_atexit} to register C++ static
10179
destructors. This requires that @code{atexit}-registered functions in
10180
shared libraries are run in the correct order when the libraries are
10181
unloaded. The default is to return false.
10182
@end deftypefn
10183
 
10184
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_CXX_ADJUST_CLASS_AT_DEFINITION (tree @var{type})
10185
@var{type} is a C++ class (i.e., RECORD_TYPE or UNION_TYPE) that has just been defined.  Use this hook to make adjustments to the class (eg, tweak visibility or perform any other required target modifications).
10186
@end deftypefn
10187
 
10188
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_CXX_DECL_MANGLING_CONTEXT (const_tree @var{decl})
10189
Return target-specific mangling context of @var{decl} or @code{NULL_TREE}.
10190
@end deftypefn
10191
 
10192
@node Named Address Spaces
10193
@section Adding support for named address spaces
10194
@cindex named address spaces
10195
 
10196
The draft technical report of the ISO/IEC JTC1 S22 WG14 N1275
10197
standards committee, @cite{Programming Languages - C - Extensions to
10198
support embedded processors}, specifies a syntax for embedded
10199
processors to specify alternate address spaces.  You can configure a
10200
GCC port to support section 5.1 of the draft report to add support for
10201
address spaces other than the default address space.  These address
10202
spaces are new keywords that are similar to the @code{volatile} and
10203
@code{const} type attributes.
10204
 
10205
Pointers to named address spaces can have a different size than
10206
pointers to the generic address space.
10207
 
10208
For example, the SPU port uses the @code{__ea} address space to refer
10209
to memory in the host processor, rather than memory local to the SPU
10210
processor.  Access to memory in the @code{__ea} address space involves
10211
issuing DMA operations to move data between the host processor and the
10212
local processor memory address space.  Pointers in the @code{__ea}
10213
address space are either 32 bits or 64 bits based on the
10214
@option{-mea32} or @option{-mea64} switches (native SPU pointers are
10215
always 32 bits).
10216
 
10217
Internally, address spaces are represented as a small integer in the
10218
range 0 to 15 with address space 0 being reserved for the generic
10219
address space.
10220
 
10221
To register a named address space qualifier keyword with the C front end,
10222
the target may call the @code{c_register_addr_space} routine.  For example,
10223
the SPU port uses the following to declare @code{__ea} as the keyword for
10224
named address space #1:
10225
@smallexample
10226
#define ADDR_SPACE_EA 1
10227
c_register_addr_space ("__ea", ADDR_SPACE_EA);
10228
@end smallexample
10229
 
10230
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {enum machine_mode} TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_POINTER_MODE (addr_space_t @var{address_space})
10231
Define this to return the machine mode to use for pointers to
10232
@var{address_space} if the target supports named address spaces.
10233
The default version of this hook returns @code{ptr_mode} for the
10234
generic address space only.
10235
@end deftypefn
10236
 
10237
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {enum machine_mode} TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_ADDRESS_MODE (addr_space_t @var{address_space})
10238
Define this to return the machine mode to use for addresses in
10239
@var{address_space} if the target supports named address spaces.
10240
The default version of this hook returns @code{Pmode} for the
10241
generic address space only.
10242
@end deftypefn
10243
 
10244
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_VALID_POINTER_MODE (enum machine_mode @var{mode}, addr_space_t @var{as})
10245
Define this to return nonzero if the port can handle pointers
10246
with machine mode @var{mode} to address space @var{as}.  This target
10247
hook is the same as the @code{TARGET_VALID_POINTER_MODE} target hook,
10248
except that it includes explicit named address space support.  The default
10249
version of this hook returns true for the modes returned by either the
10250
@code{TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_POINTER_MODE} or @code{TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_ADDRESS_MODE}
10251
target hooks for the given address space.
10252
@end deftypefn
10253
 
10254
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P (enum machine_mode @var{mode}, rtx @var{exp}, bool @var{strict}, addr_space_t @var{as})
10255
Define this to return true if @var{exp} is a valid address for mode
10256
@var{mode} in the named address space @var{as}.  The @var{strict}
10257
parameter says whether strict addressing is in effect after reload has
10258
finished.  This target hook is the same as the
10259
@code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} target hook, except that it includes
10260
explicit named address space support.
10261
@end deftypefn
10262
 
10263
@deftypefn {Target Hook} rtx TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS (rtx @var{x}, rtx @var{oldx}, enum machine_mode @var{mode}, addr_space_t @var{as})
10264
Define this to modify an invalid address @var{x} to be a valid address
10265
with mode @var{mode} in the named address space @var{as}.  This target
10266
hook is the same as the @code{TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS} target hook,
10267
except that it includes explicit named address space support.
10268
@end deftypefn
10269
 
10270
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_SUBSET_P (addr_space_t @var{subset}, addr_space_t @var{superset})
10271
Define this to return whether the @var{subset} named address space is
10272
contained within the @var{superset} named address space.  Pointers to
10273
a named address space that is a subset of another named address space
10274
will be converted automatically without a cast if used together in
10275
arithmetic operations.  Pointers to a superset address space can be
10276
converted to pointers to a subset address space via explicit casts.
10277
@end deftypefn
10278
 
10279
@deftypefn {Target Hook} rtx TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_CONVERT (rtx @var{op}, tree @var{from_type}, tree @var{to_type})
10280
Define this to convert the pointer expression represented by the RTL
10281
@var{op} with type @var{from_type} that points to a named address
10282
space to a new pointer expression with type @var{to_type} that points
10283
to a different named address space.  When this hook it called, it is
10284
guaranteed that one of the two address spaces is a subset of the other,
10285
as determined by the @code{TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_SUBSET_P} target hook.
10286
@end deftypefn
10287
 
10288
@node Misc
10289
@section Miscellaneous Parameters
10290
@cindex parameters, miscellaneous
10291
 
10292
@c prevent bad page break with this line
10293
Here are several miscellaneous parameters.
10294
 
10295
@defmac HAS_LONG_COND_BRANCH
10296
Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
10297
has conditional branches that can span all of memory.  It is used in
10298
conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
10299
blocks into separate sections of the executable.  If this macro is
10300
set to false, gcc will convert any conditional branches that attempt
10301
to cross between sections into unconditional branches or indirect jumps.
10302
@end defmac
10303
 
10304
@defmac HAS_LONG_UNCOND_BRANCH
10305
Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
10306
has unconditional branches that can span all of memory.  It is used in
10307
conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
10308
blocks into separate sections of the executable.  If this macro is
10309
set to false, gcc will convert any unconditional branches that attempt
10310
to cross between sections into indirect jumps.
10311
@end defmac
10312
 
10313
@defmac CASE_VECTOR_MODE
10314
An alias for a machine mode name.  This is the machine mode that
10315
elements of a jump-table should have.
10316
@end defmac
10317
 
10318
@defmac CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE (@var{min_offset}, @var{max_offset}, @var{body})
10319
Optional: return the preferred mode for an @code{addr_diff_vec}
10320
when the minimum and maximum offset are known.  If you define this,
10321
it enables extra code in branch shortening to deal with @code{addr_diff_vec}.
10322
To make this work, you also have to define @code{INSN_ALIGN} and
10323
make the alignment for @code{addr_diff_vec} explicit.
10324
The @var{body} argument is provided so that the offset_unsigned and scale
10325
flags can be updated.
10326
@end defmac
10327
 
10328
@defmac CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
10329
Define this macro to be a C expression to indicate when jump-tables
10330
should contain relative addresses.  You need not define this macro if
10331
jump-tables never contain relative addresses, or jump-tables should
10332
contain relative addresses only when @option{-fPIC} or @option{-fPIC}
10333
is in effect.
10334
@end defmac
10335
 
10336
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {unsigned int} TARGET_CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD (void)
10337
This function return the smallest number of different values for which it
10338
is best to use a jump-table instead of a tree of conditional branches.
10339
The default is four for machines with a @code{casesi} instruction and
10340
five otherwise.  This is best for most machines.
10341
@end deftypefn
10342
 
10343
@defmac CASE_USE_BIT_TESTS
10344
Define this macro to be a C expression to indicate whether C switch
10345
statements may be implemented by a sequence of bit tests.  This is
10346
advantageous on processors that can efficiently implement left shift
10347
of 1 by the number of bits held in a register, but inappropriate on
10348
targets that would require a loop.  By default, this macro returns
10349
@code{true} if the target defines an @code{ashlsi3} pattern, and
10350
@code{false} otherwise.
10351
@end defmac
10352
 
10353
@defmac WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
10354
Define this macro if operations between registers with integral mode
10355
smaller than a word are always performed on the entire register.
10356
Most RISC machines have this property and most CISC machines do not.
10357
@end defmac
10358
 
10359
@defmac LOAD_EXTEND_OP (@var{mem_mode})
10360
Define this macro to be a C expression indicating when insns that read
10361
memory in @var{mem_mode}, an integral mode narrower than a word, set the
10362
bits outside of @var{mem_mode} to be either the sign-extension or the
10363
zero-extension of the data read.  Return @code{SIGN_EXTEND} for values
10364
of @var{mem_mode} for which the
10365
insn sign-extends, @code{ZERO_EXTEND} for which it zero-extends, and
10366
@code{UNKNOWN} for other modes.
10367
 
10368
This macro is not called with @var{mem_mode} non-integral or with a width
10369
greater than or equal to @code{BITS_PER_WORD}, so you may return any
10370
value in this case.  Do not define this macro if it would always return
10371
@code{UNKNOWN}.  On machines where this macro is defined, you will normally
10372
define it as the constant @code{SIGN_EXTEND} or @code{ZERO_EXTEND}.
10373
 
10374
You may return a non-@code{UNKNOWN} value even if for some hard registers
10375
the sign extension is not performed, if for the @code{REGNO_REG_CLASS}
10376
of these hard registers @code{CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} returns nonzero
10377
when the @var{from} mode is @var{mem_mode} and the @var{to} mode is any
10378
integral mode larger than this but not larger than @code{word_mode}.
10379
 
10380
You must return @code{UNKNOWN} if for some hard registers that allow this
10381
mode, @code{CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} says that they cannot change to
10382
@code{word_mode}, but that they can change to another integral mode that
10383
is larger then @var{mem_mode} but still smaller than @code{word_mode}.
10384
@end defmac
10385
 
10386
@defmac SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
10387
Define this macro if loading short immediate values into registers sign
10388
extends.
10389
@end defmac
10390
 
10391
@defmac FIXUNS_TRUNC_LIKE_FIX_TRUNC
10392
Define this macro if the same instructions that convert a floating
10393
point number to a signed fixed point number also convert validly to an
10394
unsigned one.
10395
@end defmac
10396
 
10397
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {unsigned int} TARGET_MIN_DIVISIONS_FOR_RECIP_MUL (enum machine_mode @var{mode})
10398
When @option{-ffast-math} is in effect, GCC tries to optimize
10399
divisions by the same divisor, by turning them into multiplications by
10400
the reciprocal.  This target hook specifies the minimum number of divisions
10401
that should be there for GCC to perform the optimization for a variable
10402
of mode @var{mode}.  The default implementation returns 3 if the machine
10403
has an instruction for the division, and 2 if it does not.
10404
@end deftypefn
10405
 
10406
@defmac MOVE_MAX
10407
The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
10408
between memory and registers or between two memory locations.
10409
@end defmac
10410
 
10411
@defmac MAX_MOVE_MAX
10412
The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
10413
between memory and registers or between two memory locations.  If this
10414
is undefined, the default is @code{MOVE_MAX}.  Otherwise, it is the
10415
constant value that is the largest value that @code{MOVE_MAX} can have
10416
at run-time.
10417
@end defmac
10418
 
10419
@defmac SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
10420
A C expression that is nonzero if on this machine the number of bits
10421
actually used for the count of a shift operation is equal to the number
10422
of bits needed to represent the size of the object being shifted.  When
10423
this macro is nonzero, the compiler will assume that it is safe to omit
10424
a sign-extend, zero-extend, and certain bitwise `and' instructions that
10425
truncates the count of a shift operation.  On machines that have
10426
instructions that act on bit-fields at variable positions, which may
10427
include `bit test' instructions, a nonzero @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED}
10428
also enables deletion of truncations of the values that serve as
10429
arguments to bit-field instructions.
10430
 
10431
If both types of instructions truncate the count (for shifts) and
10432
position (for bit-field operations), or if no variable-position bit-field
10433
instructions exist, you should define this macro.
10434
 
10435
However, on some machines, such as the 80386 and the 680x0, truncation
10436
only applies to shift operations and not the (real or pretended)
10437
bit-field operations.  Define @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED} to be zero on
10438
such machines.  Instead, add patterns to the @file{md} file that include
10439
the implied truncation of the shift instructions.
10440
 
10441
You need not define this macro if it would always have the value of zero.
10442
@end defmac
10443
 
10444
@anchor{TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK}
10445
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT} TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK (enum machine_mode @var{mode})
10446
This function describes how the standard shift patterns for @var{mode}
10447
deal with shifts by negative amounts or by more than the width of the mode.
10448
@xref{shift patterns}.
10449
 
10450
On many machines, the shift patterns will apply a mask @var{m} to the
10451
shift count, meaning that a fixed-width shift of @var{x} by @var{y} is
10452
equivalent to an arbitrary-width shift of @var{x} by @var{y & m}.  If
10453
this is true for mode @var{mode}, the function should return @var{m},
10454
otherwise it should return 0.  A return value of 0 indicates that no
10455
particular behavior is guaranteed.
10456
 
10457
Note that, unlike @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED}, this function does
10458
@emph{not} apply to general shift rtxes; it applies only to instructions
10459
that are generated by the named shift patterns.
10460
 
10461
The default implementation of this function returns
10462
@code{GET_MODE_BITSIZE (@var{mode}) - 1} if @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED}
10463
and 0 otherwise.  This definition is always safe, but if
10464
@code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED} is false, and some shift patterns
10465
nevertheless truncate the shift count, you may get better code
10466
by overriding it.
10467
@end deftypefn
10468
 
10469
@defmac TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (@var{outprec}, @var{inprec})
10470
A C expression which is nonzero if on this machine it is safe to
10471
``convert'' an integer of @var{inprec} bits to one of @var{outprec}
10472
bits (where @var{outprec} is smaller than @var{inprec}) by merely
10473
operating on it as if it had only @var{outprec} bits.
10474
 
10475
On many machines, this expression can be 1.
10476
 
10477
@c rearranged this, removed the phrase "it is reported that".  this was
10478
@c to fix an overfull hbox.  --mew 10feb93
10479
When @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} returns 1 for a pair of sizes for
10480
modes for which @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P} is 0, suboptimal code can result.
10481
If this is the case, making @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} return 0 in
10482
such cases may improve things.
10483
@end defmac
10484
 
10485
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_MODE_REP_EXTENDED (enum machine_mode @var{mode}, enum machine_mode @var{rep_mode})
10486
The representation of an integral mode can be such that the values
10487
are always extended to a wider integral mode.  Return
10488
@code{SIGN_EXTEND} if values of @var{mode} are represented in
10489
sign-extended form to @var{rep_mode}.  Return @code{UNKNOWN}
10490
otherwise.  (Currently, none of the targets use zero-extended
10491
representation this way so unlike @code{LOAD_EXTEND_OP},
10492
@code{TARGET_MODE_REP_EXTENDED} is expected to return either
10493
@code{SIGN_EXTEND} or @code{UNKNOWN}.  Also no target extends
10494
@var{mode} to @var{rep_mode} so that @var{rep_mode} is not the next
10495
widest integral mode and currently we take advantage of this fact.)
10496
 
10497
Similarly to @code{LOAD_EXTEND_OP} you may return a non-@code{UNKNOWN}
10498
value even if the extension is not performed on certain hard registers
10499
as long as for the @code{REGNO_REG_CLASS} of these hard registers
10500
@code{CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} returns nonzero.
10501
 
10502
Note that @code{TARGET_MODE_REP_EXTENDED} and @code{LOAD_EXTEND_OP}
10503
describe two related properties.  If you define
10504
@code{TARGET_MODE_REP_EXTENDED (mode, word_mode)} you probably also want
10505
to define @code{LOAD_EXTEND_OP (mode)} to return the same type of
10506
extension.
10507
 
10508
In order to enforce the representation of @code{mode},
10509
@code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} should return false when truncating to
10510
@code{mode}.
10511
@end deftypefn
10512
 
10513
@defmac STORE_FLAG_VALUE
10514
A C expression describing the value returned by a comparison operator
10515
with an integral mode and stored by a store-flag instruction
10516
(@samp{cstore@var{mode}4}) when the condition is true.  This description must
10517
apply to @emph{all} the @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} patterns and all the
10518
comparison operators whose results have a @code{MODE_INT} mode.
10519
 
10520
A value of 1 or @minus{}1 means that the instruction implementing the
10521
comparison operator returns exactly 1 or @minus{}1 when the comparison is true
10522
and 0 when the comparison is false.  Otherwise, the value indicates
10523
which bits of the result are guaranteed to be 1 when the comparison is
10524
true.  This value is interpreted in the mode of the comparison
10525
operation, which is given by the mode of the first operand in the
10526
@samp{cstore@var{mode}4} pattern.  Either the low bit or the sign bit of
10527
@code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} be on.  Presently, only those bits are used by
10528
the compiler.
10529
 
10530
If @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is neither 1 or @minus{}1, the compiler will
10531
generate code that depends only on the specified bits.  It can also
10532
replace comparison operators with equivalent operations if they cause
10533
the required bits to be set, even if the remaining bits are undefined.
10534
For example, on a machine whose comparison operators return an
10535
@code{SImode} value and where @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is defined as
10536
@samp{0x80000000}, saying that just the sign bit is relevant, the
10537
expression
10538
 
10539
@smallexample
10540
(ne:SI (and:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{power-of-2})) (const_int 0))
10541
@end smallexample
10542
 
10543
@noindent
10544
can be converted to
10545
 
10546
@smallexample
10547
(ashift:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))
10548
@end smallexample
10549
 
10550
@noindent
10551
where @var{n} is the appropriate shift count to move the bit being
10552
tested into the sign bit.
10553
 
10554
There is no way to describe a machine that always sets the low-order bit
10555
for a true value, but does not guarantee the value of any other bits,
10556
but we do not know of any machine that has such an instruction.  If you
10557
are trying to port GCC to such a machine, include an instruction to
10558
perform a logical-and of the result with 1 in the pattern for the
10559
comparison operators and let us know at @email{gcc@@gcc.gnu.org}.
10560
 
10561
Often, a machine will have multiple instructions that obtain a value
10562
from a comparison (or the condition codes).  Here are rules to guide the
10563
choice of value for @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}, and hence the instructions
10564
to be used:
10565
 
10566
@itemize @bullet
10567
@item
10568
Use the shortest sequence that yields a valid definition for
10569
@code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}.  It is more efficient for the compiler to
10570
``normalize'' the value (convert it to, e.g., 1 or 0) than for the
10571
comparison operators to do so because there may be opportunities to
10572
combine the normalization with other operations.
10573
 
10574
@item
10575
For equal-length sequences, use a value of 1 or @minus{}1, with @minus{}1 being
10576
slightly preferred on machines with expensive jumps and 1 preferred on
10577
other machines.
10578
 
10579
@item
10580
As a second choice, choose a value of @samp{0x80000001} if instructions
10581
exist that set both the sign and low-order bits but do not define the
10582
others.
10583
 
10584
@item
10585
Otherwise, use a value of @samp{0x80000000}.
10586
@end itemize
10587
 
10588
Many machines can produce both the value chosen for
10589
@code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} and its negation in the same number of
10590
instructions.  On those machines, you should also define a pattern for
10591
those cases, e.g., one matching
10592
 
10593
@smallexample
10594
(set @var{A} (neg:@var{m} (ne:@var{m} @var{B} @var{C})))
10595
@end smallexample
10596
 
10597
Some machines can also perform @code{and} or @code{plus} operations on
10598
condition code values with less instructions than the corresponding
10599
@samp{cstore@var{mode}4} insn followed by @code{and} or @code{plus}.  On those
10600
machines, define the appropriate patterns.  Use the names @code{incscc}
10601
and @code{decscc}, respectively, for the patterns which perform
10602
@code{plus} or @code{minus} operations on condition code values.  See
10603
@file{rs6000.md} for some examples.  The GNU Superoptimizer can be used to
10604
find such instruction sequences on other machines.
10605
 
10606
If this macro is not defined, the default value, 1, is used.  You need
10607
not define @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} if the machine has no store-flag
10608
instructions, or if the value generated by these instructions is 1.
10609
@end defmac
10610
 
10611
@defmac FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
10612
A C expression that gives a nonzero @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} value that is
10613
returned when comparison operators with floating-point results are true.
10614
Define this macro on machines that have comparison operations that return
10615
floating-point values.  If there are no such operations, do not define
10616
this macro.
10617
@end defmac
10618
 
10619
@defmac VECTOR_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
10620
A C expression that gives a rtx representing the nonzero true element
10621
for vector comparisons.  The returned rtx should be valid for the inner
10622
mode of @var{mode} which is guaranteed to be a vector mode.  Define
10623
this macro on machines that have vector comparison operations that
10624
return a vector result.  If there are no such operations, do not define
10625
this macro.  Typically, this macro is defined as @code{const1_rtx} or
10626
@code{constm1_rtx}.  This macro may return @code{NULL_RTX} to prevent
10627
the compiler optimizing such vector comparison operations for the
10628
given mode.
10629
@end defmac
10630
 
10631
@defmac CLZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
10632
@defmacx CTZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
10633
A C expression that indicates whether the architecture defines a value
10634
for @code{clz} or @code{ctz} with a zero operand.
10635
A result of @code{0} indicates the value is undefined.
10636
If the value is defined for only the RTL expression, the macro should
10637
evaluate to @code{1}; if the value applies also to the corresponding optab
10638
entry (which is normally the case if it expands directly into
10639
the corresponding RTL), then the macro should evaluate to @code{2}.
10640
In the cases where the value is defined, @var{value} should be set to
10641
this value.
10642
 
10643
If this macro is not defined, the value of @code{clz} or
10644
@code{ctz} at zero is assumed to be undefined.
10645
 
10646
This macro must be defined if the target's expansion for @code{ffs}
10647
relies on a particular value to get correct results.  Otherwise it
10648
is not necessary, though it may be used to optimize some corner cases, and
10649
to provide a default expansion for the @code{ffs} optab.
10650
 
10651
Note that regardless of this macro the ``definedness'' of @code{clz}
10652
and @code{ctz} at zero do @emph{not} extend to the builtin functions
10653
visible to the user.  Thus one may be free to adjust the value at will
10654
to match the target expansion of these operations without fear of
10655
breaking the API@.
10656
@end defmac
10657
 
10658
@defmac Pmode
10659
An alias for the machine mode for pointers.  On most machines, define
10660
this to be the integer mode corresponding to the width of a hardware
10661
pointer; @code{SImode} on 32-bit machine or @code{DImode} on 64-bit machines.
10662
On some machines you must define this to be one of the partial integer
10663
modes, such as @code{PSImode}.
10664
 
10665
The width of @code{Pmode} must be at least as large as the value of
10666
@code{POINTER_SIZE}.  If it is not equal, you must define the macro
10667
@code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED} to specify how pointers are extended
10668
to @code{Pmode}.
10669
@end defmac
10670
 
10671
@defmac FUNCTION_MODE
10672
An alias for the machine mode used for memory references to functions
10673
being called, in @code{call} RTL expressions.  On most CISC machines,
10674
where an instruction can begin at any byte address, this should be
10675
@code{QImode}.  On most RISC machines, where all instructions have fixed
10676
size and alignment, this should be a mode with the same size and alignment
10677
as the machine instruction words - typically @code{SImode} or @code{HImode}.
10678
@end defmac
10679
 
10680
@defmac STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS
10681
In normal operation, the preprocessor expands @code{__STDC__} to the
10682
constant 1, to signify that GCC conforms to ISO Standard C@.  On some
10683
hosts, like Solaris, the system compiler uses a different convention,
10684
where @code{__STDC__} is normally 0, but is 1 if the user specifies
10685
strict conformance to the C Standard.
10686
 
10687
Defining @code{STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS} makes GNU CPP follows the host
10688
convention when processing system header files, but when processing user
10689
files @code{__STDC__} will always expand to 1.
10690
@end defmac
10691
 
10692
@defmac NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
10693
Define this macro if the system header files support C++ as well as C@.
10694
This macro inhibits the usual method of using system header files in
10695
C++, which is to pretend that the file's contents are enclosed in
10696
@samp{extern "C" @{@dots{}@}}.
10697
@end defmac
10698
 
10699
@findex #pragma
10700
@findex pragma
10701
@defmac REGISTER_TARGET_PRAGMAS ()
10702
Define this macro if you want to implement any target-specific pragmas.
10703
If defined, it is a C expression which makes a series of calls to
10704
@code{c_register_pragma} or @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion}
10705
for each pragma.  The macro may also do any
10706
setup required for the pragmas.
10707
 
10708
The primary reason to define this macro is to provide compatibility with
10709
other compilers for the same target.  In general, we discourage
10710
definition of target-specific pragmas for GCC@.
10711
 
10712
If the pragma can be implemented by attributes then you should consider
10713
defining the target hook @samp{TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES} as well.
10714
 
10715
Preprocessor macros that appear on pragma lines are not expanded.  All
10716
@samp{#pragma} directives that do not match any registered pragma are
10717
silently ignored, unless the user specifies @option{-Wunknown-pragmas}.
10718
@end defmac
10719
 
10720
@deftypefun void c_register_pragma (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
10721
@deftypefunx void c_register_pragma_with_expansion (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
10722
 
10723
Each call to @code{c_register_pragma} or
10724
@code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} establishes one pragma.  The
10725
@var{callback} routine will be called when the preprocessor encounters a
10726
pragma of the form
10727
 
10728
@smallexample
10729
#pragma [@var{space}] @var{name} @dots{}
10730
@end smallexample
10731
 
10732
@var{space} is the case-sensitive namespace of the pragma, or
10733
@code{NULL} to put the pragma in the global namespace.  The callback
10734
routine receives @var{pfile} as its first argument, which can be passed
10735
on to cpplib's functions if necessary.  You can lex tokens after the
10736
@var{name} by calling @code{pragma_lex}.  Tokens that are not read by the
10737
callback will be silently ignored.  The end of the line is indicated by
10738
a token of type @code{CPP_EOF}.  Macro expansion occurs on the
10739
arguments of pragmas registered with
10740
@code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} but not on the arguments of
10741
pragmas registered with @code{c_register_pragma}.
10742
 
10743
Note that the use of @code{pragma_lex} is specific to the C and C++
10744
compilers.  It will not work in the Java or Fortran compilers, or any
10745
other language compilers for that matter.  Thus if @code{pragma_lex} is going
10746
to be called from target-specific code, it must only be done so when
10747
building the C and C++ compilers.  This can be done by defining the
10748
variables @code{c_target_objs} and @code{cxx_target_objs} in the
10749
target entry in the @file{config.gcc} file.  These variables should name
10750
the target-specific, language-specific object file which contains the
10751
code that uses @code{pragma_lex}.  Note it will also be necessary to add a
10752
rule to the makefile fragment pointed to by @code{tmake_file} that shows
10753
how to build this object file.
10754
@end deftypefun
10755
 
10756
@defmac HANDLE_PRAGMA_PACK_WITH_EXPANSION
10757
Define this macro if macros should be expanded in the
10758
arguments of @samp{#pragma pack}.
10759
@end defmac
10760
 
10761
@deftypevr {Target Hook} bool TARGET_HANDLE_PRAGMA_EXTERN_PREFIX
10762
True if @code{#pragma extern_prefix} is to be supported.
10763
@end deftypevr
10764
 
10765
@defmac TARGET_DEFAULT_PACK_STRUCT
10766
If your target requires a structure packing default other than 0 (meaning
10767
the machine default), define this macro to the necessary value (in bytes).
10768
This must be a value that would also be valid to use with
10769
@samp{#pragma pack()} (that is, a small power of two).
10770
@end defmac
10771
 
10772
@defmac DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
10773
Define this macro to control use of the character @samp{$} in
10774
identifier names for the C family of languages.  0 means @samp{$} is
10775
not allowed by default; 1 means it is allowed.  1 is the default;
10776
there is no need to define this macro in that case.
10777
@end defmac
10778
 
10779
@defmac NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
10780
Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
10781
@samp{$} in label names.  By default constructors and destructors in
10782
G++ have @samp{$} in the identifiers.  If this macro is defined,
10783
@samp{.} is used instead.
10784
@end defmac
10785
 
10786
@defmac NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
10787
Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
10788
@samp{.} in label names.  By default constructors and destructors in G++
10789
have names that use @samp{.}.  If this macro is defined, these names
10790
are rewritten to avoid @samp{.}.
10791
@end defmac
10792
 
10793
@defmac INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
10794
Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
10795
delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
10796
even if they appear to use a resource set or clobbered in @var{insn}.
10797
@var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}; GCC knows that
10798
every @code{call_insn} has this behavior.  On machines where some @code{insn}
10799
or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and hence has this behavior,
10800
you should define this macro.
10801
 
10802
You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
10803
@end defmac
10804
 
10805
@defmac INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
10806
Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
10807
delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
10808
even if they appear to set or clobber a resource referenced in @var{insn}.
10809
@var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}.  On machines where
10810
some @code{insn} or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and its operands
10811
are registers whose use is actually in the subroutine it calls, you should
10812
define this macro.  Doing so allows the delay slot scheduler to move
10813
instructions which copy arguments into the argument registers into the delay
10814
slot of @var{insn}.
10815
 
10816
You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
10817
@end defmac
10818
 
10819
@defmac MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
10820
Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if, in some cases,
10821
global symbols from one translation unit may not be bound to undefined
10822
symbols in another translation unit without user intervention.  For
10823
instance, under Microsoft Windows symbols must be explicitly imported
10824
from shared libraries (DLLs).
10825
 
10826
You need not define this macro if it would always evaluate to zero.
10827
@end defmac
10828
 
10829
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_MD_ASM_CLOBBERS (tree @var{outputs}, tree @var{inputs}, tree @var{clobbers})
10830
This target hook should add to @var{clobbers} @code{STRING_CST} trees for
10831
any hard regs the port wishes to automatically clobber for an asm.
10832
It should return the result of the last @code{tree_cons} used to add a
10833
clobber.  The @var{outputs}, @var{inputs} and @var{clobber} lists are the
10834
corresponding parameters to the asm and may be inspected to avoid
10835
clobbering a register that is an input or output of the asm.  You can use
10836
@code{tree_overlaps_hard_reg_set}, declared in @file{tree.h}, to test
10837
for overlap with regards to asm-declared registers.
10838
@end deftypefn
10839
 
10840
@defmac MATH_LIBRARY
10841
Define this macro as a C string constant for the linker argument to link
10842
in the system math library, minus the initial @samp{"-l"}, or
10843
@samp{""} if the target does not have a
10844
separate math library.
10845
 
10846
You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"m"} is wrong.
10847
@end defmac
10848
 
10849
@defmac LIBRARY_PATH_ENV
10850
Define this macro as a C string constant for the environment variable that
10851
specifies where the linker should look for libraries.
10852
 
10853
You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"LIBRARY_PATH"}
10854
is wrong.
10855
@end defmac
10856
 
10857
@defmac TARGET_POSIX_IO
10858
Define this macro if the target supports the following POSIX@ file
10859
functions, access, mkdir and  file locking with fcntl / F_SETLKW@.
10860
Defining @code{TARGET_POSIX_IO} will enable the test coverage code
10861
to use file locking when exiting a program, which avoids race conditions
10862
if the program has forked. It will also create directories at run-time
10863
for cross-profiling.
10864
@end defmac
10865
 
10866
@defmac MAX_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTE
10867
 
10868
A C expression for the maximum number of instructions to execute via
10869
conditional execution instructions instead of a branch.  A value of
10870
@code{BRANCH_COST}+1 is the default if the machine does not use cc0, and
10871
1 if it does use cc0.
10872
@end defmac
10873
 
10874
@defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
10875
Used if the target needs to perform machine-dependent modifications on the
10876
conditionals used for turning basic blocks into conditionally executed code.
10877
@var{ce_info} points to a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which
10878
contains information about the currently processed blocks.  @var{true_expr}
10879
and @var{false_expr} are the tests that are used for converting the
10880
then-block and the else-block, respectively.  Set either @var{true_expr} or
10881
@var{false_expr} to a null pointer if the tests cannot be converted.
10882
@end defmac
10883
 
10884
@defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_MULTIPLE_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{bb}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
10885
Like @code{IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS}, but used when converting more complicated
10886
if-statements into conditions combined by @code{and} and @code{or} operations.
10887
@var{bb} contains the basic block that contains the test that is currently
10888
being processed and about to be turned into a condition.
10889
@end defmac
10890
 
10891
@defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_INSN (@var{ce_info}, @var{pattern}, @var{insn})
10892
A C expression to modify the @var{PATTERN} of an @var{INSN} that is to
10893
be converted to conditional execution format.  @var{ce_info} points to
10894
a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which contains information
10895
about the currently processed blocks.
10896
@end defmac
10897
 
10898
@defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_FINAL (@var{ce_info})
10899
A C expression to perform any final machine dependent modifications in
10900
converting code to conditional execution.  The involved basic blocks
10901
can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
10902
to by @var{ce_info}.
10903
@end defmac
10904
 
10905
@defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_CANCEL (@var{ce_info})
10906
A C expression to cancel any machine dependent modifications in
10907
converting code to conditional execution.  The involved basic blocks
10908
can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
10909
to by @var{ce_info}.
10910
@end defmac
10911
 
10912
@defmac IFCVT_INIT_EXTRA_FIELDS (@var{ce_info})
10913
A C expression to initialize any extra fields in a @code{struct ce_if_block}
10914
structure, which are defined by the @code{IFCVT_EXTRA_FIELDS} macro.
10915
@end defmac
10916
 
10917
@defmac IFCVT_EXTRA_FIELDS
10918
If defined, it should expand to a set of field declarations that will be
10919
added to the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure.  These should be initialized
10920
by the @code{IFCVT_INIT_EXTRA_FIELDS} macro.
10921
@end defmac
10922
 
10923
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG (void)
10924
If non-null, this hook performs a target-specific pass over the
10925
instruction stream.  The compiler will run it at all optimization levels,
10926
just before the point at which it normally does delayed-branch scheduling.
10927
 
10928
The exact purpose of the hook varies from target to target.  Some use
10929
it to do transformations that are necessary for correctness, such as
10930
laying out in-function constant pools or avoiding hardware hazards.
10931
Others use it as an opportunity to do some machine-dependent optimizations.
10932
 
10933
You need not implement the hook if it has nothing to do.  The default
10934
definition is null.
10935
@end deftypefn
10936
 
10937
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_INIT_BUILTINS (void)
10938
Define this hook if you have any machine-specific built-in functions
10939
that need to be defined.  It should be a function that performs the
10940
necessary setup.
10941
 
10942
Machine specific built-in functions can be useful to expand special machine
10943
instructions that would otherwise not normally be generated because
10944
they have no equivalent in the source language (for example, SIMD vector
10945
instructions or prefetch instructions).
10946
 
10947
To create a built-in function, call the function
10948
@code{lang_hooks.builtin_function}
10949
which is defined by the language front end.  You can use any type nodes set
10950
up by @code{build_common_tree_nodes};
10951
only language front ends that use those two functions will call
10952
@samp{TARGET_INIT_BUILTINS}.
10953
@end deftypefn
10954
 
10955
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_BUILTIN_DECL (unsigned @var{code}, bool @var{initialize_p})
10956
Define this hook if you have any machine-specific built-in functions
10957
that need to be defined.  It should be a function that returns the
10958
builtin function declaration for the builtin function code @var{code}.
10959
If there is no such builtin and it cannot be initialized at this time
10960
if @var{initialize_p} is true the function should return @code{NULL_TREE}.
10961
If @var{code} is out of range the function should return
10962
@code{error_mark_node}.
10963
@end deftypefn
10964
 
10965
@deftypefn {Target Hook} rtx TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN (tree @var{exp}, rtx @var{target}, rtx @var{subtarget}, enum machine_mode @var{mode}, int @var{ignore})
10966
 
10967
Expand a call to a machine specific built-in function that was set up by
10968
@samp{TARGET_INIT_BUILTINS}.  @var{exp} is the expression for the
10969
function call; the result should go to @var{target} if that is
10970
convenient, and have mode @var{mode} if that is convenient.
10971
@var{subtarget} may be used as the target for computing one of
10972
@var{exp}'s operands.  @var{ignore} is nonzero if the value is to be
10973
ignored.  This function should return the result of the call to the
10974
built-in function.
10975
@end deftypefn
10976
 
10977
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_RESOLVE_OVERLOADED_BUILTIN (unsigned int @var{loc}, tree @var{fndecl}, void *@var{arglist})
10978
Select a replacement for a machine specific built-in function that
10979
was set up by @samp{TARGET_INIT_BUILTINS}.  This is done
10980
@emph{before} regular type checking, and so allows the target to
10981
implement a crude form of function overloading.  @var{fndecl} is the
10982
declaration of the built-in function.  @var{arglist} is the list of
10983
arguments passed to the built-in function.  The result is a
10984
complete expression that implements the operation, usually
10985
another @code{CALL_EXPR}.
10986
@var{arglist} really has type @samp{VEC(tree,gc)*}
10987
@end deftypefn
10988
 
10989
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_FOLD_BUILTIN (tree @var{fndecl}, int @var{n_args}, tree *@var{argp}, bool @var{ignore})
10990
Fold a call to a machine specific built-in function that was set up by
10991
@samp{TARGET_INIT_BUILTINS}.  @var{fndecl} is the declaration of the
10992
built-in function.  @var{n_args} is the number of arguments passed to
10993
the function; the arguments themselves are pointed to by @var{argp}.
10994
The result is another tree containing a simplified expression for the
10995
call's result.  If @var{ignore} is true the value will be ignored.
10996
@end deftypefn
10997
 
10998
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_INVALID_WITHIN_DOLOOP (const_rtx @var{insn})
10999
 
11000
Take an instruction in @var{insn} and return NULL if it is valid within a
11001
low-overhead loop, otherwise return a string explaining why doloop
11002
could not be applied.
11003
 
11004
Many targets use special registers for low-overhead looping. For any
11005
instruction that clobbers these this function should return a string indicating
11006
the reason why the doloop could not be applied.
11007
By default, the RTL loop optimizer does not use a present doloop pattern for
11008
loops containing function calls or branch on table instructions.
11009
@end deftypefn
11010
 
11011
@defmac MD_CAN_REDIRECT_BRANCH (@var{branch1}, @var{branch2})
11012
 
11013
Take a branch insn in @var{branch1} and another in @var{branch2}.
11014
Return true if redirecting @var{branch1} to the destination of
11015
@var{branch2} is possible.
11016
 
11017
On some targets, branches may have a limited range.  Optimizing the
11018
filling of delay slots can result in branches being redirected, and this
11019
may in turn cause a branch offset to overflow.
11020
@end defmac
11021
 
11022
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_COMMUTATIVE_P (const_rtx @var{x}, int @var{outer_code})
11023
This target hook returns @code{true} if @var{x} is considered to be commutative.
11024
Usually, this is just COMMUTATIVE_P (@var{x}), but the HP PA doesn't consider
11025
PLUS to be commutative inside a MEM@.  @var{outer_code} is the rtx code
11026
of the enclosing rtl, if known, otherwise it is UNKNOWN.
11027
@end deftypefn
11028
 
11029
@deftypefn {Target Hook} rtx TARGET_ALLOCATE_INITIAL_VALUE (rtx @var{hard_reg})
11030
 
11031
When the initial value of a hard register has been copied in a pseudo
11032
register, it is often not necessary to actually allocate another register
11033
to this pseudo register, because the original hard register or a stack slot
11034
it has been saved into can be used.  @code{TARGET_ALLOCATE_INITIAL_VALUE}
11035
is called at the start of register allocation once for each hard register
11036
that had its initial value copied by using
11037
@code{get_func_hard_reg_initial_val} or @code{get_hard_reg_initial_val}.
11038
Possible values are @code{NULL_RTX}, if you don't want
11039
to do any special allocation, a @code{REG} rtx---that would typically be
11040
the hard register itself, if it is known not to be clobbered---or a
11041
@code{MEM}.
11042
If you are returning a @code{MEM}, this is only a hint for the allocator;
11043
it might decide to use another register anyways.
11044
You may use @code{current_function_leaf_function} in the hook, functions
11045
that use @code{REG_N_SETS}, to determine if the hard
11046
register in question will not be clobbered.
11047
The default value of this hook is @code{NULL}, which disables any special
11048
allocation.
11049
@end deftypefn
11050
 
11051
@deftypefn {Target Hook} int TARGET_UNSPEC_MAY_TRAP_P (const_rtx @var{x}, unsigned @var{flags})
11052
This target hook returns nonzero if @var{x}, an @code{unspec} or
11053
@code{unspec_volatile} operation, might cause a trap.  Targets can use
11054
this hook to enhance precision of analysis for @code{unspec} and
11055
@code{unspec_volatile} operations.  You may call @code{may_trap_p_1}
11056
to analyze inner elements of @var{x} in which case @var{flags} should be
11057
passed along.
11058
@end deftypefn
11059
 
11060
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_SET_CURRENT_FUNCTION (tree @var{decl})
11061
The compiler invokes this hook whenever it changes its current function
11062
context (@code{cfun}).  You can define this function if
11063
the back end needs to perform any initialization or reset actions on a
11064
per-function basis.  For example, it may be used to implement function
11065
attributes that affect register usage or code generation patterns.
11066
The argument @var{decl} is the declaration for the new function context,
11067
and may be null to indicate that the compiler has left a function context
11068
and is returning to processing at the top level.
11069
The default hook function does nothing.
11070
 
11071
GCC sets @code{cfun} to a dummy function context during initialization of
11072
some parts of the back end.  The hook function is not invoked in this
11073
situation; you need not worry about the hook being invoked recursively,
11074
or when the back end is in a partially-initialized state.
11075
@code{cfun} might be @code{NULL} to indicate processing at top level,
11076
outside of any function scope.
11077
@end deftypefn
11078
 
11079
@defmac TARGET_OBJECT_SUFFIX
11080
Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix for object
11081
files on your target machine.  If you do not define this macro, GCC will
11082
use @samp{.o} as the suffix for object files.
11083
@end defmac
11084
 
11085
@defmac TARGET_EXECUTABLE_SUFFIX
11086
Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix to be
11087
automatically added to executable files on your target machine.  If you
11088
do not define this macro, GCC will use the null string as the suffix for
11089
executable files.
11090
@end defmac
11091
 
11092
@defmac COLLECT_EXPORT_LIST
11093
If defined, @code{collect2} will scan the individual object files
11094
specified on its command line and create an export list for the linker.
11095
Define this macro for systems like AIX, where the linker discards
11096
object files that are not referenced from @code{main} and uses export
11097
lists.
11098
@end defmac
11099
 
11100
@defmac MODIFY_JNI_METHOD_CALL (@var{mdecl})
11101
Define this macro to a C expression representing a variant of the
11102
method call @var{mdecl}, if Java Native Interface (JNI) methods
11103
must be invoked differently from other methods on your target.
11104
For example, on 32-bit Microsoft Windows, JNI methods must be invoked using
11105
the @code{stdcall} calling convention and this macro is then
11106
defined as this expression:
11107
 
11108
@smallexample
11109
build_type_attribute_variant (@var{mdecl},
11110
                              build_tree_list
11111
                              (get_identifier ("stdcall"),
11112
                               NULL))
11113
@end smallexample
11114
@end defmac
11115
 
11116
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_CANNOT_MODIFY_JUMPS_P (void)
11117
This target hook returns @code{true} past the point in which new jump
11118
instructions could be created.  On machines that require a register for
11119
every jump such as the SHmedia ISA of SH5, this point would typically be
11120
reload, so this target hook should be defined to a function such as:
11121
 
11122
@smallexample
11123
static bool
11124
cannot_modify_jumps_past_reload_p ()
11125
@{
11126
  return (reload_completed || reload_in_progress);
11127
@}
11128
@end smallexample
11129
@end deftypefn
11130
 
11131
@deftypefn {Target Hook} reg_class_t TARGET_BRANCH_TARGET_REGISTER_CLASS (void)
11132
This target hook returns a register class for which branch target register
11133
optimizations should be applied.  All registers in this class should be
11134
usable interchangeably.  After reload, registers in this class will be
11135
re-allocated and loads will be hoisted out of loops and be subjected
11136
to inter-block scheduling.
11137
@end deftypefn
11138
 
11139
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_BRANCH_TARGET_REGISTER_CALLEE_SAVED (bool @var{after_prologue_epilogue_gen})
11140
Branch target register optimization will by default exclude callee-saved
11141
registers
11142
that are not already live during the current function; if this target hook
11143
returns true, they will be included.  The target code must than make sure
11144
that all target registers in the class returned by
11145
@samp{TARGET_BRANCH_TARGET_REGISTER_CLASS} that might need saving are
11146
saved.  @var{after_prologue_epilogue_gen} indicates if prologues and
11147
epilogues have already been generated.  Note, even if you only return
11148
true when @var{after_prologue_epilogue_gen} is false, you still are likely
11149
to have to make special provisions in @code{INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET}
11150
to reserve space for caller-saved target registers.
11151
@end deftypefn
11152
 
11153
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_HAVE_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTION (void)
11154
This target hook returns true if the target supports conditional execution.
11155
This target hook is required only when the target has several different
11156
modes and they have different conditional execution capability, such as ARM.
11157
@end deftypefn
11158
 
11159
@deftypefn {Target Hook} unsigned TARGET_LOOP_UNROLL_ADJUST (unsigned @var{nunroll}, struct loop *@var{loop})
11160
This target hook returns a new value for the number of times @var{loop}
11161
should be unrolled. The parameter @var{nunroll} is the number of times
11162
the loop is to be unrolled. The parameter @var{loop} is a pointer to
11163
the loop, which is going to be checked for unrolling. This target hook
11164
is required only when the target has special constraints like maximum
11165
number of memory accesses.
11166
@end deftypefn
11167
 
11168
@defmac POWI_MAX_MULTS
11169
If defined, this macro is interpreted as a signed integer C expression
11170
that specifies the maximum number of floating point multiplications
11171
that should be emitted when expanding exponentiation by an integer
11172
constant inline.  When this value is defined, exponentiation requiring
11173
more than this number of multiplications is implemented by calling the
11174
system library's @code{pow}, @code{powf} or @code{powl} routines.
11175
The default value places no upper bound on the multiplication count.
11176
@end defmac
11177
 
11178
@deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
11179
This target hook should register any extra include files for the
11180
target.  The parameter @var{stdinc} indicates if normal include files
11181
are present.  The parameter @var{sysroot} is the system root directory.
11182
The parameter @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
11183
@end deftypefn
11184
 
11185
@deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_PRE_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
11186
This target hook should register any extra include files for the
11187
target before any standard headers.  The parameter @var{stdinc}
11188
indicates if normal include files are present.  The parameter
11189
@var{sysroot} is the system root directory.  The parameter
11190
@var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
11191
@end deftypefn
11192
 
11193
@deftypefn Macro void TARGET_OPTF (char *@var{path})
11194
This target hook should register special include paths for the target.
11195
The parameter @var{path} is the include to register.  On Darwin
11196
systems, this is used for Framework includes, which have semantics
11197
that are different from @option{-I}.
11198
@end deftypefn
11199
 
11200
@defmac bool TARGET_USE_LOCAL_THUNK_ALIAS_P (tree @var{fndecl})
11201
This target macro returns @code{true} if it is safe to use a local alias
11202
for a virtual function @var{fndecl} when constructing thunks,
11203
@code{false} otherwise.  By default, the macro returns @code{true} for all
11204
functions, if a target supports aliases (i.e.@: defines
11205
@code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF}), @code{false} otherwise,
11206
@end defmac
11207
 
11208
@defmac TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES
11209
If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
11210
target-specific format checking information for the @option{-Wformat}
11211
option.  The default is to have no target-specific format checks.
11212
@end defmac
11213
 
11214
@defmac TARGET_N_FORMAT_TYPES
11215
If defined, this macro is the number of entries in
11216
@code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES}.
11217
@end defmac
11218
 
11219
@defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES
11220
If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
11221
target-specific format overrides for the @option{-Wformat} option. The
11222
default is to have no target-specific format overrides. If defined,
11223
@code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES} must be defined, too.
11224
@end defmac
11225
 
11226
@defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES_COUNT
11227
If defined, this macro specifies the number of entries in
11228
@code{TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES}.
11229
@end defmac
11230
 
11231
@defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_INIT
11232
If defined, this macro specifies the optional initialization
11233
routine for target specific customizations of the system printf
11234
and scanf formatter settings.
11235
@end defmac
11236
 
11237
@deftypevr {Target Hook} bool TARGET_RELAXED_ORDERING
11238
If set to @code{true}, means that the target's memory model does not
11239
guarantee that loads which do not depend on one another will access
11240
main memory in the order of the instruction stream; if ordering is
11241
important, an explicit memory barrier must be used.  This is true of
11242
many recent processors which implement a policy of ``relaxed,''
11243
``weak,'' or ``release'' memory consistency, such as Alpha, PowerPC,
11244
and ia64.  The default is @code{false}.
11245
@end deftypevr
11246
 
11247
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_INVALID_ARG_FOR_UNPROTOTYPED_FN (const_tree @var{typelist}, const_tree @var{funcdecl}, const_tree @var{val})
11248
If defined, this macro returns the diagnostic message when it is
11249
illegal to pass argument @var{val} to function @var{funcdecl}
11250
with prototype @var{typelist}.
11251
@end deftypefn
11252
 
11253
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_INVALID_CONVERSION (const_tree @var{fromtype}, const_tree @var{totype})
11254
If defined, this macro returns the diagnostic message when it is
11255
invalid to convert from @var{fromtype} to @var{totype}, or @code{NULL}
11256
if validity should be determined by the front end.
11257
@end deftypefn
11258
 
11259
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_INVALID_UNARY_OP (int @var{op}, const_tree @var{type})
11260
If defined, this macro returns the diagnostic message when it is
11261
invalid to apply operation @var{op} (where unary plus is denoted by
11262
@code{CONVERT_EXPR}) to an operand of type @var{type}, or @code{NULL}
11263
if validity should be determined by the front end.
11264
@end deftypefn
11265
 
11266
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_INVALID_BINARY_OP (int @var{op}, const_tree @var{type1}, const_tree @var{type2})
11267
If defined, this macro returns the diagnostic message when it is
11268
invalid to apply operation @var{op} to operands of types @var{type1}
11269
and @var{type2}, or @code{NULL} if validity should be determined by
11270
the front end.
11271
@end deftypefn
11272
 
11273
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_INVALID_PARAMETER_TYPE (const_tree @var{type})
11274
If defined, this macro returns the diagnostic message when it is
11275
invalid for functions to include parameters of type @var{type},
11276
or @code{NULL} if validity should be determined by
11277
the front end.  This is currently used only by the C and C++ front ends.
11278
@end deftypefn
11279
 
11280
@deftypefn {Target Hook} {const char *} TARGET_INVALID_RETURN_TYPE (const_tree @var{type})
11281
If defined, this macro returns the diagnostic message when it is
11282
invalid for functions to have return type @var{type},
11283
or @code{NULL} if validity should be determined by
11284
the front end.  This is currently used only by the C and C++ front ends.
11285
@end deftypefn
11286
 
11287
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_PROMOTED_TYPE (const_tree @var{type})
11288
If defined, this target hook returns the type to which values of
11289
@var{type} should be promoted when they appear in expressions,
11290
analogous to the integer promotions, or @code{NULL_TREE} to use the
11291
front end's normal promotion rules.  This hook is useful when there are
11292
target-specific types with special promotion rules.
11293
This is currently used only by the C and C++ front ends.
11294
@end deftypefn
11295
 
11296
@deftypefn {Target Hook} tree TARGET_CONVERT_TO_TYPE (tree @var{type}, tree @var{expr})
11297
If defined, this hook returns the result of converting @var{expr} to
11298
@var{type}.  It should return the converted expression,
11299
or @code{NULL_TREE} to apply the front end's normal conversion rules.
11300
This hook is useful when there are target-specific types with special
11301
conversion rules.
11302
This is currently used only by the C and C++ front ends.
11303
@end deftypefn
11304
 
11305
@defmac TARGET_USE_JCR_SECTION
11306
This macro determines whether to use the JCR section to register Java
11307
classes. By default, TARGET_USE_JCR_SECTION is defined to 1 if both
11308
SUPPORTS_WEAK and TARGET_HAVE_NAMED_SECTIONS are true, else 0.
11309
@end defmac
11310
 
11311
@defmac OBJC_JBLEN
11312
This macro determines the size of the objective C jump buffer for the
11313
NeXT runtime. By default, OBJC_JBLEN is defined to an innocuous value.
11314
@end defmac
11315
 
11316
@defmac LIBGCC2_UNWIND_ATTRIBUTE
11317
Define this macro if any target-specific attributes need to be attached
11318
to the functions in @file{libgcc} that provide low-level support for
11319
call stack unwinding.  It is used in declarations in @file{unwind-generic.h}
11320
and the associated definitions of those functions.
11321
@end defmac
11322
 
11323
@deftypefn {Target Hook} void TARGET_UPDATE_STACK_BOUNDARY (void)
11324
Define this macro to update the current function stack boundary if
11325
necessary.
11326
@end deftypefn
11327
 
11328
@deftypefn {Target Hook} rtx TARGET_GET_DRAP_RTX (void)
11329
This hook should return an rtx for Dynamic Realign Argument Pointer (DRAP) if a
11330
different argument pointer register is needed to access the function's
11331
argument list due to stack realignment.  Return @code{NULL} if no DRAP
11332
is needed.
11333
@end deftypefn
11334
 
11335
@deftypefn {Target Hook} bool TARGET_ALLOCATE_STACK_SLOTS_FOR_ARGS (void)
11336
When optimization is disabled, this hook indicates whether or not
11337
arguments should be allocated to stack slots.  Normally, GCC allocates
11338
stacks slots for arguments when not optimizing in order to make
11339
debugging easier.  However, when a function is declared with
11340
@code{__attribute__((naked))}, there is no stack frame, and the compiler
11341
cannot safely move arguments from the registers in which they are passed
11342
to the stack.  Therefore, this hook should return true in general, but
11343
false for naked functions.  The default implementation always returns true.
11344
@end deftypefn
11345
 
11346
@deftypevr {Target Hook} {unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT} TARGET_CONST_ANCHOR
11347
On some architectures it can take multiple instructions to synthesize
11348
a constant.  If there is another constant already in a register that
11349
is close enough in value then it is preferable that the new constant
11350
is computed from this register using immediate addition or
11351
subtraction.  We accomplish this through CSE.  Besides the value of
11352
the constant we also add a lower and an upper constant anchor to the
11353
available expressions.  These are then queried when encountering new
11354
constants.  The anchors are computed by rounding the constant up and
11355
down to a multiple of the value of @code{TARGET_CONST_ANCHOR}.
11356
@code{TARGET_CONST_ANCHOR} should be the maximum positive value
11357
accepted by immediate-add plus one.  We currently assume that the
11358
value of @code{TARGET_CONST_ANCHOR} is a power of 2.  For example, on
11359
MIPS, where add-immediate takes a 16-bit signed value,
11360
@code{TARGET_CONST_ANCHOR} is set to @samp{0x8000}.  The default value
11361
is zero, which disables this optimization.  @end deftypevr
11362
 
11363
@deftypevr {Target Hook} {unsigned char} TARGET_ATOMIC_TEST_AND_SET_TRUEVAL
11364
This value should be set if the result written by @code{atomic_test_and_set} is not exactly 1, i.e. the @code{bool} @code{true}.
11365
@end deftypevr

powered by: WebSVN 2.1.0

© copyright 1999-2024 OpenCores.org, equivalent to Oliscience, all rights reserved. OpenCores®, registered trademark.